Alinity Ci-Series Operation Manual - FSE 80000256-101
Alinity Ci-Series Operation Manual - FSE 80000256-101
Manual
For use with the Alinity c processing module and the Alinity i processing module
80000256-101
Table of contents
Read me first........................................................................................ 11
General safety information...................................................................................................... 12
System security........................................................................................................................ 13
Customer service..................................................................................................................... 14
Intended use............................................................................................................................. 15
Proprietary statement...............................................................................................................16
Disclaimers............................................................................................................................... 17
Alinity ci-series warranty statement for USA customers only................................................19
Alinity ci-series agency approvals...........................................................................................20
Intellectual Property statement................................................................................................21
Key to symbols......................................................................................................................... 22
System documentation...........................................................................25
Organization of the operations manual...................................................................................26
Conventions for the operations manual..................................................................................28
Operations manual description................................................................................................29
Toolbar.......................................................................................................................... 30
Navigation pane............................................................................................................ 30
Topic pane.................................................................................................................... 35
Operations manual use............................................................................................................37
Access the operations manual.....................................................................................37
Display and use the procedure map............................................................................38
Use the table of contents............................................................................................. 38
Scroll through a topic or the table of contents...........................................................38
Play an animation......................................................................................................... 39
Access the related information.................................................................................... 40
Use breadcrumbs to access a topic............................................................................40
Redisplay a topic...........................................................................................................41
Page through the content.............................................................................................41
Use the Toggle TOC button......................................................................................... 41
Use the index................................................................................................................ 41
Use the glossary........................................................................................................... 42
Search for a term......................................................................................................... 42
Move and close the operations manual...................................................................... 42
Print a topic from the operations manual....................................................................43
Procedure map description..................................................................................................... 44
Procedure map task lists..............................................................................................45
Use or function..................................................................................... 47
Alinity ci-series hardware overview......................................................................................... 48
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series.................................................................48
Alinity system software overview...........................................................................................126
Descriptions of screen elements............................................................................... 127
Menu bar..................................................................................................................... 130
Glossary.................................................................................................... 1379
Related information...
General safety information, page 12
System security, page 13
Customer service, page 14
Intended use, page 15
Proprietary statement, page 16
Disclaimers, page 17
Alinity ci-series warranty statement for USA customers only, page 19
Alinity ci-series agency approvals, page 20
Intellectual Property statement, page 21
Key to symbols, page 22
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
System security
Abbott Laboratories is committed to the security of the Alinity systems and reducing
cybersecurity risks associated with our medical devices.
Abbott Laboratories recognizes the importance of incorporating cybersecurity considerations
early and throughout our product design and development process. Our cybersecurity controls
were designed, developed, and implemented based on leading practices, regulatory guidance,
and government agencies.
Although we have designed the Alinity systems with cybersecurity controls, our customers also
play a vital role in protecting information security:
• Use of good laboratory practices and adherence to applicable regulations is recommended
at all times.
• The system should be installed in a secure location.
• Only authorized users should have access to the system because the system may contain
protected health information (PHI) or sensitive data.
• Although Alinity systems incorporate cybersecurity risk mitigation controls relating to network
connectivity, each system should be installed on a secure network that adheres to best
practices from a network security perspective to prevent unauthorized access to data
transmission between the Alinity system and external systems, such as a printer or host.
• Alinity systems also incorporate cybersecurity risk mitigation controls relating to connecting
USB storage devices. Reports or other data exported to USB storage devices should be
controlled with appropriate laboratory practices.
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Customer service
For questions about the Alinity ci-series, contact the local representative or find country-specific
contact information at abbottdiagnostics.com.
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Intended use
The Alinity ci-series is intended for In Vitro diagnostic use only.
The Alinity ci-series has a scalable design to provide full integration of clinical chemistry and
immunoassay analysis. The Alinity ci-series includes a clinical chemistry module and an
immunoassay module, each performing all sample processing activities, and a system control
module to provide a single user-friendly interface. Each system can be customized by combining
one or more sample processing modules, in multiple configurations, with a system control
module to form a single workstation.
The Alinity c processing module is a fully automated chemistry analyzer allowing random and
continuous access, as well as priority and automated retest processing using photometric and
potentiometric detection technology. The Alinity c processing module uses photometric detection
technology to measure sample absorbance for the quantification of analyte concentration and
uses potentiometric detection technology to measure the electrical potential in a sample. In
addition, the Alinity c processing module uses an integrated chip technology (ICT) module to
measure potentiometric assays (electrolytes).
The Alinity i processing module is a fully automated immunoassay analyzer allowing random and
continuous access, as well as priority and automated retest processing using chemiluminescent
microparticle immunoassay (CMIA) technology. CMIA technology is used to determine the
presence of antigens, antibodies, and analytes in samples.
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Proprietary statement
The Alinity ci-series software programs and system documentation are protected by copyright
(©2016 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, Illinois). All rights are reserved.
The software and manual were developed solely for use with the Alinity ci-series as specified in
the operating instructions.
The information, documents, and related graphics published herein (the "Information") are the
sole property of Abbott Laboratories. Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that:
• the copyright notice appears on all copies;
• use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by Abbott trained personnel or
informational use only;
• the Information is not modified in any way; and
• no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of the Information herein.
The Information is presented "AS IS" without warranties, either express or implied, and may
include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott Laboratories reserves the right to
make additions, deletions, or modifications to the Information at any time without any prior
notification.
Portions of the Alinity ci-series software may include open source or third party software as
further explained in the Software License Attributions document, which can be accessed on the
Utilities screen.
7-Zip copyright ©1999-2016 Igor Pavlov
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Disclaimers
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays or screens, etc.) are for information and illustration
purposes only and shall not be used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in
sample printouts and screens do not reflect actual patient names or test results.
The Information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories trained personnel, by other
persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified,
under the direct supervision and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical support or
service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred
in connection with or arising from the use of the information by persons not fully trained by
Abbott Laboratories.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any user of the Information
should make any oral, written or electronic response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback,
questions, comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such response and any information submitted
therewith shall be considered non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to reproduce, publish or
otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever including, without limitation, the
research, development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such
information. The sender of any information to Abbott is fully responsible for its content, including
its truthfulness and accuracy and its non-infringement of any other person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or services.
Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or electronic format. Always refer to
the latest documents for the most current information.
Incremental manual updates may cause the Master Table of Contents or Master Index page
numbering to change.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the prior written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
Data collection:
Abbott's AbbottLink software only collects operational and instrument data. It does not gather or
access patient, sensitive health or other identifiable personal information ("Personal Data").
Use of data:
AbbottLink is intended to transmit connected systems operational data, which may be used by
Abbott, and third parties providing related services and products, for troubleshooting, complaint
investigation, performance monitoring, product improvement, research, development, inventory
management, usage analytics, billing and other related purposes. In addition, AbbottLink may be
used to send system updates, to provide remote service and to facilitate Abbott's delivery of third
party services and products to Customer. The terms and conditions for Customer's use of such
third party services and products are to be provided to Customer separately by the applicable
third parties.
No Personal Data is transferred or accessed for company use.
Data privacy assurance:
All Personal Data is removed from operational data prior to AbbottLink retrieval. It is important
that our customers avoid entering Personal Data in any SID (Sample Identification) or comments
fields.
During Remote Support Instrument Screen Sharing, data is accessed and transferred on the
basis of consent provided by the user at the point of each individual screen-sharing event.
Please refer to the form of consent, displayed on your analyzer screen, when taking advantage
of this service.
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Key to symbols
The following symbols are used on Alinity ci-series labels and labeling.
Symbol Description
Authorized Representative in the European
Community
Caution: Biological RISKS
Date of manufacture
Manufacturer
Temperature limitation
Symbol Description
UL Recognized Component Mark
Acid Wash
Alkaline Wash
Detergent A
Detergent B
Distributed by
Kit
Manufactured by
Manufactured for
Pre-Trigger Solution
Produced by
Product of Japan
Product of Singapore
Product of USA
Symbol Description
Quantity
Reaction vessels
Revision
Sample cups
Sequence number
Serial number
Trigger Solution
Unit
Wash buffer
Related information...
Read me first, page 11
Related information...
Organization of the operations manual, page 26
Conventions for the operations manual, page 28
Operations manual description, page 29
Operations manual use, page 37
Procedure map description, page 44
Related information...
System documentation, page 25
Description Use
Italic font style Indicates a reference to related information.
Bold font style Emphasizes key words in procedures. For example,
in the numbered steps, bold font style is applied to
the following elements:
• Toolbar, icon, and menu items
• Buttons
• Commands
• Lists and tabs
• Dialog box titles and options
Numbers in brackets (for example, [1] and [2]) Reference specific areas of a graphic.
Description Use
Safety symbols and the CAUTION signal word Identify activities that expose the operator to
potentially dangerous conditions.
IMPORTANT signal word Advises the operator to comply with precautions to
prevent a negative impact on system operations or
results.
NOTE signal word Provides information that is relevant to the topic
content.
Related information list Provides references at the end of a topic that are
related to the topic.
Description Use
Numerical references on graphics Indicate items in a graphic that are described in the
legend.
Related information...
System documentation, page 25
Legend:
1. Title bar: Displays the title of the topic
2. Toolbar: Provides elements for navigation
3. Navigation pane: Provides an area to browse the operations manual content
4. Topic pane: Displays the topic content
5. Close button: Closes the operations manual
Related information...
System documentation, page 25
Toolbar, page 30
Toolbar
The toolbar contains navigation elements and a Print button.
Figure 2: Toolbar
Legend:
1. Home link
2. Search box
3. Procedure Map button
4. Toggle TOC button
5. Back and Forward buttons
6. Previous Topic and Next Topic buttons
7. Print button
Related information...
Operations manual description, page 29
Navigation pane
The navigation pane provides the primary navigation functionality. It provides an area to browse
the topic content by using the Content, Index, Glossary, or Search tab.
Related information...
Operations manual description, page 29
Contents tab, page 31
Index tab, page 33
Glossary tab, page 33
Search tab, page 34
Contents tab
The Contents tab is an element in the navigation pane that displays the table of contents, which
shows how information in the operations manual is organized. Topics are identified by a Book
icon or a Page icon.
Legend:
1. Book icon (closed): Indicates that a list of subtopics is collapsed
2. Book icon (open): Indicates that a list of subtopics is expanded
3. Page icon: Indicates that no subtopics are available
Related information...
Navigation pane, page 30
Index tab
The Index tab is an element in the navigation pane that displays an alphabetical list of all index
entries in the operations manual. Entries are sorted by subject and relevance and include terms
for all experience levels and informational types that range from general to specific.
Figure 5: Index tab
Related information...
Navigation pane, page 30
Glossary tab
The Glossary tab is an element in the navigation pane that displays an alphabetical list of terms
with definitions for those terms.
Related information...
Navigation pane, page 30
Search tab
The Search tab is an element in the navigation pane that displays a list of search results. The
search results are topic titles in the operations manual that are associated with a search term in
the Search box.
Legend:
1. Search tab
2. Search box
Related information...
Navigation pane, page 30
Topic pane
The topic pane is the area under the toolbar that displays topic content. The topic content may
contain navigation elements (for example, hypertext and image maps) and multimedia.
Legend:
1. Breadcrumbs: Provide a trail of topic links to show the hierarchy of topics that were previously
accessed
2. Topic content: Provides information about the system
3. Related information: Provides links to related topics
Related information...
Operations manual description, page 29
Related information...
System documentation, page 25
Access the operations manual, page 37
Display and use the procedure map, page 38
Use the table of contents, page 38
Scroll through a topic or the table of contents, page 38
Play an animation, page 39
Access the related information, page 40
Use breadcrumbs to access a topic, page 40
Redisplay a topic, page 41
Page through the content, page 41
Use the Toggle TOC button, page 41
Use the index, page 41
Use the glossary, page 42
Search for a term, page 42
Move and close the operations manual, page 42
Print a topic from the operations manual, page 43
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Legend:
1. Navigation pane scroll bar
2. Topic pane scroll bar
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Play an animation
The animation toolbar plays, pauses, and stops animations. It also can be used to seek a
specific location in an animation and to switch to a full-screen display.
Figure 10: Animation toolbar
Legend:
1. Play button
2. Seek button
3. Full Screen toggle button
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
NOTE: Topic breadcrumbs display associated topic content. The Home link displays the home
page of the operations manual.
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Redisplay a topic
Perform this procedure to display a topic that is viewed in the active Help session.
1. To display the last topic that was viewed, tap the Back button .
2. To display the next topic in a previously displayed sequence of topics, tap the Forward
button .
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
2. At the right side of the navigation pane, slide the scroll bar to view index headings (italic
font style) and index entries (plain font style).
3. To display the topic content in the topic pane, tap an index entry.
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Related information...
Operations manual use, page 37
Clean and decontaminate the monitor, page 774
Legend:
1. Procedure Map button: Provides access to tasks and procedures that are grouped by categories
2. Sample processing: Provides access to procedures used to prepare for system operation, to order
tests, to load and process samples, to review results, and to print reports
3. Quality control: Provides access to procedures used to review quality control data and to print quality
control reports
4. Manage data: Provides access to procedures used to manage system data
5. Help on Help: Provides access to procedures that describe how to use the operations manual
6. Maintenance: Provides access to procedures used to perform maintenance, to approve maintenance
logs, and to print reports
7. Troubleshooting: Provides access to procedures used to review system logs, to perform diagnostics,
to replace components, and to print diagnostic reports
8. Setup: Provides access to procedures used to configure and view settings for the system, assays,
quality control, and calibration, and to print reports
9. Calibration: Provides access to procedures used to calibrate assays
Related information...
System documentation, page 25
Procedure map task lists, page 45
Legend:
1. Task list item that is collapsed
2. Task list item that is expanded
Related information...
Procedure map description, page 44
Introduction
The Alinity ci-series of analyzers has a scalable design to provide full integration of multiple
clinical chemistry and immunoassay systems, all of which are controlled by one user-friendly
interface. This intuitive user interface provides a real-time display of each system’s status and a
to-do list of scheduled maintenance activities, which minimizes system interaction and optimizes
productivity. The Alinity ci-series analyzers have also incorporated numerous features to prevent
and reduce errors and to increase walkaway time.
Related information...
Alinity ci-series hardware overview, page 48
Alinity system software overview, page 126
Required consumables, page 133
Required accessories, page 144
Automatic processing module activities, page 147
Operating instructions, page 427
A multimodule system includes one Alinity c processing module and one Alinity i processing
module. Alinity chemistry systems can be configured to process samples by using photometric
and potentiometric methods. Alinity immunoassay systems use the chemiluminescent
microparticle immunoassay (CMIA) method.
Related information...
Use or function, page 47
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series, page 48
System control Provides a common user interface among all Alinity products.
module (SCM)
Reagent and sample Transports reagents, samples, calibrators, and controls
manager (RSM) through the Alinity ci-series. Each system has one primary
RSM regardless of the type and number of processing
modules.
Legend:
1. Processing module
2. RSM
3. SCM
Related information...
Alinity ci-series hardware overview, page 48
Procedure key, page 50
System control module (SCM), page 52
Reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 62
Processing modules, page 66
Optional components, page 123
Procedure key
The procedure key provides access to the front and rear processing center covers of the Alinity
ci-series processing modules and the reagent and sample manager by overriding the interlocks
for the processing module and system control module covers. The procedure key can be used to
perform maintenance procedures, diagnostic procedures, and component replacement
procedures.
Figure 14: Procedure key for the Alinity c
Related information...
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series, page 48
Descriptions of procedure key settings, page 746
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Legend:
1. Adjustable monitor: Displays the user interface of the Alinity ci-series and accepts on-screen
selections from the operator
2. Front SCM cover: Provides access to the RSM transport
NOTE: The front SCM cover is monitored by a sensor. If the cover is opened when the instrument
status of the RSM is Initializing or Running, the status transitions to Stopped.
3. SCM shelf: Provides a small shelf for the operator and provides access to remove the bar code
scanner
4. Bar code scanner: Provides a means to scan sample bar codes and supply bar codes
5. SCM front door: Provides access to the user interface computer and the procedure lock
Legend:
1. Rear SCM cover: Provides access to the user interface computer power strip
2. Rear SCM upper access panel: Provides access to the Ethernet switch
3. Rear SCM lower access panel: Provides access to the power supply and RSM electronics
4. SCM main power breaker: Powers on and powers off the SCM power supply
Related information...
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series, page 48
System control module (SCM) hardware components, page 55
Network connectors, page 56
Adjust the monitor position, page 57
Distance alert, page 60
Legend:
1. Bar code scanner: Scans SID bar codes and supply bar codes. When the SCM shelf is accessed, the
bar code scanner can be removed from the holder and can be used as a hand-held scanner.
2. Uninterrupted power supply (UPS): Provides a temporary, continuous flow of power to the user
interface (UI) computer during a power failure, which helps the operator to save data as necessary
and to perform a controlled shutdown procedure. (Optional component)
3. RSM X motor: Moves the RSM transport from position to position and from module to module.
4. Firewall: Provides data protection between the UI computer and the supporting communications
network.
5. UI power strip: Distributes AC power to the UI computer, the adjustable monitor, and the Ethernet
switch.
6. RSM embedded computer: Provides the software control for the RSM.
7. Ethernet switch: Joins communication lines and facilitates the electronic transfer of information
among the UI computer and the processing module embedded computer and the RSM embedded
computer.
8. Network connectors: Provides connections for external devices, such as host interface and
AbbottLink.
9. SCM power supply: Provides AC power to the UI power strip and DC power to the RSM hardware.
10. UI computer: Provides the software interface to the Alinity ci-series and provides an interface to a
host or middleware computer.
11. Water inlet: Provides a common area for the entrance and distribution of water for all processing
modules in a system.
12. Waste manifold: Provides a common waste outlet area for all processing modules in a system.
Related information...
System control module (SCM), page 52
Network connectors
Network connectors provide connections from the user interface computer, through the firewall,
to the wide area network (WAN) and to other external devices, such as the host interface, a
middleware computer, and Alinity PRO.
Legend:
1. WAN connector
2. Network connectors
Related information...
System control module (SCM), page 52
2. Adjust the monitor so that it is an arm's length from the face (38 cm to 76 cm or 15 in. to
30 in.).
5. Move the monitor to the right side or the left side of the instrument as needed. The ideal
position depends on the instrument configuration and the location of the operator.
6. Use the attached handles to rotate the monitor to the rear of the instrument when required.
Related information...
System control module (SCM), page 52
Distance alert
The distance alert is an optional component on the workstation that is used to identify instrument
conditions that require an operator response to maintain the optimal workflow.
The distance alert illuminates one of three colors (red, amber, or green) based on the status of
the workstation.
The following list provides descriptions of each color. If multiple conditions are present, the
colors are illuminated in the following order:
Red (blinking) • The instrument status of one or more processing modules
in the workstation transitions from Running or Processing
to Stopped or Offline without an operator request to
transition the status.
• A critical alert message is generated and is displayed on
the user interface.
Green (blinking) The instrument status of one or more processing modules, but
not all modules, in the workstation is Running or Processing.
Distance alert off When one of the multiple conditions is present, the following
situations occur:
• The distance alert is disabled.
• The user interface computer is shut down.
Related information...
System control module (SCM), page 52
• Moves racks and cartridges to the appropriate processing module or returns them to the
loading area
Legend:
1. Sample positioner: Positions racks at the sample aspiration position. Each module has two sample
positioners. A rack exchange occurs between the loading area and one sample positioner while the
other sample positioner positions samples for aspiration.
2. RSM bar code reader: An imaging camera that reads bar code labels on samples, racks, and
cartridges.
3. RSM transport: Transports racks and cartridges from the loading area to be read by the bar code
reader and to be placed on the module-specific sample positioner or reagent positioner.
4. Loading area: Positions racks and cartridges for loading and unloading.
Related information...
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series, page 48
Loading area, page 64
Status indicators, page 65
Loading area
The loading area holds racks and cartridges for routine and priority processing. Each processing
module includes one loading area.
Figure 24: Loading area
Legend:
1. Priority button: Temporarily assigns an RSM position as a priority position.
2. Priority position: Designated with a blue status indicator. Racks or cartridges inserted in this position
are processed before other positions.
3. Status indicators: Indicate the status of sample processing and when samples and reagents can be
accessed.
4. Tray: Holds racks and cartridges to load on the reagent and sample manager (RSM). Each tray holds
a maximum of five racks or cartridges. Empty trays may remain on the loading area to create five
positions to load racks or cartridges one at a time.
5. Position: Holds one rack or cartridge. Each processing module has 25 positions.
6. Bay: Holds trays that are used to position racks and cartridges for assay processing. Each processing
module contains five bays.
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 62
Racks, page 144
Trays, page 145
Reagent kits and components, page 133
Status indicators, page 65
Status indicators
Three status indicators (blue, green, and amber) are located above each reagent and sample
manager (RSM) position to indicate the status of sample processing and when racks and
cartridges can be accessed.
Figure 25: Status indicators
Green (steady) The rack or cartridge is inserted but is not in process. The
rack or cartridge can be accessed. [2]
Amber and green A bar code scan error or other error occurred. The rack or
(alternating) cartridge can be accessed.
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 62
Loading area, page 64
Unload trays from the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 533
Processing modules
Processing modules perform all sample-processing activities from sample aspiration to final
result reporting.
Unless otherwise indicated, "processing module" is used generically throughout this manual to
refer to both types of modules.
Related information...
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series, page 48
Processing module (Alinity c), page 66
Processing module (Alinity i), page 93
Legend:
1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay-processing
activities.
NOTE: The front processing center cover is monitored by two sensors. If the cover is opened during
Initializing status, Running status, or Processing status, the reagent and sample manager and the
processing module transition to Stopped status.
2. Bulk solution door: Provides access to the bulk solution storage area and the pump center.
3. Front electronics door: Provides access to the processing module electronics and the procedure lock.
Legend:
1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay-processing
activities.
NOTE: The rear processing center cover is monitored by a sensor. If the cover is opened when the
instrument status of the processing module is Initializing, Running, or Processing, the status
transitions to Stopped.
2. Rear access panel: Provides additional access to processing center components.
3. Rear lower access panel: Provides access to the water management unit.
4. Power supply panel: Provides access to the processing module power supply.
5. Processing module main power breaker: Powers on and powers off the power supply.
Related information...
Processing modules, page 66
Processing center (Alinity c), page 69
Supply and pump center (Alinity c), page 85
Reagent supply center (Alinity c) , page 91
Legend:
1. Pipetting hardware: Aspirates and dispenses sample and reagents
2. Reaction carousel hardware: Positions the cuvettes for sample and reagent dispense, mixing,
photometric or potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing
Related information...
Processing module (Alinity c), page 66
Pipetting hardware (Alinity c), page 69
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor (S): Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes and transfers diluted samples
from one cuvette to another.
2. Wash cups (SW, WB, R1W, and R2W): Wash any fluid that remains from the interior and exterior
surfaces of probes.
3. Reagent pipettors (R1 and R2): Aspirate and dispense reagents and onboard solutions into cuvettes.
The R1 pipettor also aspirates and dispenses diluents.
Related information...
Processing center (Alinity c), page 69
Pipettors (Alinity c), page 70
Wash cups (Alinity c), page 72
Sample wash solution area (Alinity c) , page 73
Pipettors (Alinity c)
Pipettors detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense samples and reagents into cuvettes. These
pipettor assemblies include a fluid sense system to help identify aspiration errors. The sample
pipettor includes the addition of a pressure-monitoring system to identify aspiration errors. Three
pipettors that have the following functions are located on the system:
• The sample pipettor (S) detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into cuvettes.
It also transfers diluted samples from the cuvette that is used to make the dilution into the
cuvette that is used for the reaction.
• The reagent 1 pipettor (R1) detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses diluents, reagents,
and onboard solutions into cuvettes.
• The reagent 2 pipettor (R2) detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses reagents and
onboard solutions into cuvettes.
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor
2. Reagent 1 pipettor
3. Reagent 2 pipettor
Related information...
Pipetting hardware (Alinity c), page 69
Legend:
1. Sample probe wash cup (SW): Washes the fluid that remains from the probe exterior and interior
between samples to eliminate carryover
2. Whole blood wash cup (WB): Washes the exterior of the sample probe before a whole blood sample
is dispensed into the cuvette
3. Reagent 1 pipettor wash cup (R1W): Washes any fluid that remains from the probe exterior and
interior
4. Reagent 2 pipettor wash cup (R2W): Washes any fluid that remains from the probe exterior and
interior
Related information...
Pipetting hardware (Alinity c), page 69
Legend:
1. Sample wash solution holder
2. Detergent A
3. Acid Probe Wash
Related information...
Pipetting hardware (Alinity c), page 69
The reaction carousel hardware components position the cuvettes for sample and reagent
dispense, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Figure 33: Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c)
Legend:
1. Mixers: Mix sample with reagent
2. ICT unit: Measures potentiometric assays (sodium, potassium, and chloride) by using integrated chip
technology (ICT)
3. Lamp: Provides the light source for photometric measurement
4. ICT high-concentration waste area: Receives liquid waste from the ICT unit
5. Cuvette washer: Washes and dries the cuvettes
6. Water bath overflow and waste area: Receives overflow from the water bath, excess water from the
sample pipettor, and liquid waste from the ICT Reference Solution cup
7. Cuvette segments: Hold the cuvettes in the reaction carousel
8. Reaction carousel: Positions the cuvettes for sample processing
9. High-concentration waste pump: Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate waste from the cuvettes to
the optional high-concentration waste bottle or the drain
Related information...
Processing center (Alinity c), page 69
Reaction carousel (Alinity c), page 75
Cuvette segments (Alinity c), page 76
Lamp (Alinity c), page 77
Mixers (Alinity c), page 78
Cuvette washer (Alinity c), page 79
ICT unit (Alinity c), page 81
ICT high-concentration waste area (Alinity c), page 82
Water bath overflow and waste area (Alinity c), page 83
High-concentration waste pump (Alinity c), page 84
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Lamp (Alinity c)
The lamp is an optical device that provides the light source for photometric assay measurement.
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Mixers (Alinity c)
The Alinity c processing module has two mixers that mix sample with reagent in the cuvette.
After each mixing operation, the exterior of the mixer is washed in the wash cup located beneath
the mixer.
Legend:
1. Mixer 1: Mixes the sample with reagent 1 or a diluent
2. Mixer 2: Mixes the sample and reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Nozzle 3 Dispenses Acid Wash to clean the cuvette and aspirates the
Acid Wash to waste
Nozzles 4 and 5 Dispense water to rinse the cuvette and aspirate the water to
waste
Nozzle 6 Dispenses water into the cuvette for the water blank
measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Legend:
1. ICT module: Measures electrolytes (Na+, K+, and Cl-) at a temperature of 37°C by using integrated
chip technology.
2. ICT probe: Connects to the ICT module in the ICT unit. The ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample
from the cuvettes or ICT Reference Solution from the ICT Reference Solution cup into the ICT
module for processing.
3. ICT Reference Solution cup: Located beneath the ICT probe when the ICT unit is in the home
position. It contains preheated ICT Reference Solution that is aspirated by the ICT probe and
measured by the ICT module. Sensors in the cup confirm that the cup fills completely and that
sufficient solution aspirates during measurement.
Legend:
1. ICT Reference Solution warming ring: A narrow metal tube located in the water bath. The warming
ring heats the reference solution to 37°C before the ICT Reference Solution cup is filled.
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Legend:
1. ICT high-concentration waste area
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Legend:
1. Sample tubing: Delivers excess purified water from the sample pipettor into the low-concentration
waste compartment
2. ICT Reference Solution cup low-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT
Reference Solution cup into the low-concentration waste compartment
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Related information...
Reaction carousel hardware (Alinity c), page 73
Legend:
1. Bulk solution storage area: Provides the onboard storage for replacement bulk solution bottles
2. Sample and reagent syringes area: Houses the sample and reagent syringes and drives
3. Bulk solution reservoir area: Provides the onboard storage for the ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline
Wash, and Acid Wash that are in use
4. Pump center: Houses the processing module pumps
Related information...
Processing module (Alinity c), page 66
Pump center (Alinity c), page 86
Bulk solution storage area (Alinity c), page 88
Bulk solution reservoir area (Alinity c), page 89
Sample and reagent syringe area (Alinity c), page 90
The pump center houses the processing module pumps. These pumps provide the pressure that
is needed to aspirate and dispense liquids into the appropriate components in the processing
center.
Figure 45: Pump center (Alinity c)
Legend:
1. Wash solution pump: Delivers diluted Alkaline Wash and Acid Wash solutions to the cuvettes during
daily operation and maintenance procedures.
2. ICT Reference Solution pump: Uses the syringe on the left side of the pump to deliver ICT Reference
Solution into the ICT Reference Solution cup. After the ICT Reference Solution is measured, the ICT
Reference Solution pump uses the syringe on the right side of the pump to drain the cup.
3. ICT aspiration pump: Uses the syringe on the right side of the pump to deliver samples or ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. After measurement is completed, the ICT
aspiration pump uses the syringe on the left side of the pump to aspirate waste from the ICT high-
concentration waste area to the high-concentration waste tubing.
4. ICT aspiration valve: Controls the direction of liquid flow while the ICT aspiration pump operates.
Related information...
Supply and pump center (Alinity c), page 85
Legend:
1. Alkaline Wash: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
2. Acid Wash: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
3. ICT Reference Solution: Aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and after each sample to
provide a reference potential that is used in result calculation.
4. Bottle release button: Releases a bulk solution cap from a bottle holder to remove and replace a bulk
solution bottle.
5. Bottle holder: Stores a replacement bulk solution bottle. Contains a mechanism that pierces the bulk
solution septum.
Related information...
Supply and pump center (Alinity c), page 85
Bulk solutions (c-series), page 137
Legend:
1. Alkaline Wash reservoir: Holds in-use Alkaline Wash solution.
2. Acid Wash reservoir: Holds in-use Acid Wash solution.
3. ICT Reference Solution reservoir: Holds in-use ICT Reference Solution.
4. Reservoir bottle tray: Holds the bulk solution reservoirs. Slides out to access the bulk solution
reservoirs.
Related information...
Supply and pump center (Alinity c), page 85
Bulk solutions (c-series), page 137
Legend:
1. Sample syringe: Aspirates and dispenses the sample
2. Reagent syringes 1 and 2: Aspirates and dispenses the reagent and onboard solutions
Related information...
Supply and pump center (Alinity c), page 85
Legend:
1. Reagent carousel: Holds reagent cartridges and frequently used calibrators and controls. The
carousel rotates to provide reagent access to reagent 1 and reagent 2 pipettors.
2. Reagent positioner: Positions cartridges and onboard vial racks to load in the reagent carousel or
onto the loading area. When the reagent positioner is in the open position, the cartridge or rack can
be transferred to the loading area. When the reagent positioner is in the closed position, the cartridge
or rack can be transferred to the reagent carousel.
3. Reagent transport: Places cartridges and onboard vial racks in the reagent carousel or onto the
reagent positioner.
Related information...
Processing module (Alinity c), page 66
Reagent carousel (Alinity c), page 92
Reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 62
Legend:
1. Reagent segment: A section of the reagent carousel. The reagent carousel has two types of
segments and 12 total segments:
– Eleven segments can hold a maximum of six cartridges. Vial racks cannot be stored in these
segments.
– The twelfth segment contains the reagent carousel calibration target. This segment can hold a
maximum of four cartridges or vial racks.
Related information...
Reagent supply center (Alinity c) , page 91
Legend:
1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay-processing
activities.
NOTE: The front processing center cover is monitored by two sensors. If the cover is opened during
Initializing status, Running status, or Processing status, the reagent and sample manager and the
processing module transition to Stopped status.
2. RV hopper cover: Provides access to the RV hopper to replenish reaction vessels.
3. Bulk solution door: Provides access to the bulk solution storage area and the RV waste storage area.
4. Front electronics door: Provides access to the processing module electronics and embedded
computer, and the procedure lock.
Legend:
1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay-processing
activities.
NOTE: The rear processing center cover is monitored by one sensor. If the cover is opened when the
instrument status of the processing module is Initializing, Running, or Processing, the status
transitions to Stopped.
2. Rear access panel: Provides additional access to processing center components.
3. Rear electronics panel: Provides access to instrument electronics.
4. Processing module main power breaker: Powers on and powers off the power supply.
5. Rear fluidics panel: Provides access to pumps and syringes.
Related information...
Processing modules, page 66
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
Supply center (Alinity i), page 115
Reagent supply center (Alinity i), page 120
Legend:
1. Process path: Provides incubation at a controlled temperature, liquid aspiration, and wash points as
necessary for assay processing
2. Pretreatment path: Provides incubation at a controlled temperature for pretreatment assay protocols
3. Pipetting hardware: Aspirates and dispenses samples and reagents
4. RV loader: Provides the onboard storage for RVs and transports RVs to the process and pretreatment
paths
Related information...
Processing module (Alinity i), page 93
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Legend:
1. Vortexers (VTXR1, VTXR2, and VTXPT): Mix the reaction mixture to suspend microparticles.
2. Diverters (LD, STD, and WZD): Move RVs in the processing module from one lane of the process
path to a different lane during assay processing.
3. Liquid waste arm: Removes the liquid from RVs.
4. Wash zone assemblies (WZ1 and WZ2): Dispense the wash buffer into RVs, and remove and discard
the unbound material from the RV reaction mixture.
5. RV access door (RVA): Provides access to one position on the reaction lane. Use this door only for
diagnostic purposes.
6. Process path motor (PPM): Rotates the process path disk, which holds the RVs, and advances the
RVs from position to position.
7. Pre-Trigger and Trigger manifold (PTTM): First dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution into RVs and then
dispenses Trigger Solution into RVs.
8. Optics: Measures the chemiluminescent emission from RVs and outputs the data that corresponds to
the quantity of emission detected.
9. RV unloader (RVU): Removes used RVs from the process path and discards them into the solid waste
container after assay processing is completed.
Related information...
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
Vortexers (Alinity i), page 98
Diverters (Alinity i) , page 99
Liquid waste arm (Alinity i), page 100
Wash zone assemblies (Alinity i) , page 101
RV access door (Alinity i) , page 102
Process path motor (Alinity i) , page 103
Pre-Trigger and Trigger manifold (Alinity i) , page 104
Optics (Alinity i), page 105
RV unloader (Alinity i) , page 106
Pretreatment path (Alinity i), page 107
Vortexers (Alinity i)
Three vortexers are located on the process path:
• R1 pipettor vortexer (VTXR1)
• R2 pipettor vortexer (VTXR2)
• Pre-Trigger vortexer (VTXPT)
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Diverters (Alinity i)
Diverters move reaction vessels (RVs) in the processing module from one lane of the process
path to a different lane during assay processing. The following three diverters are located on the
process path:
• The load diverter (LD) directs RVs from the load lane to the incubation lane.
• The STAT diverter (STD) directs RVs from the incubation lane to the reaction lane for STAT
assay processing.
• The wash zone diverter (WZD) directs RVs to one of two lanes. One lane moves RVs
through the wash zone where a wash occurs. The other lane moves RVs to the wash zone
bypass lane where a wash does not occur.
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Optics (Alinity i)
The optics measures the chemiluminescent emission from reaction vessels and outputs the data
that corresponds to the quantity of emission detected.
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Optical system and measurement sequence (i-series), page 378
RV unloader (Alinity i)
The RV unloader (RVU) removes used reaction vessels from the process path and discards
them into the solid waste container after assay processing is completed.
Related information...
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
Legend:
1. Pretreatment path motor (pPM): Rotates the pretreatment path disk, which holds the RVs, and
advances the RVs from position to position
2. Pretreatment vortexer (pVTX): Mixes the reaction mixture to suspend microparticles
3. Pretreatment unload diverter (pUD): Unloads RVs used for sample pretreatments and sample dilutions
from the pretreatment path into the solid waste container
Related information...
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
Pretreatment unload diverter (Alinity i), page 108
Pretreatment path motor (Alinity i), page 109
Pretreatment vortexer (Alinity i), page 110
Assay processing for pretreatment (i-series), page 384
Process path (Alinity i), page 97
The pretreatment unload diverter (pUD) unloads reaction vessels used for sample pretreatments
and sample dilutions from the pretreatment path into the solid waste container.
Figure 65: Pretreatment unload diverter (Alinity i)
Related information...
Pretreatment path (Alinity i), page 107
Related information...
Pretreatment path (Alinity i), page 107
Related information...
Pretreatment path (Alinity i), page 107
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor (S): Aspirates and dispenses samples into reaction vessels (RVs)
2. Reagent pipettors (R1 and R2): Aspirate and dispense reagents into RVs
3. Wash cups (SW, R1W, and R2W): Wash any fluid that remains from the interior and exterior surfaces
of probes
Related information...
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
Pipettors (Alinity i), page 112
Wash cups (Alinity i), page 113
Pipettors (Alinity i)
Pipettors detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense samples and reagents into reaction vessels
(RVs). These pipettor assemblies include a pressure-monitoring system that helps to identify
aspiration errors. Three pipettors that have the following functions are located on the system:
• The sample pipettor (S) detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into RVs in the
process path and the pretreatment path. It also transfers pretreated samples from the
pretreatment path to the process path after the appropriate incubation period.
• The reagent 1 pipettor (R1) detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses reagents into RVs in
the process path and the pretreatment path. It also transfers diluted samples from the
pretreatment path to the process path as required.
• The reagent 2 pipettor (R2) detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses reagents into RVs in
the process path.
Related information...
Pipetting hardware (Alinity i), page 111
Related information...
Pipetting hardware (Alinity i), page 111
RV loader (Alinity i)
The RV loader system (RVL) provides the onboard storage for reaction vessels (RVs) and
transports RVs to the process path and the pretreatment path.
The RV loader performs the following functions:
• Feeds RVs from the upper hopper to the lower hopper as needed
• Lifts RVs one at a time and places them in an upright position in the linear queue
• Lifts RVs from the linear queue and places them on the process path and the pretreatment
path
Legend:
1. Upper hopper: Stores bulk RVs loaded by the operator.
2. Lower hopper and RV orienter: The lower hopper stores a limited amount of RVs. The RV orienter lifts
one RV at a time and places the RV in the linear queue.
3. Linear queue: Stages upright RVs in preparation for loading.
4. RV pick and place assembly: Moves RVs one at a time to the process path and the pretreatment
path.
Related information...
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
Legend:
1. Bulk solution storage area: Provides the onboard storage for replacement bulk solution bottles
2. Bulk solution reservoir area: Provides the onboard storage for in-use bulk solutions
3. RV waste storage area: Provides the storage for used RVs
Related information...
Processing module (Alinity i), page 93
Bulk solution storage area (Alinity i), page 116
Reservoir areas (Alinity i), page 117
RV waste storage area (Alinity i) , page 119
Legend:
1. Concentrated Wash Buffer: Mixed with purified water and then pumped to sample and reagent
pipettor assemblies and to wash zones during assay processing.
2. Trigger Solution: Produces the chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read.
3. Pre-Trigger Solution: Separates the acridinium dye from the conjugate that is bound to the
microparticle complex. This action prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger Solution.
4. Bottle release button: Releases a bulk solution cap from a bottle holder to remove and replace a bulk
solution bottle.
5. Bottle holder: Stores a replacement bulk solution bottle. Contains a mechanism that pierces the bulk
solution septum.
Related information...
Supply center (Alinity i), page 115
Bulk solutions (i-series), page 138
The bulk solution reservoir area, which is located in the supply center, provides the onboard
storage for bulk solutions in use during assay processing. When onboard bulk solution reservoirs
are empty, bulk solutions from replacement bottles on the bulk solution door fill the reservoirs
without an interruption in system operation. Concentrated Wash Buffer from its onboard bulk
solution reservoir is diluted tenfold by the system and is stored in a 4 L diluted wash buffer
reservoir for use during assay processing.
Figure 74: Bulk solution reservoir area (Alinity i)
Legend:
1. Reservoir bottle tray: Holds transfer pumps, bulk solution reservoirs, and the vacuum and waste
accumulator. Slides out to access the bulk solution reservoirs.
2. Transfer pump rack: Holds transfer pumps for the Pre-Trigger Solution, the Trigger Solution, and the
Concentrated Wash Buffer. The pumps transfer bulk solutions from replacement bottles to bulk
solution reservoirs.
3. Concentrated Wash Buffer reservoir: Holds in-use Concentrated Wash Buffer.
4. Trigger Solution reservoir: Holds in-use Trigger Solution.
5. Pre-Trigger Solution reservoir: Holds in-use Pre-Trigger Solution.
Legend:
1. Diluted wash buffer reservoir: Holds diluted wash buffer for use during assay processing
Related information...
Supply center (Alinity i), page 115
Bulk solutions (i-series), page 138
Legend:
1. RV waste chute: Directs the used RVs into the RV waste container. The RV waste container can be
removed during assay processing. When the container is removed, the RV waste chute closes and
holds 50 RVs before the processing module pauses.
2. RV waste container: Holds the used RVs.
3. RV waste storage tray: Holds the RV waste container.
Related information...
Supply center (Alinity i), page 115
Legend:
1. Reagent carousel: Holds reagent cartridges, maintenance solutions, and frequently used calibrators
and controls. The carousel rotates to provide reagent access to reagent 1 and reagent 2 pipettors.
2. Reagent positioner: Positions cartridges and onboard vial racks to load in the reagent carousel or
onto the loading area. When the reagent positioner is in the open position, the cartridge or rack can
be transferred to the loading area. When the reagent positioner is in the closed position, the cartridge
or rack can be transferred to the reagent carousel.
3. Reagent transport: Places cartridges and onboard vial racks in the reagent carousel or onto the
reagent positioner.
Related information...
Processing module (Alinity i), page 93
Reagent carousel (Alinity i), page 121
Reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 62
The reagent carousel is a rotating, circular device that performs the following functions:
• Holds a maximum of 47 bar-coded reagent cartridges, onboard solutions, and vial racks in a
cooled environment at a controlled temperature
• Provides microparticle dispersion by continuous rotation of microparticle reagent bottles
• Rotates to position reagent cartridges and onboard solutions so that reagents or solutions
can be aspirated and dispensed
• Rotates to position vial racks for transfer to the sample positioner so that calibrators and
controls can be aspirated and dispensed
Legend:
1. Reagent segment: A section of the reagent carousel that holds a maximum of six cartridges or vial
racks. The reagent carousel has a total of eight reagent segments. One segment contains the
reagent carousel calibration target. This segment holds a maximum of five cartridges or vial racks.
2. Reagent position: A section of a reagent segment that holds one cartridge or vial rack.
3. Reagent carousel calibration target: A calibration target that is used to align the reagent pipettor to
cartridges and vials.
Related information...
Reagent supply center (Alinity i), page 120
Optional components
The following components are optional for processing modules:
External waste pump Moves waste from the waste outlet to an elevated drain.
Related information...
Primary components of an Alinity ci-series, page 48
External waste pump, page 123
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle and update the inventory (c-series), page 514
Legend:
1. Power outlet: Provides power to the external waste pump.
2. Power switch: Turns on and turns off the power to the pump. When the power switch is turned on, the
pump automatically activates to move the waste.
3. Voltage select switch: Shifts the allowable voltage from 110 V to 220 V.
4. Manual operating switch: Turns on the power to the pump and activates the pump.
Legend:
1. Waste outlet quick disconnect: Provides a connection for tubing to an elevated drain
2. Inlet quick disconnect: Provides a connection for tubing from the waste manifold
Related information...
Optional components, page 123
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements, page 411
Legend:
1. Menu bar: Provides navigation elements and status indicators. Each icon on this bar represents a
screen category. When an icon is selected, an associated screen is displayed. The Alert Center at
the top of this bar indicates when alerts and notifications occur on the system and provides access to
details about alerts and notifications.
2. Screen header: Provides the screen title, the system name, the Help button, the Notepad button, the
name of the logged-on operator, the Lock button, the date and time, and the software version.
3. Information area: Provides access to all system information and functions associated with the
selected screen element.
4. Function buttons: Provide access to functions associated with the active screen. Buttons with blue
text are available for use. Buttons with purple text are unavailable for use until a screen element is
selected.
5. Flyout: Provides additional details or additional functions associated with the active screen.
Related information...
Use or function, page 47
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Menu bar, page 130
Check boxes Display a list of choices from which to select one or more
items.
Specific screen element descriptions that explain the kind of information to enter, select, or view
are available for each screen and can be accessed by the links provided in the following
Related information... section.
Related information...
Alinity system software overview, page 126
Home screen element descriptions, page 464
Supplies screen element descriptions (c-series), page 501
Supplies screen element descriptions (i-series), page 505
Orders screen element descriptions, page 584
Sample Status screen element descriptions, page 604
Results screen, Unreleased tab element descriptions, page 617
Results screen, Specimen tab element descriptions, page 618
Results screen, Control tab element descriptions, page 620
Results screen, Exception tab element descriptions, page 621
Calibration Status screen element descriptions, page 702
Procedures Log screen, Maintenance tab element descriptions, page 753
System Logs screen, All Messages tab element descriptions, page 930
System Logs screen, Notifications/Alerts tab element descriptions, page 932
System Logs screen, Informational tab element descriptions, page 933
System Logs screen, Inventory tab element descriptions, page 934
System Logs screen, User Access tab element descriptions, page 935
System Logs screen, Configuration tab element descriptions, page 936
System Logs screen, Host tab element descriptions, page 937
System Logs screen, Abbott Mail tab element descriptions, page 938
Cal/QC Inventory screen element descriptions, page 519
Reagents screen, Current tab element descriptions, page 534
Reagents screen, Historical tab element descriptions, page 538
Create Order screen, Specimen tab element descriptions, page 591
Create Order screen, Control tab element descriptions, page 593
Create Order screen, Calibration tab element descriptions, page 594
Procedures screen element descriptions, page 741
Menu bar
The menu bar provides navigation elements that are used to display screens, flyouts, and
menus. The following figure shows examples of the Alert Center flyout, status indicators, buttons,
icons, and the System menu.
Legend:
1. Alert Center: Provides the Alert Center button, which displays a flyout of status information, and
provides two types of status indicators for system problems that require attention. Status indicators
called badges are displayed on icons to notify the operator when a specific system problem requires
attention:
– A red triangle (alert) badge indicates system problems that require immediate attention.
– An amber circle (notification) badge indicates system problems that require attention that is not
immediate.
2. Icons: Navigation elements that provide access to specific screens and functions. The menu bar
provides these icons:
– Home
– Sample Status
– Orders
– Results
– QC
– CAL
– Reagents
– Supplies
System button: Displays a menu of commands. System menu commands that are configured as
icons are not displayed on the menu.
3. Configurable icons: Navigation elements that can be configured to provide navigation for common
functions. Some of the System menu commands can be configured for these icons.
Related information...
Alinity system software overview, page 126
Required consumables
Required consumables are replenishable items that are needed for sample processing on the
Alinity ci-series. Be sure to maintain an adequate inventory of required consumables.
CAUTION: Many of the consumables used with the Alinity ci-series are mixtures of
chemical substances or biological substances. Some of the mixtures may be hazardous
to the operator under certain conditions. See warnings or instructions provided on
product-specific labels, in the product documentation, and in product-specific Safety
Data Sheets.
Related information...
Use or function, page 47
Reagent kits and components, page 133
Controls, page 135
Calibrators, page 136
Bulk solutions (c-series), page 137
Bulk solutions (i-series), page 138
Onboard solutions (c-series), page 139
Maintenance solutions (c-series), page 139
ICT module (c-series), page 140
Probe conditioning solution (i-series), page 141
Reaction vessels (i-series), page 142
Sample cups, page 142
Biological hazards, page 723
Chemical hazards, page 725
Legend:
1. Alinity i reagent cartridge: Provides the necessary components for an Alinity ci-series
chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay assay. Each reagent bottle in the cartridge contains an
integrated septum unless otherwise indicated in the assay documentation.
2. Alinity c reagent cartridge: Provides the necessary components for an Alinity ci-series photometric or
potentiometric assay.
3. Alinity Reagent Replacement Cap: Seals a reagent cartridge to prevent reagent leakage when the
cartridge is removed from the system and is stored in an external refrigerator.
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Loading area, page 64
Controls
Controls are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte. Controls are available as
single-constituent and multiconstituent controls. Some controls can be stored for use in the
reagent carousel. To identify the controls that are required for an assay, see the assay
documentation.
Figure 84: Alinity ci-series controls
Legend:
1. Single-constituent control: An assay-specific sample that contains known concentrations of an
analyte.
2. Multiconstituent control: A sample that contains multiple analytes.
3. Alinity ci-series Calibrator/Control Replacement Caps: Replace the original caps on calibrator and
control vials that are loaded on the reagent and sample manager for calibration and control testing.
The replacement cap seals the vial to prevent leakage when the vial is removed from the system and
is stored in an external refrigerator. The original cap is not used to prevent analyte cross
contamination.
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte. A variety of single-
constituent and multiconstituent calibrators are used on the Alinity c-series. Single-constituent
calibrators are used on the Alinity i-series. Some calibrators can be stored in the reagent
carousel. To identify the required calibrators for an assay, see the assay documentation.
Figure 85: Alinity ci-series calibrators
Legend:
1. Alinity i calibrators: Include single-constituent calibrators that are used in the calibration of i-series
assays.
2. Alinity c calibrators: Include single-constituent and multiconstituent calibrators that are used in the
calibration of c-series photometric assays.
3. Alinity c ICT calibrators: Used in the calibration of c-series potentiometric assays.
4. Alinity ci-series Calibrator/Control Replacement Caps: Replace the original caps on calibrator and
control vials that are loaded on the reagent and sample manager for calibration and control testing.
The replacement cap seals the vial to prevent leakage when the vial is removed from the system and
is stored in an external refrigerator. The original cap is not used to prevent analyte cross
contamination.
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Legend:
1. Alkaline Wash (0.5 L bottle): An alkaline wash solution that is used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis.
2. ICT Reference Solution: (975 mL in a 1 L bottle): A midconcentration standard solution that is
aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and after each sample. The solution provides a
reference potential that is used in result calculation.
3. Acid Wash (0.5 L bottle): An acidic wash solution that is used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis.
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Bulk solution storage area (Alinity c), page 88
Bulk solution reservoir area (Alinity c), page 89
Legend:
1. Pre-Trigger Solution (1 L bottle): A solution that contains 1.32% (W/V) hydrogen peroxide solution that
separates the acridinium dye from the conjugate that is bound to the microparticle complex. This
action prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger Solution. Pre-Trigger Solution is
sensitive to light, is stored at a temperature of 2°C to 8°C, and is stable on the system for 28 days.
2. Trigger Solution (1 L bottle): A solution that contains 0.35N sodium hydroxide solution that produces
the chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read. This solution is stored at a temperature of
2°C to 30°C and is stable on the system for a maximum of 28 days. Some assays require a shorter
onboard stability period. For more information, see the assay documentation.
3. Concentrated Wash Buffer (2 L bottle): A solution that contains phosphate-buffered saline and
antimicrobial agents. This solution is diluted tenfold by the system and then is pumped to sample and
reagent pipettor assemblies and to wash zones during assay processing. This solution is stored at a
temperature of 15°C to 30°C and is stable on the system for 30 days.
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Bulk solution storage area (Alinity i), page 116
Reservoir areas (Alinity i), page 117
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
SmartWash feature (c-series), page 370
maintenance cartridge is filled with Water Bath Additive, an antimicrobial solution that is used to
prevent and control microbial contamination in the water bath. During maintenance, the solution
is dispensed into the water bath. The small bottle of the maintenance cartridge is empty and is
reserved for the reconstituted Cleaning Solution. Cleaning Solution is supplied as a lyophilized
material with a diluent. The reconstituted cleaning solution is added to the small bottle. During
daily maintenance, the reconstituted cleaning solution is used to clean sample and reagent
probes, mixers, the ICT probe, and the ICT module.
Figure 89: Maintenance solutions (c-series)
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
5501 Daily Maintenance (c-series), page 759
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Sample cups
Sample cups are 1400 μL disposable containers that hold samples. Volume graduation marks at
125 μL, 500 μL, and 1400 μL eliminate the need to pipette with precision.
Sample cups can be placed in sample tubes with bar code labels to facilitate positive
identification.
Figure 93: Sample cup
Related information...
Required consumables, page 133
Required accessories
Required accessories are parts that are needed for sample processing on the Alinity ci-series.
Be sure to maintain an adequate inventory of required accessories.
Related information...
Use or function, page 47
Racks, page 144
Trays, page 145
Reagent cartridge with empty bottles (c-series), page 145
Racks
Racks are accessories that are used on the reagent and sample manager to transport
specimens, calibrators, and controls to the sample pipettor. The Alinity ci-series uses three types
of racks.
Figure 94: Racks
Legend:
1. Vial rack: Bar-coded for identification with the letter V. Holds six open vials of calibrators or controls
for immediate use. The rack cannot be stored in the reagent carousel.
2. Onboard vial rack: Bar-coded for identification with the letter U. Holds six vials of calibrators or
controls. The rack is stored in the reagent carousel.
3. Sample rack: Bar-coded for identification. Holds six primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups. Any
combination of tubes and cups can be used in the rack.
4. Sample gauge: Used to verify that the amount of sample in an aliquot tube exceeds 8 mm.
Related information...
Required accessories, page 144
Loading area, page 64
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) sample processing for onboard calibrators and controls,
page 567
Onboard storage criteria for calibrator and control vials, page 568
Trays
Trays are accessories that are used to hold multiple racks of samples, calibrators, and controls
and to hold reagent cartridges. Trays of racks and cartridges are loaded on the reagent and
sample manager. Each tray holds a maximum of five racks or cartridges. Empty trays may
remain on the loading area to create five positions to load racks or cartridges one at a time.
Figure 95: Tray
Related information...
Required accessories, page 144
Loading area, page 64
Related information...
Required accessories, page 144
Prepare sample diluents and user-defined reagents (c-series), page 552
Related information...
Use or function, page 47
System flush (c-series), page 147
System flush (i-series), page 147
System prime (i-series), page 148
Processing module wash (c-series), page 148
Automatic rotation of the reagent carousel (c-series), page 149
Related information...
Automatic processing module activities, page 147
• After a bulk solution is replaced on the bulk solution door and the bulk solution reservoir is
at or below the lowest detectable level
Related information...
Automatic processing module activities, page 147
Related information...
Automatic processing module activities, page 147
Related information...
Automatic processing module activities, page 147
Related information...
Automatic processing module activities, page 147
NOTES
Introduction
For accurate test results and optimal system performance, the Alinity ci-series must be correctly
installed. After the system has been installed, configure it to meet individual laboratory
requirements.
Related information...
System installation and relocation, page 152
System configuration, page 154
Utilities screen, page 323
Related information...
Installation procedures and special requirements, page 151
System installation, page 152
System checkout, page 152
System relocation, page 153
System installation
Before the installation of the Alinity ci-series, an Abbott Laboratories representative confirms that
the site is prepared. The system location must meet environmental specifications and electrical
requirements before the representative can install the system.
The representative unpacks, positions, and installs the system. During the installation, the
representative performs the system setup and confirms that the system operates within the
manufacturer's specifications.
After the installation, the customization or configuration of the system may be performed before
any testing is initiated.
Related information...
System installation and relocation, page 152
Specifications and requirements, page 394
System checkout
After the Alinity ci-series is installed, the following procedures may be performed to ensure that
the system operates appropriately:
• Install assay files.
• Configure system settings.
• Configure Abbott assays.
• Configure user-defined assays.
• Configure calibrator sets.
• Configure quality controls.
• Order and calibrate assays.
• Order and run controls.
Related information...
System installation and relocation, page 152
Install assay files, page 272
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Orders screen, page 584
System relocation
For information about the relocation of the Alinity ci-series, contact an Abbott Laboratories
representative.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
Related information...
System installation and relocation, page 152
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
System configuration
Configuration settings define the information that the Alinity ci-series needs to meet laboratory-
specific requirements. System configuration is performed after system installation. The system
can be reconfigured at any time if necessary.
Related information...
Installation procedures and special requirements, page 151
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Configure screen, Maintenance & Diagnostics tab, page 310
Related information...
System configuration, page 154
Users screen, page 155
User Profile screen, page 165
Modules screen, page 168
Printers screen, page 176
Bar Codes screen, page 183
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Reports screen, page 196
Abbott Mail screen, page 199
System checkout, page 152
Users screen
On the Users screen, the operator can view the following information for users that have been
created on the system:
• Operator ID
• First and last names
• Access level
• Status
• Date on which a user was created
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Users screen element descriptions, page 156
Users Import screen, Users Export screen element descriptions, page 157
Descriptions of access levels, page 158
Create New User screen element descriptions, page 159
Create a new user, page 160
Edit User screen element descriptions, page 161
Edit a user, page 162
Inactivate or activate a user, page 163
Import users, page 163
Export users, page 164
Manage user PINs, page 165
Elements
Level Displays one the following access levels for the user:
• General
• Supervisor
• Administrator
Created On Displays the date and time that the user profile was created.
Function buttons
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
File Name Displays the name of the exported user database file.
Created On Displays the date and time that the exported user database
file was created.
Import File Displays the file location and file name of the selected
exported user database file. The element is displayed only on
the Users Import screen.
Export Location Displays the drive and folder location to which the exported
user database file is exported. The element is displayed only
on the Users Export screen.
Function buttons
Import Imports the selected file. This function button is displayed only
on the Users Import screen.
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Additionally, Abbott Customer Service may provide a user name and a temporary password to
operators who call for troubleshooting assistance. This logon authorizes selected functions in
addition to those functions allowed by the system administrator logon.
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Log On screen, page 454
Elements
First Name Displays a box to enter the first name of the new user.
Last Name Displays a box to enter the last name of the new user.
Level Displays the following access level options for the new user:
• General
• Supervisor
• Administrator
Status Displays the following status options for the new user:
Function buttons
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to create a new user. An operator ID and a PIN must be created for an
operator to log on to the system software and use the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Users.
3. On the Users screen, tap Create New User.
4. On the Create New User screen, enter the operator ID.
The operator ID can contain a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters.
5. Type the first and last names.
6. In the Level area, tap an option for the operator access level.
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Elements
Level Displays the access level of the user. One of the following
options is enabled:
• General
• Supervisor
• Administrator
Status Displays the status of the user. One of the following options is
enabled:
Created On Displays the date and time that the user profile was created.
Last Updated On Displays the date and time that the user profile was most
recently edited.
Last Updated By Displays the operator ID of the system administrator who most
recently edited the user profile.
Function buttons
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Edit a user
Perform this procedure to edit the first name, the last name, and the access level of a user.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Users.
3. On the Users screen, tap an operator ID to edit.
NOTE: To filter the operator IDs, tap Search.
4. Tap Edit User.
5. On the Edit User screen, edit any of the following information:
– First Name
– Last Name
– Level
– Status
NOTE: A user cannot edit the level and status of the user's own profile.
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Search for or filter data, page 664
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Search for or filter data, page 664
Import users
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Export users
Perform this procedure to export users to a USB flash drive. After the users are exported, the
users can be installed on a different system.
1. Insert the USB flash drive.
2. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
3. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Users.
4. On the Users screen, tap Export.
5. On the Users Export screen, tap the USB drive and folder to which to export the user files.
6. Tap Export.
7. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes, and then tap OK.
8. Remove the USB flash drive.
9. To return to the Users screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Perform this procedure to change one or more user PINs. System administrators can change
their personal user PINs and the user PINs of other users.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Users.
3. On the Users screen, tap an operator ID to edit.
NOTE: To filter the operator IDs, tap Search.
4. Tap Set PIN.
5. In the Set PIN flyout, enter the following information:
a. Your PIN (the current four-digit PIN of the logged-on system administrator or user)
b. New PIN (a new four-digit PIN for the selected operator ID)
c. Re-enter New PIN (the confirmation of the new PIN for the selected operator ID)
6. To save the edits to the user settings and return to the Users screen, tap Done.
7. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
8. To delete the edits to the user settings and return to the Users screen, tap Cancel.
Related information...
Users screen, page 155
Search for or filter data, page 664
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
User Profile screen element descriptions, page 166
Configure a personal display theme, page 167
Change a personal user PIN, page 167
Elements
General
Created On Displays the date and time that a user was created.
Display
Function buttons
Related information...
User Profile screen, page 165
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
User Profile screen, page 165
Related information...
User Profile screen, page 165
Modules screen
On the Modules screen, the operator can view the following information:
• Serial numbers for each processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM)
• The number of assigned reagent carousel positions for onboard calibrators and controls
• The quality control shift start time
• The location and number of priority sections
• Specific parameters for each processing module and the RSM
• Instrument test cycle counts
The supervisor can edit the quality control shift start time.
The system administrator can perform the following functions:
• Configure the module name.
• Configure the number of assigned reagent carousel positions for onboard calibrators and
controls.
• Configure the location and number of priority sections.
• Configure specific parameters for each processing module and the RSM.
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Modules screen, reagent and sample manager (RSM) element descriptions, page 168
Modules screen, c-series element descriptions, page 170
Modules screen, i-series element descriptions, page 172
Configure reagent and sample manager module settings, page 174
Configure c-series module settings , page 174
Configure i-series module settings, page 175
Function buttons
Related information...
Modules screen, page 168
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Onboard Cal/QC Displays the Onboard Cal/QC Positions drop-down list, which
is used to configure the number of reagent carousel positions
that are available for onboard vial racks. When a reagent
carousel position is configured, the position is unavailable for
cartridge storage. A position from 1 through 4 can be
selected. The default position is 1.
Quality Control Displays the Shift Start Time spin box, which is used to
configure a shift start time and to define quality control runs
with respect to Westgard rules that relate to within-run and
between-run data points. Use the HH:MM format to enter a
shift start time by typing the time in the box or by tapping the
Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons. Use the AM or PM
button to configure the time of day.
• Yes (default)
• No
Function buttons
Add Module (FSE Displays the Add Module screen. This function button is used
Logon) to add a module to the system software.
Related information...
Modules screen, page 168
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Onboard Cal/QC Displays the Onboard Cal/QC Positions drop-down list, which
is used to configure the number of reagent carousel positions
that are available for onboard vial racks. When a reagent
carousel position is configured, the position is unavailable for
cartridge storage. A position from 1 through 4 can be
selected. The default position is 1.
Quality Control Displays the Shift Start Time spin box, which is used to
configure a shift start time and to define quality control runs
with respect to Westgard rules that relate to within-run and
between-run data points. Use the HH:MM format to enter a
shift start time by typing the time in the box or by tapping the
Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons. Use the AM or PM
button to configure the time of day.
STAT Protocol Displays the STAT Protocol Percentage slider, which is used
to configure the number of reaction vessel positions that are
allocated for STAT assay protocols. If this percentage does
not reflect the actual number of STAT protocols that were
run, throughput may be decreased.
Function buttons
Add Module (FSE Displays the Add Module screen. This function button is used
Logon) to add a module to the system software.
Related information...
Modules screen, page 168
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure reagent and sample manager module settings.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Modules.
3. In the Module Name box on the Modules screen, if a name other than the name that is
displayed is needed, type a new module name.
4. Under Retest Options, tap an option to reposition samples for retesting automatically.
5. Under Priority Sections, enter the following information:
– Location of Priority Sections
– Number of Priority Sections
6. To save the edits to the module settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the module settings, tap Cancel.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Modules screen, page 168
Automated retest of specimens, page 583
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Modules.
3. Under Module Information on the Modules screen, tap a c-series module in the drop-down
list.
4. In the Module Name box, if a name other than the name that is displayed is needed, type a
new module name.
5. In the Onboard Cal/QC Position drop-down list under Onboard Cal/QC, tap the number of
reagent carousel positions that are assigned to onboard calibrators and controls.
6. In the Shift Start Time box under Quality Control, enter the time for quality controls to be
performed automatically.
NOTE: A supervisor can configure the shift start time.
7. In the Installed area under ICT Module, tap an option.
8. In the Installed area under Liquid Waste Container, tap an option.
9. To save the edits to the module settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the module settings, tap Cancel.
10. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Modules screen, page 168
Westgard rule run descriptions, page 640
6. In the Shift Start Time box under Quality Control, enter the time for quality controls to be
performed automatically.
NOTE: A supervisor can configure shift start time.
7. Under STAT Protocol, slide the STAT Protocol Percentage button to the right or left to
increase or decrease the STAT percentage.
8. Under Optics Values, enter the values for Normalization and Linearity that are located on
the optics assembly.
NOTE: Normalization and linearity values need to be updated only when an optics assembly
is replaced.
9. To save the edits to the module settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the module settings, tap Cancel.
10. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Modules screen, page 168
Westgard rule run descriptions, page 640
Printers screen
On the Printers screen, the operator can view information for a configured printer.
The system administrator can perform the following functions:
• Add a new printer.
• Verify a new printer.
• Change the configuration of an existing printer.
• Configure a printer as the default.
• Access the printer queue.
• Remove a configured printer from the software.
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Printers screen element descriptions, page 177
Add Printer flyout/Edit Printer flyout element descriptions, page 178
Printer Verification flyout element descriptions, page 179
Printer Queue flyout element descriptions, page 180
Add a printer, page 180
Edit a printer, page 181
Verify a printer, page 182
Change the default printer, page 183
Elements
Verified User Displays the identification of the operator who verified the
printer operation.
Verified Date Displays the date and time of the last successful verification
of the printer operation.
Paper Size Displays the paper size configured for the printer: A4 or
Letter.
Function buttons
Make Default Used to select a default printer if more than one printer is
configured. A check mark is displayed in the Default column
in the row of the default printer. Only one printer can be
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
IP Address Used to enter the internet protocol (IP) address for a new
printer.
Paper Size Used to select the paper size configured for the printer: A4 or
Letter
Print on Both Sides Used to select to print documents on both sides of the paper
(duplex) or to print on a single side (simplex).
Function buttons
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Elements
Print Options Displays the print options for the Printer Verification flyout.
Report Selection Displays a list of the reports that are available to print. A
preview of the selected report is displayed before the report is
printed.
Function buttons
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Elements
Status Displays one of the following statuses for the print request:
Queued, Printing, Error, Deleting, or Out of Paper.
Date Displays the date and time that the print request was
submitted to the printer queue.
Pages Displays the number of pages for the document in the printer
queue.
Function buttons
Delete All Deletes all print requests from the printer queue.
Delete Selected Deletes selected print requests from the printer queue.
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Add a printer
After the new printer is added, the printer must be verified before it is available to print a report
or document.
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Verify a printer, page 182
Edit a printer
Perform this procedure to edit the printer settings for a configured printer.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Printers.
3. In the list on the Printers screen, tap a printer.
4. Tap Edit Printer.
5. In the Edit Printer flyout, edit any of the following information:
– Name
– IP Address
– Paper Size
– Print on Both Sides
6. To save the edits to the printer settings, tap Done.
To delete the edits to the printer settings, tap Cancel
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Verify a printer
Perform this procedure when a new printer is added. After the new printer is added, the printer
must be verified before it is available to print a report or document.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Printers.
3. In the list on the Printers screen, tap a printer.
4. Tap Verify Printer.
5. Under Report Selection in the Printer Verification flyout, tap Printer Verification Report.
6. Tap Print.
7. Compare the printed report to the report that is displayed in the Printer Verification flyout.
The printed report and the displayed report must be identical. If the two reports are not
identical, the printer is not verified.
NOTE: To adjust the size of the text in the displayed report, tap the Text Size button.
8. Tap Done.
9. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap one of the following buttons:
– Tap Yes if the printed report and the displayed report are identical.
– Tap No if the printed report and the displayed report are not identical.
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Add a printer, page 180
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Remove a printer
Related information...
Printers screen, page 176
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Bar Codes screen element descriptions, page 184
Change sample bar code settings , page 185
Elements
Bar Code Type Displays the following options for bar code types:
• Enabled
• Disabled
Send Checksums to Used to specify whether the checksums are sent to the user
UI Computer interface (UI) computer if the selected bar code type supports
it.
Send Start/Stop Used to specify whether the start and stop characters are
Characters to UI sent to the UI computer if the selected bar code type supports
Computer it.
Primary Code Length Used to specify the length for the primary bar code. The
range is from 2 through 20 with an incremental value of 2.
The default is 10.
Secondary Code Used to specify the length for the secondary bar code if a
Length second code length is necessary. The range is from 2 through
20 with an incremental value of 2. The default is 8.
Function buttons
Related information...
Bar Codes screen, page 183
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
5. For Codabar symbology, if the checksums are enabled, tap the Send Checksums to UI
Computer check box to send the checksums to the user interface (UI) computer.
6. For Codabar symbology, if the checksums are enabled, tap the Send Start/Stop Characters
to UI Computer check box to send start and stop characters to the UI computer.
7. For Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology, edit the following settings:
– Primary Code Length
– Secondary Code Length
8. To save the edits to the bar code settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the bar code settings, tap Cancel.
9. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Bar Codes screen, page 183
Sample bar code label guidelines, page 417
The system administrator can also perform the following functions only for c-series modules:
• Configure the ability to run calibrations for each reagent lot or reagent cartridge.
• Configure low alert settings for onboard diluents and onboard solutions.
• Configure which module in a multimodule system uses Detergent B.
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Reagents and Supplies screen, Reagents/Diluents tab element descriptions, page 187
Reagents and Supplies screen, Supplies tab element descriptions , page 189
Configure system level reagent settings, page 192
Run Controls for Displays the options that are used to specify which reagent
Onboard Reagents by kits to run for quality control:
Default Assay Displays a box that is used to enter the amount of time in
Calibration Interval hours that the calibration is valid.
Default i-series Displays a box that is used to enter the reagent low alert for
Reagent Low Alert all i-series reagents. The notification is displayed when the
number of remaining tests falls below the defined value.
Default c-series Displays a box that is used to enter the reagent low alert for
Reagent Low Alert all c-series reagents. The notification is displayed when the
number of remaining tests falls below the defined value.
Low Alert (Percent) Displays a box that is used to enter the diluent low alert
percentage. The notification is displayed when the percent
volume level falls below the defined value:
• Range: 1% to 50%
• Default: 20%
Calibrate Reagent By Displays the options that are used to calibrate an assay:
Reagent Low Alert Displays the boxes that are used to enter the reagent low
(Test Count) alert for individual assays. The notification is displayed when
the number of remaining tests for all onboard kits for a
specific reagent falls below the defined value. The default for
c-series tests is 100.
Alert Low Value Displays the low alert that is used by an assay:
Reagent Low Alert Displays the boxes that are used to enter the reagent low
(Test Count) alert for individual assays. The notification is displayed when
the number of remaining tests for all onboard kits for a
specific reagent falls below the defined value. The default for
i-series tests is 50.
Alert Low Value Displays the low alert that is used by an assay:
Function buttons
Print 1D Barcode Displays the Print 1D flyout. This function button is available
only for user-defined assays and diluents.
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Supply Options
i-series Supply
Options Override Stability Used to override the i-series bulk
solutions stability dates.
Options are:
• On
• Off (Default)
c-series Supply
Options Override Stability Used to override the c-series bulk
solutions stability dates.
Options are:
• On
• Off (Default)
i-series Bulk Solutions Used to enter low alert level percentages of the i-series bulk
solutions: Wash Buffer, Trigger, and Pre-Trigger. The
notification displays when the volume falls below the defined
value.
• Range: 1-50%
• Default: 20%
c-series Bulk Used to enter low alert level percentages of the c-series bulk
Solutions solutions: ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid
Wash. The notification displays when the volume falls below
the defined value.
• Range: 1-50%
• Default: 20%
c-series Onboard Used to enter low alert level percentages of the c-series
Solutions onboard solutions: Sample-Acid Probe Wash, Sample-
Detergent A, Reagent-Acid Probe Wash, Reagent-Detergent A,
and Reagent-Detergent B. The notification displays when the
volume falls below the defined value.
• Range: 1-50%
• Default: 20%
Function buttons
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the following system level reagent settings:
• The option to run controls for each reagent lot or each reagent cartridge
• The option to run reagents that are beyond the reagent onboard stability expiration and the
reagent lot expiration
• Reagent low alert settings for all immunoassay reagents and clinical chemistry reagents
NOTE: Running the system with overridden reagents is not recommended except when
troubleshooting is required. All results that are generated from overridden reagents are
flagged with an EXP result flag.
4. Tap one of the following Run Controls for Onboard Reagents by options:
– Lot: Run controls only on one cartridge for each lot.
– Cartridge: Run controls for all cartridges in a lot.
NOTE: Changing the control option does not change the control option in the assay
parameters for individual assays that are currently installed. This change only affects new
assay files that are installed or are imported.
5. In the Default i-series Reagent Low Alert box, type the number of remaining tests that
trigger the low alert status for all i-series reagents.
6. In the Default c-series Reagent Low Alert box, type the number of remaining tests that
trigger the low alert status for all c-series reagents.
7. To save the edits to the reagent settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the reagent settings, tap Cancel.
8. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Configure diluent low alert settings (c-series), page 193
Configure individual c-series reagent settings, page 193
Configure individual i-series reagent settings, page 194
Perform this procedure to configure low alert settings for c-series onboard diluents.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Reagents and Supplies.
3. Under Diluent Low Alert on the Reagents and Supplies screen, for the appropriate diluent,
edit the remaining low alert percentage that triggers the low alert status.
4. To save the edits to the reagent settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the reagent settings, tap Cancel.
5. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Configure system level reagent settings, page 192
Perform this procedure to configure the following individual c-series reagent settings:
• The option to run calibrations for each reagent lot or each reagent cartridge
• Reagent low alert settings for individual c-series reagents
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Reagents and Supplies.
3. On the Reagents and Supplies screen, tap the c-series Reagents tab.
4. For each appropriate reagent under Calibrate Reagent By on the c-series Reagents tab,
tap one of the following options:
– Lot: Run calibrations only on one cartridge for each lot.
– Cartridge: Run calibrations for all cartridges in a lot.
5. For each appropriate reagent under Reagent Low Alert (Test Count), edit the number of
remaining tests that trigger the low alert status.
6. To save the edits to the reagent settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the reagent settings, tap Cancel.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Configure system level reagent settings, page 192
Perform this procedure configure reagent low alert settings for individual i-series reagents.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Reagents and Supplies.
3. On the Reagents and Supplies screen, tap the i-series Reagents tab.
4. For each appropriate reagent under Reagent Low Alert (Test Count) on the i-series
Reagents tab, edit the number of remaining tests that trigger the low alert status.
5. To save the edits to the reagent settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the reagent settings, tap Cancel.
6. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Configure system level reagent settings, page 192
Related information...
Reagents and Supplies screen, page 186
Reports screen
On the Reports screen, the operator can view settings for automatically generated reports.
The operator can configure print screen output options.
The supervisor can configure settings for automatically generated reports.
The system administrator can configure a facility name to display on each report.
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Reports screen element descriptions, page 196
Configure report settings, page 197
Configure the print screen file output destination, page 198
Elements
Used to enable automatic printing of the Sample Laboratory Report, the Result List Report
(Released), the Calibration Details Report, and the Procedure Report (Maintenance). This area
provides three automatic printing options:
• Off (default)
• Default Printer
• Save to File
If the Save to File option is selected, the Sample Laboratory File Location box is displayed to
enter the drive and folder where the file is saved. The Browse button is used to select the drive
and folder location.
Sample Laboratory Automatically prints the Sample Laboratory Report after all
results for a sample are released.
Results List Automatically prints the Result List Report for released results
based on one of the following criteria:
• 15 results
• 15 minutes
Send Print Screen Used to select the destination of a generated print screen.
Output To This area provides two destination options:
• Default Printer
• Save to File (default)
Function buttons
Related information...
Reports screen, page 196
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Reports screen, page 196
Related information...
Reports screen, page 196
Print a screen image, page 663
Related information...
Configure screen, General tab, page 154
Abbott Mail screen element descriptions, page 199
Configure Abbott Mail settings, page 200
Elements
Download Options
Function buttons
Related information...
Abbott Mail screen, page 199
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
NOTE: If the assay insert notifications are disabled, assay inserts are assigned
automatically to the new reagent lot without being displayed on the Abbott Mail screen.
The assay insert status is Current.
– Calibrator Data
4. In the Download Language drop-down list, tap the language for the Abbott Mail
documentation.
5. To save the edits to the Abbott Mail settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the Abbott Mail settings, tap Cancel.
6. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Abbott Mail screen, page 199
• Sender channel
• Receiver channel
• Test HL7 communication
Related information...
System configuration, page 154
General Settings screen, page 202
Audio Settings screen, page 206
Host Setup screen, page 209
HL7 Communication screen, page 212
ASTM Communication screen, page 215
Shortcuts screen, page 217
Automatic Backup screen, page 219
Alinity PRO screen, page 221
AbbottLink screen, page 222
Distance Alert screen, page 225
System checkout, page 152
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
General Settings screen element descriptions, page 203
Configure general settings, page 205
Elements
Date/Time Zone
Time Zone Displays a drop-down list that is used to select the area-
specific time zone.
Automatically Adjust Displays a check box that is used to adjust the clock
Clock for Daylight automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Saving Time
Number Format
Thousand/Decimal Used to select the number format for the thousands and
Separator decimal separator.
The following options are available:
• Comma and Period (1,000,000.00) (default)
• Period and Comma (1.000.000,00)
• None and Period (1000000.00)
• None and Comma (1000000,00)
Speaker Volume
Speaker Volume Used to adjust the speaker volume from 0 through 10.
NOTE: This setting is available only if the system is
configured with speakers.
System Information
SCM Serial Number Displays the serial number of the system control module.
System Language Displays a drop-down list that is used to select the system
language.
Log On Screen Time- Used to edit the setting for the screen time-out:
out
• Range is from 0 minutes through 60 minutes.
• Default is 15 minutes.
Function buttons
Related information...
General Settings screen, page 202
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the general settings for the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap General Settings.
4. Under Date/Time Zone on the General Settings screen, enter the following information:
– System Date
– Date Format
– Time Zone
– System Time
– Time Format
– Automatically Adjust Clock for Daylight Saving Time
NOTE: When any of the Date/Time Zone settings are changed, the user interface (UI)
computer shuts down and restarts.
5. Under Number Format, tap an option in the Thousand/Decimal Separator area.
NOTE: When the number format is changed, the UI computer shuts down and restarts.
6. Under Speaker Volume, slide the Speaker Volume button to the right or left to increase or
decrease the speaker volume.
NOTE: The speaker volume can be configured at any operator level and in any instrument
status.
7. Under System Information, enter the following information:
– System Name
– System Language
NOTE: The system language can be configured at any operator level.
When the system language is changed, the UI computer shuts down and restarts.
– Disable Sample Processing When Maintenance Is Overdue
– Log On Screen Time-Out
NOTE: The Log On screen time-out can be configured in any instrument status.
– Require Authentication for General Operator
NOTE: Required authentication can be configured in any instrument status.
8. To save the edits to the general settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the general settings, tap Cancel.
9. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
General Settings screen, page 202
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Audio Settings screen element descriptions, page 207
Configure audio settings, page 208
Elements
Turn Off All Audio Displays a check box that is used to disable all audio alerts
Alerts on the system. For the default setting, the check box is
selected.
Alert Volume Used to adjust the volume of all audio alerts from 0 through
10. The default setting is 5.
Critical, Alert, Displays a drop-down list for each message type that is used
Notification to select an available sound.
Function buttons
Related information...
Audio Settings screen, page 206
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the audio settings for the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap Audio Settings.
4. Under Global Settings on the Audio Settings screen, enter the following information:
– Tap the Turn Off All Audio Alerts check box to enable or disable audio alerts.
– Slide the Alert Volume button to the right or left to increase or decrease the alert
volume.
5. Under Message Alert Settings, enter the following information for each message category:
– Tap the audio sound in the message category drop-down list.
– Tap the number of times to repeat the audio sound in the Repeat drop-down list.
NOTE: To hear a sample of the selected sound, tap the Play button next to the drop-down
list.
6. To save the edits to the audio settings, tap Save.
Related information...
Audio Settings screen, page 206
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Host Setup screen element descriptions, page 209
Configure host settings, page 211
Elements
Host Interface Used to configure the system to receive orders from and
transmit results to a host computer.
The following options are available:
• HL7
• ASTM
• Off (default)
Query Mode Used to configure the system to send queries for orders to the
host computer.
The following options are available:
• On
• Off (default)
Query Time-Out Used to enter the maximum time period that the system waits
Seconds for the host computer to respond to a query.
The range is from 5 seconds through 60 seconds.
The default setting is 10 seconds.
Used to define the method for transmitting the released results to the host computer.
Specimens • Single
• Collated (default)
• Collated by Module (This option is available only for a
multimodule system.)
Control • Single
• Collated (default)
• Collated by Module (This option is available only for a
multimodule system.)
• Off
Calibration • On
• Off (default)
Sample Status • On
• Off (default)
Test Status • On
• Off (default)
Used to configure the release mode for specimens, controls, and exceptions. The following
options are available for each result type:
• Manual (default)
• Automatic
• Automatic with Exceptions
• Hold
Function buttons
Related information...
Host Setup screen, page 209
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the host settings for the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap Host Setup.
4. Under Interface Options on the Host Setup screen, enter the following information:
– Host Interface
NOTE: To configure Host Interface, the required instrument status is Stopped,
Warming, or Idle.
– Query Mode
– Query Time-Out Seconds
5. Under Transmission Options, enter the following information:
– Specimen
NOTE: To configure Specimen, the required instrument status is Stopped, Warming, or
Idle.
– Control
– Calibrator
– Sample Status
– Test Status
NOTE: The transmission options Calibrator, Sample Status, and Test Status are only
available if Host Interface is configured for HL7.
6. Under Result Release Mode Options, enter the following information:
NOTE: To configure Result Release Mode Options, the required instrument status is
Stopped, Warming, or Idle.
– Specimen
– Control
7. To save the edits to the host settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the host settings, tap Cancel.
8. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Host Setup screen, page 209
Edit result settings of assay parameters , page 239
Host orders, page 578
Verify the HL7 communication, page 1307
Verify the ASTM communication, page 1308
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
HL7 Communication screen element descriptions, page 213
Configure HL7 communication settings, page 214
Elements
Message Headers
MSH-3 Sending Used to configure the MSH-3 Sending Application for HL7
Application host messaging for a maximum of 20 alphanumeric
characters.
MSH-4 Sending Used to configure the MSH-4 Sending Facility for HL7 host
Facility messaging for a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters.
MSH-5 Receiving Used to configure the MSH-5 Receiving Application for HL7
Application host messaging for a maximum of 20 alphanumeric
characters.
MSH-6 Receiving Used to configure the MSH-6 Receiving Facility for HL7 LIS
Facility messaging for a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters.
• Passive
• Active Persistent (only for Sender Channel)
Port Number Used to enter the port number. The port number range is from
0 through 65535.
Function buttons
Related information...
HL7 Communication screen, page 212
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the HL7 communication settings for the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap HL7 Communication.
4. Under Message Headers on the HL7 Communication screen, enter the following
information:
– MSH-3 Sending Application
– MSH-4 Sending Facility
Related information...
HL7 Communication screen, page 212
Verify the HL7 communication, page 1307
Host orders, page 578
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
ASTM Communication screen element descriptions, page 216
Configure ASTM communication settings, page 217
Elements
Port Number Used to enter the port number. The port number range is from
0 through 65535.
Character Encoding Displays a drop-down list that provides the following items:
• Windows-1252
• UTF-8 (default)
• Shift-JIS
• ASCII
Function buttons
Related information...
ASTM Communication screen, page 215
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the ASTM communication settings for the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap ASTM Communication.
4. Under the ASTM Channel Settings on the ASTM Communication screen, enter the following
information:
– IP Address
– Port Number
– Character Encoding
5. To save the edits to the ASTM communication settings, tap Save/Test.
To delete the edits to the ASTM communication settings, tap Cancel.
6. To return to the Configure screen tap Done.
Related information...
ASTM Communication screen, page 215
Verify the ASTM communication, page 1308
Host orders, page 578
Shortcuts screen
On the Shortcuts screen, the operator can view the following information:
• Configured menu bar shortcut icons
• Available shortcut icon options
The system administrator can configure two shortcuts as icons on the menu bar.
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Shortcuts screen element descriptions, page 218
Configure shortcut icons, page 218
Elements
Available Shortcuts Displays a list of available icons that can be configured on the
menu bar.
The following icons are available:
• Cal/QC inventory
• Procedures (default)
• Configure
• Create Order (default)
• Help (Operations Manual)
Function buttons
Related information...
Shortcuts screen, page 217
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Shortcuts screen, page 217
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Automatic Backup screen element descriptions, page 219
Configure an automatic backup, page 220
Time of Daily Backup Displays a spin box that is used to enter the time of day for
daily automatic backups to be performed. The default is 01:00
A.M.
Weekly Backup on Displays a drop-down list that is used to select the day of the
week for daily automatic backups to be saved as the weekly
backup. The default is Sunday.
Automatic Backup Displays a text box that is used to enter the location for
Location system automatic backups to be copied to removable storage.
Browse Displays a button that is used to select the drive and folder
location for the automatic backup.
Function buttons
Related information...
Automatic Backup screen, page 219
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure an automatic backup. Seven daily automatic backups and
four weekly automatic backups are saved on the hard drive and a USB flash drive.
NOTE: A USB flash drive must be inserted to create automatic backups.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap Automatic Backup.
4. Under Automatic Backup Options on the Automatic Backup screen, tap the Automatically
Perform Backup check box to enable the automatic backup.
5. Enter the following information:
– Time of Daily Backup
– Weekly Backup On
– Automatic Backup Location
Related information...
Automatic Backup screen, page 219
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
On the Alinity PRO screen, the operator can view the Alinity PRO settings.
The system administrator can perform the following functions:
• Enable or disable the inventory-sharing feature.
• Enable or disable status update message transmissions.
• Configure the IP address and the port number.
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Configure Alinity PRO settings, page 221
Perform this procedure to configure the Alinity PRO settings for the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap Alinity PRO.
4. Under Alinity PRO Settings on the Alinity PRO screen, tap Enable or Disable for the
following options:
– Inventory Sharing
– Status Update Messages
5. If Status Update Messages is enabled, enter the following information:
– Status Update Interval
– IP Address
– Port Number
6. To save the edits to the Alinity PRO settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the Alinity PRO settings, tap Cancel.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Alinity PRO screen, page 221
AbbottLink screen
AbbottLink is a data-sharing software application between the laboratory instrumentation and the
Abbott internal systems for the transfer of instrument data, Abbott Mail documentation, and
system updates.
On the AbbottLink screen, the operator can view the AbbottLink settings.
If the logon for CSC or FSE is used, the following functions can be performed:
• Enable or disable the AbbottLink service.
• Enable or disable proxy settings.
• Configure proxy server settings.
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
AbbottLink screen element descriptions, page 222
Configure AbbottLink settings (CSC Logon), page 224
Elements
Disable Used to disable the proxy settings. This option is the default.
Auto-Configuration Used to configure the host URL address. When this option is
selected, the URL box is displayed and is blank. The URL box
can contain a maximum of 50 characters.
HTTP and SOCKS
Host Used to enter the host address. When
the HTTP option or the SOCKS option
is selected, the Host box is displayed
and is blank. The Host box can contain
a maximum of 50 characters.
Function buttons
Related information...
AbbottLink screen, page 222
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
7. If the Auto-Configuration option is selected, type the URL address in the URL box.
8. If the HTTP option or the SOCKS option is selected, perform the following steps:
a. In the Host box, type the host information.
b. In the Port box, type the port information.
c. If the proxy server requires authentication, tap the Authenticate using the following
information check box.
d. If the Authenticate using the following information check box is selected, type the
user name and password in the Username and Password boxes.
9. To save the edits to the AbbottLink settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the AbbottLink settings, tap Cancel.
10. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
AbbottLink screen, page 222
Related information...
Configure screen, Computer tab, page 201
Configure distance alert settings, page 225
Verify the distance alert function, page 226
Related information...
Distance Alert screen, page 225
Perform this procedure to verify the functionality of the distance alert lights.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Computer tab.
3. On the Computer tab of the Configure screen, tap Distance Alert.
4. On the Distance Alert screen, tap Test.
The distance alert lights are turned off if any of them are illuminated. The lights blink three
times in the following order:
a. Red
b. Yellow
c. Green
Related information...
Distance Alert screen, page 225
Assay Display Order Configure the order in which assays are displayed on screens
and in reports.
Related information...
System configuration, page 154
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Import/Export Assays screen (c-series), page 275
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Assay Parameters screen element descriptions, page 229
Edit general settings of assay parameters (c-series photometric), page 230
Edit general settings of assay parameters (c-series potentiometric), page 231
Edit general settings of assay parameters (i-series), page 232
Edit general settings of assay parameters (calculated), page 234
Edit calibration settings of assay parameters (c-series photometric), page 235
Edit calibration settings of assay parameters (c-series potentiometric), page 237
Edit calibration settings of assay parameters (i-series), page 238
Edit result settings of assay parameters , page 239
Configure retest rules, page 241
Configure SmartWash settings (c-series), page 243
Edit SmartWash settings (c-series), page 245
Create a user-defined assay (c-series photometric), page 247
Create a calculated assay, page 251
Elements
Installed Assays Identifies the total number of assay parameter files that are
configured on the system.
All option Displays all assays that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Create Navigates to the Create Assay flyout where the operator can
tap one of the following options:
• Calculated
• Photometric
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to edit the following general settings of assay parameters for a c-series
photometric assay:
• Assay name
• Assay availability
• Module allocation
• The option to run controls by lot or cartridge
• Default dilution
• The option to add a dilution protocol
NOTE: A user-defined dilution protocol can be created only for assays with fewer than three
configured dilution protocols.
The user-defined dilution protocol is retained except when an additional dilution protocol is
included with an assay file revision in the same position as the user-defined dilution
protocol.
NOTE: This option is available only if the Alinity ci-series is configured with more than one
processing module of the same type.
9. In the Run Controls for Onboard Reagents by drop-down list, tap an item.
10. Under Sample, tap an option in the Default Dilution area if more than one option is
available.
11. Under Sample, enter the following information as necessary to create a new dilution
protocol.
– Dilution name
NOTE: The dilution name can contain a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
– Sample (volume)
– Diluted Sample (volume)
– Diluent (volume)
– Water (volume)
NOTE: The operator has a responsibility to confirm the performance of the configured
dilution protocol.
12. To save the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Cancel.
13. If more than one assay was selected, at the right side of the Assay Parameters screen, tap
the next assay to configure, and then repeat steps 6, page 230 through 12, page 231.
14. To return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
15. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to edit the following general settings of assay parameters for a c-series
potentiometric assay:
• Assay name
• Assay availability
• Module allocation
• The option to run controls by lot or cartridge
NOTE: The assay parameters of an assay with a pending order cannot be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the c-series tab.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. In the Assay Name box on the General tab of the Assay Parameters screen, edit the default
name of the assay if necessary.
NOTE: The assay name can contain a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
7. In the Assay Availability drop-down list, tap an item.
8. In the Module area, tap the module number check boxes for the modules that are allocated
to load the reagent of the assay.
NOTE: This option is available only if the Alinity ci-series is configured with more than one
processing module of the same type.
9. In the Run Controls for Onboard Reagents by drop-down list, tap an item.
10. To save the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Cancel.
11. If more than one assay was selected, at the right side of the Assay Parameters screen, tap
the next assay to configure, and then repeat steps 6, page 232 through 10, page 232.
12. To return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
13. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to edit the following general settings of assay parameters for an i-series
assay:
• Assay name
• Assay availability
• Module allocation
• The option to run controls by lot or cartridge
• Default dilution
NOTE: The assay parameters of assays with pending orders cannot be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the i-series tab.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. In the Assay Name box on the General tab of the Assay Parameters screen, edit the default
name of the assay if necessary.
NOTE: The assay name can contain a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
7. In the Assay Availability drop-down list, tap an item.
8. In the Module area, tap the module number check boxes for the modules that are allocated
to load the reagent of the assay.
NOTE: This option is available only if the Alinity ci-series is configured with more than one
processing module of the same type.
9. In the Run Controls for Onboard Reagents by drop-down list, tap an item.
10. Under Dilution, tap an option in the Default Dilution area if more than one option is
available.
11. To save the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Cancel.
12. If more than one assay was selected, at the right side of the Assay Parameters screen, tap
the next assay to configure, and then repeat steps 6, page 233 through 11, page 233.
13. To return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
14. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to edit an assay that uses a mathematical formula to derive a calculated
result.
NOTE: The assay parameters of assays with pending orders cannot be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the Calculated tab.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. In the Assay Name box on the General tab of the Assay Parameters screen, edit the default
name of the calculated assay.
7. In the Assay Availability drop-down list, tap an item.
8. Tap Select Assays.
NOTE: The Select Assays button is unavailable for Abbott calculated assays that have
assay numbers from 3000 through 3999.
9. In the Select Assays flyout, tap the constituent assays that are used in the new calculated
formula.
For example, to create an LDL calculation, tap Chol, tap Ultra HDL, and then tap Trig.
NOTE: Assays are assigned to the calculator buttons in the order in which the assays are
selected.
10. To save the assay selection, tap Done.
To delete the assay selection, tap Cancel.
11. For each assay under Selected Assay, perform one of the following steps to enter a result
range:
– To define a specific result range, type a value in the Minimum box and type a value in
the Maximum box.
– To define a range where the results are less than or equal to a specific value, leave the
Minimum box blank and type a value in the Maximum box.
– To define a range where the results are greater than or equal to a specific value, type a
value in the Minimum box and leave the Maximum box blank.
NOTE: If the selected assay test result falls outside the defined result range, the calculated
test result becomes an exception and the result is not reported.
12. To delete the existing calculated formula, tap the Backspace key.
NOTE: The formulas cannot be edited for Abbott calculated assays that have assay
numbers from 3000 through 3999.
13. To enter a new calculated formula, tap one or more constituent assays, which are indicated
by the ASSAY1, ASSAY2, ASSAY3, and ASSAY4 buttons on the calculator, and then tap
the appropriate calculator function buttons.
The formula is displayed as it is entered in the Calculated Formula box.
For example, to enter the formula for an LDL calculation [Cholesterol - HDL - (Triglyceride ÷
5)], perform the following steps:
a. On the calculator, tap ASSAY1 (Cholesterol), and then tap the Minus Sign button.
b. Tap ASSAY2 (HDL), and then tap the Minus Sign button.
c. Tap the Opening Parenthesis button, and then tap ASSAY3 (Triglyceride).
d. Tap the Slash Mark (divide) button, tap 5, and then tap the Closing Parenthesis
button.
14. To save the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Cancel.
15. To return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
16. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to edit the following calibration settings of assay parameters for a c-
series photometric assay:
• Full calibration interval
• Adjust calibration type
• Adjust calibration interval
• Replicates
• Validity checks
NOTE: The assay parameters of assays with pending orders cannot be edited.
All calibration settings of a user-defined photometric assay can be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the c-series tab.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap the Calibration tab.
7. Under Calibration on the Calibration tab of the Assay Parameters screen, enter the
following information:
– Full Calibration Interval (Hours)
NOTE: If an assay file contains a default calibration interval other than zero, the
calibration interval can be decreased but cannot be increased. This setting is
unavailable for assays when the absorbance data reduction method and the use factor
and blank data reduction method are used.
– Adjust Type
NOTE: This setting is unavailable for assays when the factor data reduction method and
the use factor and blank data reduction method are used.
– Adjust Interval
– Default Ordering Type
NOTE: This setting is available only if Adjust Type is configured with an option other
than None.
8. Under Calibrators, type the number of replicates in the Replicates box.
9. Under Validity Checks, enter the following information:
– Blank Absorbance Range
– Span
– Span Absorbance Range
– Expected Cal Factor
– Expected Cal Factor Tolerance %
10. To save the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Cancel.
11. If more than one assay was selected, at the right side of the Assay Parameters screen, tap
the next assay to configure, and then repeat steps 7, page 236 through 10, page 236.
12. To return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
13. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to edit the following calibration settings of assay parameters for a
potentiometric assay:
• Full calibration interval
• Replicates
• Slope limit (%)
• Index options
NOTE: The assay parameters of assays with pending orders cannot be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the c-series tab.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap the Calibration tab.
7. Under Calibration on the Calibration tab of the Assay Parameters screen, enter the
following information:
– Full Calibration Interval (Hours)
NOTE: If an assay file contains a default calibration interval other than zero, the
calibration interval can be decreased but cannot be increased.
– Replicates
– Slope Limit (%)
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to configure the calibrator replicates and the calibration interval.
NOTE: The assay parameters of assays with pending orders cannot be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the i-series tab.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap the Calibration tab.
7. Under Calibration on the Calibration tab of the Assay Parameters screen, enter the
following information:
– Calibration Interval (Hours)
NOTE: If an assay file contains a default calibration interval other than zero, the
calibration interval can be decreased but cannot be increased.
– Replicates
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Perform this procedure to configure the results settings of assay parameters for an assay.
NOTE: The assay parameters of assays with pending orders cannot be edited.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap one or more assays to edit.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the tab for i-series, c-series, or Calculated.
5. Tap View/Edit.
6. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap the Results tab.
7. Under Result Units on the Results tab of the Assay Parameters screen, enter the following
information:
– Result Units
NOTE: For Abbott assays, tap a units option in the drop-down list if more than one
option is available.
For non-Abbott assays or calculated assays, type the unit name.
– Decimal Places
– Result Unit UCUM
NOTE: This setting can be edited only for non-Abbott assays or calculated assays.
– Correlation Factor
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
Configure host settings, page 211
Perform this procedure to configure one or more retest rules with criteria based on result
concentration ranges, interpretations, or exceptions.
NOTE: The retest rules must be defined in order since the system runs the first rule that meets
the defined criteria.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
The SmartWash feature provides an additional wash for the reagent probes, sample probe, and
cuvette to prevent assay-to-assay interference.
Perform this procedure to configure the following settings:
• SmartWash settings for user-defined assays
• Additional SmartWash settings for a c-series photometric or potentiometric assay
NOTE: Consider the following information when SmartWash settings are configured:
• The assay parameters of an assay with a pending order cannot be edited.
• Only one wash solution needs to be configured for each component. The system uses only
one configured wash solution for each component.
• SmartWash settings are performed in the order in which they are configured.
• Reagent probe settings that use the All option need to be configured last.
• User-defined SmartWash parameters are retained unless additional SmartWash parameters
are included with an assay file revision.
• The effectivity of the new settings to reduce assay-to-assay interference needs to be
evaluated.
Based on the testing performed with Abbott reagents, the following guidelines can be used to
select a wash solution to use for SmartWash settings:
• Water may be adequate for removing any soluble salts.
• Alkaline wash solutions, such as Detergent A and Detergent B, are more effective than
water or Acid Probe Wash for removing any proteins, latex particles, and contaminants that
enhance viscosity.
• Acid Probe Wash is more effective than alkaline wash solutions or water for removing any
metal contaminants or their salts.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
SmartWash feature (c-series), page 370
The SmartWash feature provides an additional wash for the reagent probes, sample probe, and
cuvette to prevent assay-to-assay interference.
Perform this procedure to edit the following settings:
• SmartWash settings for user-defined assays
• Additional SmartWash settings that were configured for a c-series photometric or
potentiometric assay
NOTE: Consider the following information when SmartWash settings are edited:
• The assay parameters of an assay with a pending order cannot be edited.
• Abbott-provided SmartWash settings cannot be edited.
• Only one wash solution needs to be configured for each component. The system uses only
one configured wash solution for each component.
• SmartWash settings are performed in the order in which they are configured.
• Reagent probe settings that use the All option need to be configured last.
• User-defined SmartWash parameters are retained unless additional SmartWash parameters
are included with an assay file revision.
• The effectivity of the new settings to reduce assay-to-assay interference needs to be
evaluated.
Based on the testing performed with Abbott reagents, the following guidelines can be used to
select a wash solution to use for SmartWash settings:
• Water may be adequate for removing any soluble salts.
• Alkaline wash solutions, such as Detergent A and Detergent B, are more effective than
water or Acid Probe Wash for removing any proteins, latex particles, and contaminants that
enhance viscosity.
• Acid Probe Wash is more effective than alkaline wash solutions or water for removing any
metal contaminants or their salts.
14. Tap Add SmartWash to add the SmartWash to the SmartWash Information area.
15. If a SmartWash is needed for another component, repeat steps 8, page 246 through 14,
page 247.
16. To save the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the assay parameter settings, tap Cancel.
17. If more than one assay was selected, at the right side of the Assay Parameters screen, tap
the next assay to configure, and then repeat steps 6, page 246 through 16, page 247.
18. To return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
19. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
NOTE: This option is available only if the Alinity ci-series is configured with more than
one processing module of the same type.
e. In the Run Controls for Onboard Reagents by drop-down list, tap an item.
f. In the Reaction Definition area, enter the information.
g. In the Validity Checks area, enter the information.
h. In the Sample area, enter the information.
i. To configure a new reagent, tap New Reagent.
j. In the New Reagent flyout, enter the information, and then tap Done.
The new reagent name is displayed in the Reagent drop-down list in the Reagent area.
k. If a new sample diluent needs to be configured, repeat steps 6.i, page 248 and 6.j,
page 248.
The new sample diluent name is displayed in the Diluent drop-down list in the Reagent
area.
l. In the Reagent area, configure the remaining settings.
7. Tap the Calibration tab, and then configure the following settings:
a. In the Calibration area, enter the information.
b. To configure a new calibrator set, tap New Cal Set, enter the information in the New
Cal Set flyout, and then tap Done.
c. In the Calibrators area, enter the information.
d. In the Validity Checks area, enter the information.
e. To save the general and calibration assay parameter settings, tap Save.
8. Tap the Results tab, and then configure the following settings:
a. In the Result Units area, enter the information.
b. If Result Units is edited, tap Save to update the displayed result values to the new unit.
c. Under Results, type a value in the Low Linearity box.
d. In the High Linearity box, type a value.
e. To configure a result range, tap Add Result.
f. In the Add Result flyout, enter the information.
NOTE: An extreme range is not required.
g. Tap Done.
h. To complete the result range configuration, repeat steps 8.f, page 248 through 8.h,
page 248.
i. To configure an interpretation range, under Interpretation, tap an interpretation in the
Name drop-down list.
NOTE: If User-Defined is selected, type the name of the interpretation in the Name box.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
End-point assay reactions (c-series), page 351
Rate assay reactions (c-series), page 352
Perform this procedure to create an assay that uses a mathematical formula to derive a
calculated result.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Parameters.
4. On the Assay Parameters screen, tap Create.
5. In the Create Assay flyout where the Calculated option is selected, tap Done.
6. On the General tab of the Assay Parameters screen, type the name of the calculated assay
in the Assay Name box.
7. In the Assay Number box, if an assay number other than the number that is displayed is
needed, type a number from 2000 through 2999.
NOTE: An Abbott calculated assay has an assay number from 3000 through 3999 that
cannot be edited.
8. In the Assay Availability drop-down list, tap an assay availability item.
9. Tap Select Assays.
10. In the Select Assays flyout, tap the constituent assays that are used in the calculated
formula.
For example, to create an LDL calculation, tap Chol, tap Ultra HDL, and then tap Trig.
NOTE: Assays are assigned to the calculator buttons in the order in which the assays are
selected.
11. To save the assay selection, tap Done.
To delete the assay selection, tap Cancel.
12. To enter a calculated formula, tap one or more constituent assays, which are indicated by
the ASSAY1, ASSAY2, ASSAY3, and ASSAY4 buttons on the calculator, and then tap the
appropriate calculator function buttons.
The formula is displayed as it is entered in the Calculated Formula box.
For example, to enter the formula for an LDL calculation [Cholesterol - HDL - (Triglyceride ÷
5)], perform the following steps:
a. On the calculator, tap ASSAY1 (Cholesterol), and then tap the Minus Sign button.
b. Tap ASSAY2 (HDL), and then tap the Minus Sign button.
c. Tap the Opening Parenthesis button, and then tap ASSAY3 (Triglyceride).
d. Tap the Slash Mark (divide) button, tap 5, and then tap the Closing Parenthesis
button.
13. For each assay under Selected Assay, perform one of the following steps to enter a result
range:
– To define a specific result range, type a value in the Minimum box and type a value in
the Maximum box.
– To define a range where the results are less than or equal to a specific value, leave the
Minimum box blank and type a value in the Maximum box.
– To define a range where the results are greater than or equal to a specific value, type a
value in the Minimum box and leave the Maximum box blank.
NOTE: If the selected assay test result falls outside the defined result range, the calculated
test result becomes an exception and the result is not reported.
14. To save the edits to the calculated assay settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the calculated assay settings, tap Cancel.
15. Tap the Results tab.
16. Under Result Units on the Results tab of the Assay Parameters screen, enter the following
information:
– Result Units
– Decimal Places
– Result Unit UCUM
17. If Result Units is edited, tap Save to update the displayed result values to the new unit.
18. Under Results, enter the following information:
– Low Linearity
NOTE: For i-series assays, this setting can be edited only when the default dilution is
the first dilution.
– High Linearity
NOTE: For i-series assays, this setting can be edited only when the default dilution is
the first dilution. This value cannot be edited to exceed the high-linearity default of the
assay.
19. To add a new result range, perform the following steps:
a. Tap Add Result.
b. In the Add Result flyout, enter the following information:
• Gender
• Age Unit
• Age Range
• Normal Range
• Extreme Range
NOTE: An extreme range is not required.
c. To save the edits to the result settings, tap Done.
To delete the edits to the result settings, tap Cancel.
20. Under Interpretation, tap an interpretation in the Name drop-down list.
NOTE: If User-Defined is selected, type the name of the interpretation in the Name box.
21. In the Range box, type an interpretation range value.
22. For the appropriate interpretation, tap the Review Required check box.
NOTE: If Review Required is selected, the results are held for manual release when the
Hold option is configured for the Result Release Mode and the results are within the
specific interpretation range.
23. For each available interpretation, repeat steps 20, page 253 through 22, page 253.
24. To save the edits to the review result settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the review result settings, tap Cancel.
25. Tap the Retest Rules tab.
26. Under Assay Retest Rules on the Retest Rules tab of the Assay Parameter screen, type
the name in the Retest Rule Name box.
NOTE: Under Assay Retest Rules, if a retest rule is selected, tap the selected rule to
cancel the selection.
27. If the criteria is based on result ranges, perform the following steps:
a. In the Result Indicator area, tap the Result Range option.
b. To enter a result range, perform one of the following steps:
• To retest all samples automatically when the original results are within a specific
range, type values in both result range boxes.
• To retest all samples automatically when the original results are less than or equal
to a specific value, leave the first result range box blank and type a value in the
second result range box.
• To retest all samples automatically when the original results are greater than or
equal to a specific value, type a value in the first result range box and leave the
second result range box blank.
28. If the criteria is based on interpretations, perform the following steps:
a. In the Result Indicator area, tap the Interpretation option.
b. In the Interpretation drop-down list, tap an interpretation.
29. If the criteria is based on exceptions, tap the Exception option in the Result Indicator area.
NOTE: The assay is retested if one of the following message codes is generated:
– 1037 Unable to calculate result. Rate reaction linearity failure.
– 1038 Unable to calculate result. Insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.
– 1039 Unable to calculate result. Absorbance exceeded optical limits.
– 1040 Unable to calculate result. No absorbance reads within absorbance range.
– 1041 Unable to calculate result. Reaction check failure.
– 1042 Unable to calculate result. ICT Reference Solution voltage drift error.
– 1043 Unable to calculate result. Final RLU read falls outside the specification of the
highest calibrator.
– 1044 Unable to calculate result. Final RLU read falls outside the specification of the
lowest calibrator.
– 1402 Unable to process test. Activated read failure.
– 1403 Unable to process test. Final read failure.
30. In the Original Dilution drop-down list, tap an original dilution.
31. Tap Retest Assays.
32. In the Select Retest Assays flyout, tap the retest assays.
33. To save the retest assay selection, tap Done.
To delete the retest assay selection, tap Cancel.
34. Under Retest Dilution, tap a retest dilution in the Retest Dilution drop-down list for each
assay.
35. Under Replicates, tap the number of replicates in the Replicates drop-down list for each
assay.
36. To add additional retest assays, repeat steps 31, page 254 through 35, page 254.
37. To save the edits to the retest rule settings, tap Add Rule.
To delete the edits to the retest rule settings, tap Cancel.
38. To save the edits to the assay file and return to the Assay Parameters screen, tap Done.
39. To return to the Configure screen, tap Configure.
Related information...
Assay Parameters screen, page 228
The supervisor and the system administrator can perform the following functions:
• Manually create new calibrator lots or import calibrator data to create new calibrator lots.
• Edit calibrator data.
• Delete calibrator lots.
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Calibrator Set screen element descriptions, page 255
Calibrator Set View/Edit screen element descriptions, page 256
Import Calibrators screen element descriptions (c-series), page 258
View calibrator lot data, page 259
Create a new calibrator lot from a bar code, page 259
Manually create a new calibrator lot, page 260
Import calibrator data (c-series), page 261
Delete imported calibrator data (c-series), page 263
Delete a calibrator lot, page 263
Descriptions of calibrator import statuses (c-series), page 264
Edit calibrator data (c-series), page 264
Edit calibrator data (i-series), page 266
View or print a calibrator value sheet (c-series), page 267
Elements
Calibrator Sets Displays the total number of calibrator sets that are
configured on the system.
All option Displays all calibrator sets that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all calibrator sets that are available on one or more
Alinity i processing modules.
c-series option Displays all calibrator sets that are available on one or more
Alinity c processing modules.
Function buttons
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Calibrator Set Name Displays the name of the selected calibrator set.
Default Displays a check box that is used to identify the lot number
that is displayed as the default lot number for the calibrator
set.
Expiration Date Displays the expiration date of the selected calibrator set.
Level Displays the number of levels defined for the calibrator set.
Concentration values must be defined for all levels of the
default lot number.
Function buttons
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Calibration Set Displays the calibrator set name of the calibrator data file
selected for import.
Lot Number Displays the lot number of the calibrator data file selected for
import.
Number of Levels Displays the number of calibrator levels defined for the
calibrator data file selected for import.
Expiration Date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator data file selected
for import.
Calibrator Files Displays the calibrator data files in the specified folder that
are available for import for the selected calibrator set.
File Assay/Number Displays the assay name and assay number for each assay in
the calibrator data file selected for import.
System Assay/Number Displays the assay name and assay number for each assay
on the system that corresponds to the assay number in the
calibrator data file selected for import.
Status Displays the import status of the assay. Data for an assay that
has a status of OK is imported. Data is not imported for
assays that have the following statuses:
• No Assay
• Previously Defined
Function buttons
Delete Deletes the selected calibrator file on the hard drive. Files on
a USB flash drive cannot be deleted.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Perform this procedure to create a new calibrator lot manually for an existing calibrator set.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Calibrator Set.
4. In the list on the Calibrator Set screen, tap a calibrator set.
5. Tap View/Edit to display the calibrator data for the default lot number.
6. In the Lot drop-down list under Calibrator Set Configuration, tap New Lot.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Required materials A calibrator data file on a USB flash drive or on the hard drive
Perform this procedure to import calibrator data files to create a new calibrator lot for a
configured calibrator set.
Calibrator data files may be accessed at abbottdiagnostics.com or may be requested through
Abbott Mail.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
NOTE: The assay names and assay numbers for the data in the file and for the
corresponding system assays are displayed with an import status. Data for all calibrator
levels is imported for assays that have a status of OK. No data is imported for assays that
have a status of No Assay or Previously Defined. These statuses are displayed in red text.
7. For the selected calibrator data file, perform one of the following steps:
– If no data is available to import because the assays have a status of No Assay or
Previously Defined, tap Done to return to the Calibrator Set screen and end the
procedure.
– To import the data for assays that have a status of OK, tap Import.
8. Under Calibrator Set Configuration on the Calibrator Set screen, tap the Default check box
to configure the calibrator lot as the default.
NOTE: The first configured lot number is designated automatically as the default lot number.
The default lot number can be changed when the instrument status is Running or
Processing if no orders are pending for the calibrator set and the calibrator set is not loaded
in the reagent carousel. For all assays and all levels of the default lot number, the data
must be defined.
9. To save the calibrator data file settings, tap Save.
To delete the calibrator data file settings, tap Cancel.
10. To return to the list of calibrator sets on the Calibrator Set screen, tap Done.
11. If a USB flash drive was inserted, remove the USB flash drive.
Calibrator data files that are imported from a USB flash drive are saved to an internal storage
location on the system. To reinstall the calibrator data files on a future date, tap the Hard Drive
button.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Perform this procedure to delete calibrator data files from the user interface computer. After a
calibrator data file is deleted, the file is unavailable to be reinstalled.
NOTE: This procedure cannot be used to delete calibrator data files from a USB flash drive.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Calibrator Set.
4. In the list on the Calibrator Set screen, tap a calibrator set.
5. Tap Import.
On the Import Calibrators screen, the Hard Drive button is selected.
6. In the Calibrator Files list, tap the calibrator data file to delete.
7. Tap Delete.
8. To delete the calibrator data file, tap Continue.
To cancel the delete function, tap Cancel.
9. To return to the list of calibrator sets on the Calibrator Set screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Calibrator Set.
4. In the list on the Calibrator Set screen, tap a calibrator set.
5. Tap View/Edit to display the calibrator data for the default lot number.
6. In the Lot drop-down list under Calibrator Set Configuration, tap a calibrator lot number
that is not the default.
7. Tap Delete.
8. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Continue.
9. To return to the list of calibrator sets on the Calibrator Set screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
OK The imported assay has the same assay number and result
units as the assay that was configured on the system. The
data is imported.
No Assay No assay on the system has the same assay number in the
imported file. The data is not imported.
Previously Defined The data has been manually entered or imported. The data is
not imported.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
NOTE: A calibrator lot number cannot be deleted if the lot number is the default or if the
calibrator is loaded in the reagent carousel.
13. To save the edits to the calibrator lot settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the calibrator lot settings, tap Cancel.
14. To edit another calibrator lot number, tap a lot number in the Lot drop-down list, and then
repeat steps 7, page 265 through 13, page 266.
15. To return to the list of calibrator sets on the Calibrator Set screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Perform this procedure to change the default calibrator lot number and to delete a calibrator lot
number.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Calibrator Set.
4. In the list on the Calibrator Set screen, tap a calibrator set.
5. Tap View/Edit to display the calibrator data for the default lot number.
6. In the Lot drop-down list under Calibrator Set Configuration, tap a calibrator lot number
that is not the default.
7. To configure the calibrator lot number as the default, tap the Default check box.
NOTE: The default lot number can be changed when the instrument status is Running or
Processing if no orders are pending for the calibrator set. The default lot number must
include all assays that are assigned to the calibrator set.
8. To delete the selected calibrator lot number, perform the following steps:
a. Tap Delete.
b. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
NOTE: A calibrator lot number cannot be deleted if the lot number is the default.
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Perform this procedure to view or print a calibrator value sheet or to save the calibrator value
sheet as a portable document format (PDF) file.
NOTE: A calibrator value sheet is available only for a calibrator lot that was created from an
imported file that has not previously been deleted on the hard drive.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Calibrator Set.
4. In the list on the Calibrator Set screen, tap a calibrator set.
5. Tap View/Edit to display the calibrator data for the default lot number.
6. In the Lot drop-down list under Calibrator Set Configuration, tap a calibrator lot number
that is not the default.
7. Tap Print.
8. Under Report Selection in the Print flyout, tap Calibrator Insert.
9. To rotate the document, use the Rotate toolbar.
10. To browse the document, use the Page toolbar.
11. To increase or decrease the font size in the document, use the Zoom toolbar.
12. To fit the document to the window width ( ) or to resize the document to fit one full page in
the window ( ), use the Fit toolbar.
13. To find a word or phrase in the document, use the Find toolbar.
14. In the Print flyout, choose a printer or tap Print to File in the Print Location drop-down list.
15. To print the document, enter the number of copies to print, and then tap Print.
16. If Print to File was selected in the Print Location drop-down list, perform the following
steps to indicate the file destination:
Related information...
Calibrator Set screen, page 255
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, Available Files tab element descriptions, page 268
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, Installed Files tab element descriptions, page 270
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Descriptions of assay file reagent statuses, page 272
Install assay files, page 272
Uninstall assay files, page 274
Delete assay files, page 274
Elements
Available Assays Displays the number of assays that are available for
installation for the currently selected option.
All option Displays all assay files that are available for installation.
i-series option Displays all assay files that are available for installation on
one or more Alinity i processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assay files that are available for installation on
one or more Alinity c processing modules.
Calculated option Displays all calculated assay files that are available for
installation.
Status Displays the status of the file installation. The status includes
file integrity and file installation success or failure.
Update Status Displays the file update status of all assay files that are
available on the system.
The Available Files tab has five file update statuses:
• Current
• New
• Update
• Installed
• Previous
Reagent Status Displays the assay file reagent status to determine if a new
reagent lot is necessary to support a new assay file.
The Available Files tab has three assay file reagent statuses:
• OK
• New reagent needed
• Unknown
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of assay file reagent statuses, page 272
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Elements
Installed Assays Displays the number of assays installed for the currently
selected option.
All option Displays all assay files that are available for installation.
i-series option Displays all assay files that are available for installation on
one or more Alinity i processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assay files that are available for installation on
one or more Alinity c processing modules.
Calculated option Displays all calculated assay files that are available for
installation.
Status Displays the status of the file installation. The status includes
file integrity and file installation success or failure.
Release Status Displays the status of the assay file. The Installed Files tab
has one file status: Released.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Current The file is the same version as the file that is installed on the
system.
Update The file is a newer version than the file that is installed on the
system.
Previous The file is an older version than the file that is installed on the
system.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, Available Files tab element descriptions, page 268
Import/Export Assays screen, Export Files tab element descriptions (c-series), page 275
Import/Export Assays screen, Import Files tab element descriptions (c-series), page 276
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, page 310
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, Available Files tab element descriptions, page 311
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, Installed Files tab element descriptions, page 312
New reagent needed A new reagent lot is necessary to support the new assay file.
Unknown The assay file is new and has not been installed previously on
the system. The reagent lot information is unknown.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, Available Files tab element descriptions, page 268
Required materials An assay file on the hard drive or on a USB flash drive
NOTE: When an assay is installed that uses the data from a reference assay, the reference
assay must be installed first.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Install/Uninstall Assays.
On the Available Files tab of the Install/Uninstall Assays screen, the Hard Drive button is
selected.
NOTE: If the assay is located on a USB flash drive, insert the USB flash drive, and then tap
the USB Flash Drive button.
4. Under Assays on the Available Files tab, tap one or more assay files to install (or tap
Select All).
NOTE: To filter the list of installed assay files, tap the option for i-series, c-series, or
Calculated.
5. To print the assay-specific installation information, tap Print.
6. Review the specific information for each assay before installation.
Assays may have specific installation requirements.
7. Tap Install.
8. When a confirmation message is displayed because an updated assay file requires a new
version of the reagent, refer to the assay-specific installation information to verify the
reagent requirements.
Do not install the new assay file until the correct reagent has been received.
Tap one of the following options:
– Tap Yes to install the new assay file.
– Tap No to cancel the specific assay installation.
– Tap Cancel to cancel all assay file installations if more than one assay file was
selected.
9. Refer to the assay-specific installation information for specific calibration and quality control
requirements.
Calibration and all levels of controls may need to be run before results are reported.
10. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Assay files that are installed from a USB flash drive are saved to an internal storage location on
the system.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Perform this procedure to uninstall assay files from the system software. Assay files remain
available to be reinstalled from the Available Files tab of the Install/Uninstall Assays screen.
NOTE: An assay file cannot be uninstalled if the assay file is referenced by another assay, has
pending orders, or is a constituent of a calculated assay.
When an assay file is uninstalled, calibrations for the assay file and any assay configuration
including controls are deleted.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Install/Uninstall Assays.
4. On the Install/Uninstall Assays screen, tap the Installed Files tab.
5. On the Installed Files tab, tap one or more assay files to uninstall (or tap Select All).
NOTE: To filter the list of installed assay files, tap the option for i-series, c-series, or
Calculated.
6. Tap Uninstall.
7. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
8. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Install assay files, page 272
Perform this procedure to delete assay files from the user interface computer. After an assay
file is deleted, the assay file is unavailable to be reinstalled.
NOTE: An assay file cannot be deleted if the assay file is referenced by another assay, has
pending orders, or is a constituent of a calculated assay.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Install/Uninstall Assays.
4. On the Available Files tab of the Install/Uninstall Assays screen, tap one or more assay
files to delete (or tap Select All).
NOTE: To filter the list of installed assay files, tap the option for i-series, c-series, or
Calculated.
5. Tap Delete.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Assays screen, page 268
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Import/Export Assays screen, Export Files tab element descriptions (c-series), page 275
Import/Export Assays screen, Import Files tab element descriptions (c-series), page 276
Select Items window element descriptions (c-series), page 277
Export assay files (c-series), page 278
Import assay files (c-series), page 279
Elements
Release Status Displays the status of the assay file. The Installed Files tab
has one file status: Released.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Import/Export Assays screen (c-series), page 275
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Elements
Status Displays the status of the file import. The status includes file
integrity and file import success or failure.
Update Status Displays the status of the assay file. The Import Files tab has
five file update statuses:
• Current
• New
• Update
• Installed
• Previous
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Import/Export Assays screen (c-series), page 275
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Elements
Last Update Displays the date and time that the files in the folder were last
updated.
Function buttons
Related information...
Import/Export Assays screen (c-series), page 275
Exported assay files can only be imported. They cannot be installed on the Install/Uninstall
Assays screen.
Related information...
Import/Export Assays screen (c-series), page 275
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Assay files that have the parameter for Calibrator Set configured as None are enabled when
they are imported.
If an assay file has a setting other than None configured as the parameter for Calibrator Set,
the assay file is disabled and the calibrator concentration values are deleted when the assay file
is imported.
Related information...
Import/Export Assays screen (c-series), page 275
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Assay Display Order screen element descriptions, page 281
Elements
Display Order Applies Displays the following options to indicate the areas to which
to the configured display order is applied:
Assay Displays a list of the assays that are installed on the system.
Function buttons
Add> Moves the selected assays from the Assay list to the Display
Order list in the order in which the assays were selected.
<Reset Moves the selected assay from the Display Order list to the
Assay list.
<<Reset All Moves all assays from the Display Order list to the Assay list.
Related information...
Assay Display Order screen, page 280
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to configure the assay display order on the following user interface
elements:
• Screens and flyouts that have an assay list
• The sample laboratory report, the sample status report, and the quality control summary
report
NOTE: When the assay display order is defined, assays are displayed in the defined order on
screens and in reports as configured. Any new assays and assays that are not defined in the
display order are displayed in alphanumeric order on screens and in reports after the assays in
the display order.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Assay Display Order.
4. In the Display Order Applies to area of the Assay Display Order screen, tap Reports Only
or Reports and Displays.
5. To edit the assay display order, perform one of the following steps:
– To add assays to the end of the Display Order list, in the Assay list, tap each assay in
the order to display, and then tap ADD>.
– To insert assays in the Display Order list, in the Assay list, tap each assay in the order
to display. Tap the assay in the Display Order list where the assays need to be
inserted, and then tap Insert Before or Insert After. The assays are inserted in the
selected location.
– To change the order of the assays in the Display Order list, tap the assays that need to
be moved, and then tap Reset. The assays are moved to the Assay list. Perform one of
the previous two steps to move the assays to the Display Order list in the correct order.
– To move all assays from the Display Order list to the Assay list, tap <<Reset All.
6. To save the edits to the display order settings and return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
To delete the edits to the display order settings and return to the Configure screen, tap
Cancel.
Related information...
Assay Display Order screen, page 280
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Panel Definition screen element descriptions, page 283
Configure a panel, page 285
Edit a panel definition, page 285
Delete a panel, page 286
Elements
Panel Name Displays the name of the selected panel. The operator can
type a new panel name that can contain a maximum of 10
characters.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Function buttons
Related information...
Panel Definition screen, page 283
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Configure a panel
Perform this procedure to configure a panel that can be used when ordering specimens, quality
control (QC), and calibrations. Twenty-five unique panels can be configured. A panel can be
configured with any combination of panel types, specimen, QC, and calibration.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Panel Definition.
4. In the Panel Name box on the Panel Definition screen, type a panel name.
NOTE: A panel name can have a maximum of 10 characters.
5. In the Panel Type area, tap the one or more check boxes.
6. In the Assays list, tap one or more individual assays to include in the panel.
NOTE: To filter the list of assays, tap the option for i-series, c-series, or Calculated.
7. To save the edits to the panel settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the panel settings, tap Cancel.
8. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Panel Definition screen, page 283
Perform this procedure to edit a panel definition. When a defined panel is edited, existing orders
are not affected.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Panel Definition.
4. In the Panels list on the Panel Definition screen, tap a panel to edit.
5. Edit any of the following information:
– Panel Name
NOTE: When a panel name is edited, a new panel is created. If the original panel is not
needed, it must be deleted.
– Panel Type
– Assays
6. To save the edits to the panel settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the panel settings, tap Cancel.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Panel Definition screen, page 283
Delete a panel, page 286
Delete a panel
Perform this procedure to delete a panel. When a defined panel is deleted, existing orders are
not affected.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Panel Definition.
4. In the Panels list on the Panel Definition screen, tap a panel to delete.
5. Tap Delete.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Panel Definition screen, page 283
Edit a panel definition, page 285
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Cal/QC Ordering screen element descriptions, page 287
Configure calibration and control ordering settings, page 288
Elements
Control Lot Expiration Used to override a control status of Expired. One of the
Override following options is enabled:
• On
• Off (default)
• On
• Off (default)
Control Required After Used to configure if quality control must be run after a
Calibration calibration is generated. One of the following options is
enabled:
• On
• Off (default)
Entry of Expiration Used to configure if an expiration date must be entered for all
Date Required control material before a control order can be created. One of
the following options is enabled:
• On
• Off (default)
Function buttons
Related information...
Cal/QC Ordering screen, page 286
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Cal/QC Ordering screen, page 286
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Quality Control screen element descriptions, page 290
Control Create/Edit screen element descriptions, page 291
Import screen element descriptions, page 294
Manually create a new quality control lot, page 295
Edit a quality control, page 298
Delete a quality control, page 302
Delete a quality control lot, page 303
Import quality control data, page 304
Delete imported quality control data, page 305
Elements
Control Count Displays the total number of quality controls that are
configured.
All option Displays all assays that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Function buttons
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Default Displays a check box that is used to identify the lot number
that is displayed as the default lot number for control orders.
NOTE: The first configured lot number is designated
automatically as the default lot number. To change the default
lot number, two or more control lot numbers must be
configured.
Expiration Date Displays the expiration date of the selected quality control.
Level Name Displays the level name that corresponds to the level number.
Stored Onboard Indicates that the quality control is stored on the reagent
carousel. This area is available only if Yes was selected in
the Automated area.
Low Alert Volume (%) Indicates the percent remaining volume at which low alert
flags are generated. This area is available only if Yes was
selected in the Automated area.
Start Time Identifies the shift start time for the control if the Use Module
Shift Time check box is not selected. This area is available
only if Yes was selected in the Automated area.
Use Module Shift Displays a check box that is used to identify the control as
Time one that uses the system-configured module shift time to
define control run intervals. The check box is available only if
Yes was selected in the Automated area.
Time Interval Displays the time interval in minutes, after the shift start time,
(Minutes) that is used to create automated orders for the control. This
area is available only if Yes was selected in the Automated
area.
Onboard Stability Displays the maximum time in hours that the control can
(Hours) remain on the reagent carousel. This area is available only if
Yes was selected in the Stored Onboard area.
NOTE: Onboard stability tracking occurs after the vial is
scanned by the RSM bar code reader and is scheduled to be
loaded in the reagent carousel. The onboard stability tracking
continues when the vial is unloaded from the system.
In-Use Stability Displays the maximum time in hours that the control can be
(Hours) used on the processing module without refrigerated storage. A
value of zero indicates that in-use stability is not tracked.
Assay check box Enables all assays in the control level for testing when the
Assay check box is selected. Individual assays can be
enabled or disabled for the control level by selecting or
clearing the check box for the corresponding assay name.
Expected 1 SD Displays the value that represents the expected one standard
deviation (SD) for the control level if configured.
Expected Mean Displays the expected mean value for the control level if
configured.
NOTE: Quality control reports, Levey-Jennings graphs, and
quality control summary data are not generated if the values
for Expected 1 SD and Expected Mean are not defined.
Manufacturer Mean Displays the manufacturer mean value for the control level if
configured.
Expected Range Low Displays the lower limit of the control range for the control
level if configured.
Expected Range High Displays the upper limit of the control range for the control
level if configured.
Default Dilution Displays the selected dilution for the assay for quality control
testing.
Test Interval Displays the test count interval used to create automated
orders for the control.
Time Interval Displays the time interval in minutes that is used to create
(Minutes) automated orders for the assay. The configured assay time
interval supersedes the configured control level time interval if
both intervals are defined for the same lot number.
Function buttons
Set Stability Navigates to the Set Stability flyout where onboard stability
values for individual analytes are displayed.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Control Name Displays the control name of the quality control file selected
for import.
Lot Displays the lot number of the quality control file selected for
import.
Number of Levels Displays the number of levels defined for the quality control
file selected for import.
Expiration Date Displays the expiration date of the quality control file selected
for import.
Quality Control Files Displays the quality control files in the specified folder that
are available for import for the selected control. If New
Control was selected on the Quality Control screen, all quality
control files in the specified folder are displayed.
File Assay/Number Displays the assay name and assay number for each assay in
the quality control file selected for import.
System Assay/Number Displays the assay name and assay number for each assay
on the system that corresponds to the assay number in the
quality control file selected for import.
Status Displays the import status of the assay. Data for an assay that
has a status of OK is imported. Data is not imported for
assays that have the following statuses:
• No Assay
• Previously Defined
• Units Mismatch
• Version Mismatch (only for Technopath control products)
File Units Displays the result units that are available for the quality
control file.
System Units Displays the result units that are available for the assay
installed on the system.
Function buttons
Delete Deletes the selected quality control file on the hard drive.
Files on a USB flash drive cannot be deleted.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Perform this procedure to create manually a new single-constituent control lot or multiconstituent
control lot.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Quality Control.
4. On the Quality Control screen, tap New Control.
5. In the Selected Assays list, tap one or more individual assays to include in the control.
6. Tap Create.
7. Under Control Configuration on the Control Create/Edit screen, type a control name in the
Control Name box.
NOTE: A control name can have from 1 through 10 characters.
8. To enter a control lot number, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap the Lot box, and then enter the control lot number.
– Tap the Lot box, tap New Lot, and then enter the control lot number.
NOTE: A control lot number can have from 3 through 9 characters. The first configured lot
number is designated automatically as the default lot number for control orders. To change
the default lot number, two or more control lot numbers must be configured.
A maximum of 20 lot numbers can be configured for a control name.
9. In the Expiration Date box, enter the control expiration date.
NOTE: If the Alinity ci-series is configured to require a control expiration date, the expiration
date must be entered to create orders for the control.
10. In the Level drop-down list, confirm that the level identifier is correct.
If the level identifier is incorrect, tap a level in the drop-down list.
11. In the Level Name box, type a level name.
NOTE: A level name can have from 1 through 10 characters.
12. In the Automated area, tap Yes or No to indicate whether the system software needs to
periodically evaluate the control and to create orders according to configured time intervals
or test intervals.
13. In the Time Interval (Minutes) box, type the number of minutes to define the frequency to
create an automated order for the control.
NOTE: The Time Interval (Minutes) box is available only if Yes was selected in the
Automated area.
14. To specify a shift start time for automated control orders to be created that differs from the
configured module shift start time, perform the following steps:
a. Tap to clear the Use Module Shift Time check box.
b. Use the HH:MM format to type a time in the Start Time box, and then tap AM or PM.
NOTE: The Use Module Shift Time check box and the Start Time box are available only if
Yes was selected in the Automated area.
15. In the Stored Onboard area, tap Yes or No to indicate whether the control can be stored in
the reagent carousel.
NOTE: The Stored Onboard area is available only if Yes was selected in the Automated
area.
Onboard storage capability is available for some controls. To identify controls that have this
capability and the onboard stability time for each control, see the product documentation.
16. In the Onboard Stability (Hours) box, type the number of hours.
NOTE: Onboard storage capability is available for some controls. To identify controls that
have this capability and the onboard stability time for each control, see the product
documentation.
17. In the Low Alert Volume (%) box, type the percentage value.
NOTE: The Low Alert Volume (%) box is available only if Yes was selected in the
Automated area.
18. If the in-use stability time is provided, type the number of hours in the In-Use Stability
(Hours) box.
NOTE: In-use stability reflects the maximum time that the control can be used on the
processing module without refrigerated storage. A value of zero indicates that in-use stability
is not tracked.
19. To disable one or more of the individual assays that were selected in step 5, tap to clear the
check box next to the assay name.
20. Enter the following information for each assay:
– Expected 1 SD
– Expected Mean
NOTE: To calculate automatically the values for Expected 1 SD and Expected Mean
from an entered range, type a value in the Expected Range Low box, type a value in
the Expected Range High box, and then tap the Calculate Mean/SD check box for the
assay.
To calculate the Expected 1 SD value, the Expected Range Low value is subtracted
from the Expected Range High value and the difference is divided by four. To calculate
the Expected Mean value, the Expected Range Low value and the Expected Range
High value are added and the sum is divided by two.
The automatic calculation cannot be performed if a value has been entered in the
Expected 1 SD box or the Expected Mean box.
NOTE: Quality control reports, Levey-Jennings graphs, and quality control summary
data are not generated if the values for Expected 1 SD and Expected Mean are not
defined.
– Manufacturer 1 SD
– Manufacturer Mean
– Expected Range Low
– Expected Range High
NOTE: To flag the controls automatically when the control results fall outside a specific
range, type a value in the Expected Range Low box and type a value in the Expected
Range High box.
To flag the controls automatically when the control results are less than a specific
value, type a value in the Expected Range Low box and leave the Expected Range
High box blank.
To flag the controls automatically when the control results are greater than a specific
value, leave the Expected Range Low box blank and type a value in the Expected
Range High box.
If neither the Expected Range Low value nor the Expected Range High value is
defined, control results are not evaluated for the application of the CNTL flag.
– Default Dilution
– Test Interval
– Time Interval (Minutes)
NOTE: The test interval and the time interval determine the automatic control order
frequency. The configured assay time interval supersedes the configured control level
time interval if both intervals are defined for the same lot number.
21. To enter the onboard stability times for the individual analytes, tap Set Stability.
NOTE: If the onboard stability time of an individual analyte is less than the onboard stability
time of the control that was entered in step 16, the analyte is disabled for onboard use from
the control.
22. To save the edits to the control level settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the control level settings, tap Cancel.
23. To add another level, tap a level in the Level drop-down list, type a level name in the Level
Name box, and then repeat steps 20, page 297 through 22, page 298.
NOTE: A maximum of six levels can be configured.
24. To return to the Quality Control screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Control Create/Edit screen element descriptions, page 291
Automated control ordering, page 579
Perform this procedure to edit the settings for a single-constituent control or a multiconstituent
control.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Quality Control.
4. In the Control Count list on the Quality Control screen, tap a control name.
5. For a multiconstituent control, in the Selected Assays list, tap one or more individual assays
to include in the control or to remove from the control.
6. Tap View/Edit to display the control data for the default lot number.
NOTE: If an assay was removed from the multiconstituent control, in the confirmation
message that is displayed, tap Yes to confirm the removal. Tap No to retain the assay in the
control.
7. In the Lot drop-down list under Control Configuration on the Control Create/Edit screen,
tap other control lot numbers to display.
8. To configure the selected control lot number as the default, tap the Default check box.
9. To enter the control expiration date, tap the Expiration Date box.
NOTE: The expiration date cannot be edited if one of the following situations occurred:
– The control lot number has expired.
– The control lot number was created by importing control data.
10. In the Level Name box, type a level name.
NOTE: A level name can have from 1 through 10 characters.
11. In the Automated area, tap Yes or No to indicate whether the system software needs to
evaluate the control periodically and to create orders according to configured time intervals
or test intervals.
12. In the Time Interval (Minutes) box, type the number of minutes to define the frequency to
create an automated order for the control.
NOTE: The Time Interval (Minutes) box is available only if Yes was selected in the
Automated area.
The time interval increases incrementally based on the configured module or control shift
start time.
13. To edit the shift start time for the control, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap the Use Module Shift Time check box.
– Tap to clear the Use Module Shift Time check box. Use the HH:MM format to type a
time in the Start Time box, and then tap AM or PM.
NOTE: The Use Module Shift Time check box and the Start Time box can be edited only if
Yes was selected in the Automated area.
14. In the Stored Onboard area, tap Yes or No to indicate whether the control can be stored in
the reagent carousel.
NOTE: The Stored Onboard area is available only if Yes was selected in the Automated
area.
This parameter cannot be edited for controls that are currently stored on the system.
Onboard storage capability is available for some multiconstituent controls. To identify
controls that have this capability and the onboard stability time for the control, see the
product documentation.
15. In the Onboard Stability (Hours) box, type the number of hours.
NOTE: This parameter cannot be edited for controls that are currently stored on the system.
16. In the Low Alert Volume (%) box, type the percentage value.
NOTE: The Low Alert Volume (%) box is available only if Yes was selected in the
Automated area.
17. If the in-use stability time is provided, type the number of hours in the In-Use Stability
(Hours) box.
In-use stability reflects the maximum time that the control can be used on the processing
module without refrigerated storage. A value of zero indicates that in-use stability is not
tracked.
18. To enable or disable one or more assays for the current control level, tap the check box
next to the assay name.
NOTE: Assays that are disabled for a control level are not run when the control level is
ordered.
To disable all the assays for a specific control level, tap the Assay check box. When all the
assays for the control level are disabled, the level is not run when the control is ordered.
19. Edit the following information for a control assay as necessary:
– Expected 1 SD
– Expected Mean
NOTE: To edit the expected standard deviation and expected mean values, first tap to
clear the Calculate Mean/SD check box for the assay if the check box is selected.
Quality control reports, Levey-Jennings graphs, and quality control summary data are
not generated if the values for Expected 1 SD and Expected Mean are not defined.
– Manufacturer 1 SD
– Manufacturer Mean
– Expected Range Low
– Expected Range High
NOTE: To flag the controls automatically when the control results fall outside a specific
range, type a value in the Expected Range Low box and type a value in the Expected
Range High box.
To flag the controls automatically when the control results are less than a specific
value, type a value in the Expected Range Low box and leave the Expected Range
High box blank.
To flag the controls automatically when the control results are greater than a specific
value, leave the Expected Range Low box blank and type a value in the Expected
Range High box.
Edits to the previously entered control ranges are applied to the Expected Mean and
Expected 1 SD values if the Calculate Mean/SD check box is selected.
To calculate the Expected Mean value, the Expected Range Low value and the
Expected Range High value are added and the sum is divided by two. To calculate the
Expected 1 SD value, the Expected Range Low value is subtracted from the Expected
Range High value and the difference is divided by four.
The update to the Expected Mean and Expected 1 SD values occurs when the Save
button is selected in step 21, page 301.
– Default Dilution
– Test Interval
– Time Interval (Minutes)
NOTE: The test interval and the time interval determine the automatic control order
frequency. The configured assay time interval supersedes the configured control level
time interval if both intervals are defined for the same lot number.
20. To edit or enter the onboard stability times for the individual assays, perform the following
steps:
a. Tap Set Stability.
b. In the Set Stability flyout, type the number of stability hours.
c. To save the onboard stability setting, tap Done.
To delete the onboard stability setting, tap Cancel.
NOTE: If the onboard stability time of an individual assay is less than the onboard stability
time of the control that was entered in step 15, page 300, the assay is disabled for onboard
use from the control:
– To disable the assay, tap Continue.
– To edit the onboard stability value of the analyte, tap Cancel.
21. To save the edits to the control level settings, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the control level settings, tap Cancel.
NOTE: If the previously configured value for Expected Mean or Expected 1 SD was edited, a
message is displayed with the option to perform a reevaluation of the control data against
the Westgard rules:
– To reevaluate the control results, tap Continue.
All control results, up to the maximum of 5000 points, for the control lot and level are
recalculated.
– To cancel the reevaluation of the control results, tap Cancel.
22. To edit the assays for another control level, tap a level in the Level drop-down list, and then
repeat steps 18, page 300 through 21, page 301.
23. To return to the Quality Control screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Automated control ordering, page 579
Prerequisite Release, archive, and delete the control results that are
associated with the control to be deleted.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Release a specimen result or a control result, page 614
Archive the results, page 668
Prerequisite Release, archive, and delete the control results that are
associated with the control to be deleted.
Perform this procedure to delete a lot number for a configured single-constituent control or a
configured multiconstituent control.
NOTE: Control lot numbers with pending orders or control lot numbers that have vials loaded on
the system cannot be deleted.
Individual control lot numbers are deleted automatically when the following situations occur:
• No pending orders are present for the control lot number.
• The last control data point for the control lot is deleted.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Required materials One or more quality control data files on a USB flash drive or
on the hard drive
Perform this procedure to import quality control data files to create a new control or to create a
new control lot for a configured multiconstituent control.
NOTE: If a control product has separate c-series and i-series data files, both data files must be
imported on the Alinity ci-series.
If the expected mean and expected standard deviation (1 SD) values are not provided in the
quality control data file, the import process converts manufacturer-provided ranges for these
values.
To calculate the Expected Mean value, the Expected Range Low value and the Expected Range
High value are added and the sum is divided by two. To calculate the Expected 1 SD value, the
Expected Range Low value is subtracted from the Expected Range High value and the
difference is divided by four.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Quality Control.
4. In the Control Count list on the Quality Control screen, tap a control name or tap New
Control.
5. Tap Import.
On the Import screen, the Hard Drive button is selected.
6. In the Quality Control Files list, tap the quality control data file to import.
If the quality control data file is located on a USB flash drive, perform the following steps:
a. Insert the USB flash drive.
b. Tap the USB Flash Drive button.
c. Tap the appropriate folder.
d. Tap the quality control data file to import.
NOTE: The assay names and assay numbers for the data in the file and for the
corresponding system assays are displayed with an import status. Data for all quality control
levels is imported for assays that have a status of OK. No data is imported for assays with
the following statuses:
– No Assay
– Previously Defined
– Units Mismatch
– Version Mismatch
Quality control data files that are imported from a USB flash drive are saved to an internal
storage location on the system. To reinstall the quality control data files on a future date, tap the
Hard Drive button.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Perform this procedure to delete quality control data files from the user interface computer. After
a quality control data file is deleted, the file is unavailable to be reinstalled.
NOTE: This procedure cannot be used to delete quality control data files from a USB flash drive.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Quality Control.
4. In the Control Count list on the Quality Control screen, tap a control name.
5. Tap Import.
On the Import screen, the Hard Drive button is selected.
6. In the Quality Control Files list, tap the quality control data file to delete.
7. Tap Delete.
8. To delete the quality control data file, tap Continue.
To cancel the delete function, tap Cancel.
9. To return to the list of control names on the Quality Control screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Perform this procedure to view or print a quality control (QC) insert or to save the insert as a
portable document format (PDF) file.
NOTE: A QC insert is available only for selected quality control products and only for control lot
numbers that were created from an imported file and have not been deleted previously on the
hard drive.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
3. On the Assay tab of the Configure screen, tap Quality Control.
4. In the Control Count list on the Quality Control screen, tap a control name.
5. Tap View/Edit to display the quality control data for the default lot number.
6. In the Lot drop-down list under Control Configuration, tap a control lot number that is not
the default.
7. Tap Print.
8. Under Report Selection in the Print flyout, tap Control Insert.
9. To rotate the document, use the Rotate toolbar.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
OK The imported assay has the same assay number and result
units as the assay that was configured on the system. The
data is imported.
No Assay No assay on the system has the same assay number in the
imported file. The data is not imported.
Previously Defined The data has been manually entered or imported. The data is
not imported.
Unit Mismatch The imported assay has a different value in the Unified Code
for Units of Measure (UCUM) area than the system assay
with the same assay number. The data is not imported.
Version Mismatch The imported assay has the same assay number as the assay
that was configured on the system, but the imported assay
does not have the same assay version as the configured
assay. The data is not imported.
Related information...
Quality Control screen, page 289
Westgard screen
On the Westgard screen, the operator can view the Westgard rule settings for each assay
installed on the system.
The supervisor or system administrator can configure Westgard rule settings for each assay
installed on the system.
Related information...
Configure screen, Assay tab, page 227
Westgard screen element descriptions, page 308
Configure Westgard rules, page 309
Elements
All option Displays all assays that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Function buttons
Related information...
Westgard screen, page 308
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Westgard rule descriptions, page 638
Perform this procedure to configure Westgard rules, which are used to assess quality control
results.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Assay tab.
Related information...
Westgard screen, page 308
Westgard rule application, page 637
Related information...
System configuration, page 154
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, page 310
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Related information...
Configure screen, Maintenance & Diagnostics tab, page 310
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, Available Files tab element descriptions, page 311
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, Installed Files tab element descriptions, page 312
Install procedure files, page 314
Uninstall procedure files, page 314
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Elements
Displaying Procedure Displays the file folder hierarchy that contains the procedure
Files In files displayed in the Procedure list.
Status Displays the status of the file installation. The status includes
file integrity and file installation success or failure.
Update Status Displays the status of all procedure files that are available.
The Available Files tab has five file statuses:
• Current
• New
• Update
• Installed
• Previous
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, page 310
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Elements
Status Displays the status of the file installation. The status includes
file integrity and file installation success or failure.
Category Displays the category for the procedure. The Installed Files
tab has the following categories.
The following categories are displayed for maintenance
procedures:
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Quarterly
• Semiyearly
• Yearly
• As Needed
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, page 310
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of file update statuses, page 271
Procedure files that are installed from a USB flash drive are saved to an internal storage
location on the system.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, page 310
Export a user-defined maintenance procedure, page 321
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Perform this procedure to uninstall maintenance and diagnostic procedure files. Uninstalled
procedure files are listed in the procedure log with a history of previous actions. Procedure files
remain available to be reinstalled from the Available Files tab of the Install/Uninstall Procedures
screen.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab.
3. On the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab of the Configure screen, tap Install/Uninstall
Procedures.
4. On the Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, tap the Installed Files tab.
5. On the Installed Files tab, tap one or more procedure files to uninstall (or tap Select All).
6. Tap Uninstall.
7. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
8. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, page 310
Related information...
Configure screen, Maintenance & Diagnostics tab, page 310
User-Defined Maintenance screen, Create/Edit tab element descriptions, page 315
User-Defined Maintenance screen, Export tab element descriptions, page 317
Create a user-defined maintenance procedure, page 319
Edit a user-defined maintenance procedure , page 319
Uninstall a user-defined maintenance procedure, page 320
Export a user-defined maintenance procedure, page 321
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time the procedure was created or
edited. When creating a new procedure the operator ID is
blank.
Function buttons
Related information...
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Print a report, page 662
Elements
Category Displays the category for the procedure. The Export tab has
the following categories.
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Quarterly
• Semiyearly
• Yearly
• As Needed
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Export Exports the select files from the user interface computer to
the USB flash drive.
Related information...
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Edit a user-defined maintenance procedure , page 319
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the Configure screen, tap the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab.
3. On the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab of the Configure screen, tap User-Defined
Maintenance.
4. On the Create/Edit tab of the User-Defined Maintenance screen, under Installed User-
Defined Maintenance Procedures, tap the procedure to edit.
5. Edit any or all of the following information:
– Frequency
– Description
– Instructions
6. To save the edits to the procedure, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the procedure, tap Cancel.
7. To edit another procedure, repeat steps 4, page 320 through 6, page 320.
8. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Create a user-defined maintenance procedure, page 319
3. On the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab of the Configure screen, tap User-Defined
Maintenance.
4. On the Create/Edit tab of the User-Defined Maintenance screen, under Installed User-
Defined Maintenance Procedures, tap one or more procedure files to uninstall.
5. Tap Uninstall.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Perform this procedure to export user-defined maintenance procedure files to a USB flash drive.
After the procedure files are exported, the files can be installed from the USB flash drive to a
different system.
1. Insert the USB flash drive.
2. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
3. On the Configure screen, tap the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab.
4. On the Maintenance & Diagnostics tab of the Configure screen, tap User-Defined
Maintenance.
5. On the User-Defined Maintenance screen, tap the Export tab.
6. On the Export tab, tap the USB flash drive to which to export the procedure files.
7. Tap one or more procedure files to export (or tap Select All).
8. Tap Export.
9. Remove the USB flash drive.
10. To return to the Configure screen, tap Done.
Related information...
User-Defined Maintenance screen, page 315
Install procedure files, page 314
Utilities screen
The operator can perform the following tasks from the Utilities screen:
Backup/Restore • Perform a backup.
• Copy a backup to a USB flash drive.
• Restore a backup (CSC Logon).
Related information...
Installation procedures and special requirements, page 151
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
System Updates screen, page 328
Troubleshooting screen, page 342
Current Firmware screen, page 346
CLI Diagnostics screen (FSE Logon), page 347
Backup/Restore screen
On the Backup/Restore screen, the operator can view a list of previously created backups.
The operator can perform the following functions:
• Perform a backup.
• Copy a backup to a USB flash drive.
If the logon for CSC or FSE is used, an option to restore a backup is available.
Related information...
Utilities screen, page 323
Backup/Restore screen element descriptions, page 324
Copy Backup flyout element descriptions, page 325
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the backup was generated.
Type Displays the type of backup. Two backup types are available
on the Backup/Restore screen:
• Automatic
• Manual
Version Displays the system software version at the time that the
backup was generated.
Function buttons
Related information...
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Last Update Displays the date and time that the files in the folder were
most recently updated.
Function buttons
Related information...
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
Elements
Function buttons
Related information...
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
Related information...
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Perform this procedure to copy a backup from the system to a USB flash drive.
1. Insert the USB flash drive.
2. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
3. On the Utilities screen, tap Backup/Restore.
4. On the Backup/Restore screen, tap a backup to copy.
5. Tap Copy.
6. In the Copy Backup flyout, tap the USB flash drive and folder to which to copy the backup.
7. To copy the backup, tap Done.
To cancel the copy function, tap Cancel.
8. Remove the USB flash drive.
9. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Perform this procedure as indicated during troubleshooting to restore files from a previously
created backup.
To restore a backup, the following items must match the currently installed software:
• System control module (SCM) serial number
• Software version
• Processing module type
If the logon for FSE is used and the SCM serial number does not match the current SCM serial
number, available backups are displayed with the configuration for the backup file that includes
the processing module types and respective module serial numbers. This functionality allows the
FSE to restore a backup when the user interface (UI) computer is replaced.
NOTE: When a backup is restored, the UI computer shuts down and restarts.
Related information...
Backup/Restore screen, page 323
Cycle power to the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 432
If the logon for CSC or FSE is used, the option to import system updates from a USB flash drive
is available.
If the logon for FSE is used, the option to decline a mandatory system update is available.
Related information...
Utilities screen, page 323
System Updates screen element descriptions, page 329
Comments flyout element descriptions, page 332
Status Change flyout element descriptions (FSE Logon), page 333
System Update Import screen element descriptions, page 334
Elements
TSB Number Displays the technical service bulletin (TSB) number. System
updates are distributed as a TSB.
Module SN Displays the serial number of the module associated with the
TSB.
• Superseded
• Ignored
Date Displays the date of the current status for the TSB.
Include data for Displays a check box that is used to include past module
historic modules (if configurations in the TSB list.
any)
Details area
TSB Number Displays the TSB number. System updates are distributed as
a TSB.
Product Code Displays a list of product codes that apply to the TSB that is
displayed. The following product codes are available:
• 205 (Alinity i)
• 210 (Alinity c)
• 214 (system control module)
Requires System Displays if the software needs to be restarted after the TSB is
Restart installed.
Install Access Level Displays the minimum access level that is necessary to install
the TSB. The System Update screen has five access levels:
• General
• Supervisor
• Administrator
• CSC
NOTE: This access level requires Abbott Customer
Service authorization.
• FSE
NOTE: This access level requires field service
installation.
Requires Verification Displays if the TSB requires a manual verification after the
installation is completed. If the TSB requires a manual
Prerequisite Update Displays a list of TSB numbers that must be installed before
the TSB that is displayed is installed.
Superseded Updates Displays a list of TSB numbers that are outdated by the
installation of the TSB that is displayed.
Description Displays a short description of the TSB. For more information,
the System Update Letter can be printed.
Timestamp Displays the date and time of the current status for the TSB.
Status Displays the current status of the TSB. The System Updates
screen has 11 system update statuses:
• Available
• Download Requested
• Download Failed
• Ready to Install
• Install in Progress
• Install Failed
• Pending Verification
• Applied
• Manually Applied
• Superseded
• Declined
Function buttons
Set as Available Sets the system update status of the TSB to Available. This
function button is located on the Installed Updates tab and
the Declined Updates tab.
Install Failed Sets the system update status of the TSB to Install Failed.
This function button is located on the Installed Updates tab.
Decline Sets the system update status of the TSB to Ignored and
moves the TSB to the Declined Updates tab. This function
button is located on the Available Files tab.
Change Status Displays the Status Change flyout. The Status drop-down list
has two change statuses:
• Manually Applied
• Pending Verification
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Descriptions of system update statuses, page 335
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Function buttons
Clear Removes text from the comment box without closing the
flyout.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Elements
Function buttons
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Elements
File Date And Time Displays the date and time of the system update file.
Import File Displays the file location and file name of the selected system
update file.
Function buttons
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Download Failed An error occurred and the request was not completed.
Install Failed An error occurred and the installation was not completed.
Pending Verification The installation of the system update was successful, but a
manual verification by the operator is required.
Manually Applied The system update was completed after a manual verification
or by an Abbott Laboratories representative.
Ignored The system update was declined and was not installed.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
System Updates screen element descriptions, page 329
4. Tap Print.
5. Under Report Selection in the Print flyout, tap System Update Letter.
6. To rotate the document, use the Rotate toolbar.
7. To browse the document, use the Page toolbar.
8. To increase or decrease the font size in the document, use the Zoom toolbar.
9. To resize the document to fit the window width ( ) or to resize the document to fit one full
page in the window ( ), use the Fit toolbar.
10. To find a word or phrase in the document, use the Find toolbar.
11. To print the document, tap Print.
To return to the System Updates screen, tap Done.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Operator access level The access level depends on the system update.
Perform this procedure to download the software installer for a new system update or a previous
software installer download that failed. After the software installer is downloaded, the system
update is ready for installation.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the Available Files tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
4. Tap Download.
5. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Install a system update, page 336
Operator access level The access level depends on the system update.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Download the system update software, page 336
Operator access level The access level depends on the system update. Mandatory
system updates can be declined only by an Abbott
Laboratories representative.
Perform this procedure to decline a system update. After the system update is declined, the
update is moved to the Declined Updates tab. System updates that have been declined can be
set as available for installation if necessary.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the Available Files tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
4. Tap Decline.
5. In the Comment box, type the reason that the TSB needs to be declined.
NOTE: Additional comments can be added to a TSB record. To maintain the traceability of
the comments, include a date and an operator ID with each comment.
6. To decline the TSB, tap Done.
To return to the TSB list without declining the TSB, tap Cancel.
7. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Set a declined system update as available for installation, page 339
Operator access level The access level depends on the system update.
Perform this procedure when a software system update requires a manual verification.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the Available Files tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
4. Tap Verify.
5. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
6. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Operator access level The access level depends on the system update.
Perform this procedure to change the status of a system update from Declined to Available and
to allow a declined update to be set as available for installation.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the System Updates screen, tap the Declined Updates tab.
4. On the Declined Updates tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
5. Tap Set As Available.
6. In the Comment box, type the reason that the TSB needs to be set as available for
installation.
NOTE: Additional comments can be added to a TSB record. To maintain the traceability of
the comments, include a date and an operator ID with each comment.
7. To save the change to the TSB status, tap Done.
To return to the TSB list without changing the TSB status, tap Cancel.
8. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Decline a system update, page 337
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Perform this procedure when a system update that was installed previously needs to be
reinstalled.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the System Updates screen, tap the Installed Updates tab.
4. On the Installed Updates tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
5. Tap Set As Available.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Change the status of an installed TSB to a status of Install Failed (FSE Logon)
Perform this procedure when a manual verification procedure fails for a system update that has
a status of Pending Verification, Applied, or Manually Applied.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the System Updates screen, tap the Installed Updates tab.
4. On the Installed Updates tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
5. Tap Install Failed.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Change the status of a TSB that failed to install to a status of Pending Verification (FSE
Logon)
Perform this procedure when a system update that has a status of Install Failed requires a
manual verification procedure to be performed.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap System Updates.
3. On the Available Files tab of the System Updates screen, tap a technical service bulletin
(TSB) number in the TSB list.
4. Tap Change Status.
5. In the Status Change flyout, tap the Status drop-down list, and then tap Pending
Verification.
6. To save the status change, tap Done.
To cancel the status change and return to the TSB list, tap Cancel.
7. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
8. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
System Updates screen, page 328
Troubleshooting screen
On the Troubleshooting screen, the operator can retrieve system log packages that can be used
for troubleshooting by an Abbott Laboratories representative.
Related information...
Utilities screen, page 323
Troubleshooting screen element descriptions, page 342
Descriptions of troubleshooting packages, page 343
Retrieve a troubleshooting package, page 345
Elements
Troubleshooting Data
Function buttons
Related information...
Troubleshooting screen, page 342
Descriptions of troubleshooting packages, page 343
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Core Operational Data Includes core operational data (for example, result data,
calibration data, and instrument operational data) that is
located in the operational data recorder (ODR) of the
instrument.
The following files are collected:
• Result data
• Calibration data
• Message history data
• Maintenance and diagnostic (MnD) data
• Assay activity data
• Reagent data
Motor Move Data Includes integrated circuit board motor movement data for
(CSC Logon) both c-series and i-series processing modules.
CC PHM Data (CSC Includes the c-series prognostic health monitoring data.
Logon)
IA Heater Duty Cycle Includes the i-series heater duty cycle data.
Data (CSC Logon)
Related information...
Troubleshooting screen, page 342
Troubleshooting screen element descriptions, page 342
Perform this procedure to retrieve a troubleshooting package that can be used for
troubleshooting by an Abbott Laboratories representative.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Utilities.
2. On the Utilities screen, tap Troubleshooting.
3. Under Troubleshooting Packages on the Troubleshooting screen, tap a package to
retrieve.
4. To send the troubleshooting package to AbbottLink, tap Retrieve AbbottLink.
To save the troubleshooting package on a USB flash drive, tap Retrieve Removable Media,
and then perform the following steps:
a. Insert the USB flash drive.
b. In the Retrieve to Removable Media flyout, tap the appropriate USB flash drive and
folder.
c. To save the troubleshooting package, tap Done.
To cancel the save function, tap Cancel.
d. Remove the USB flash drive.
5. To return to the Utilities screen, tap Utilities.
Related information...
Troubleshooting screen, page 342
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Related information...
Utilities screen, page 323
Current Firmware screen element descriptions, page 346
Elements
Build Date / Time Displays the date and time that the firmware was created. If
the firmware version information is unavailable because of a
device communication failure, dashes are displayed.
NOTE: The build date and time are not applicable to the bar
code reader, servo controller boards, and the PHM data
board.
Refresh Date / Time Displays the date and time that the version information was
obtained. If the firmware version information is unavailable
because of a device communication failure, dashes are
displayed.
Function buttons
Related information...
Current Firmware screen, page 346
Related information...
Utilities screen, page 323
NOTES
Introduction
The Alinity ci-series uses photometric, potentiometric, and chemiluminescent microparticle
immunoassay (CMIA) detection technologies to measure analyte concentrations in samples.
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Principles of operation (i-series), page 375
Related information...
Principles of operation, page 349
Photometric method (c-series), page 350
Potentiometric method (c-series), page 355
Assay processing (c-series), page 361
Indirect assay processing method (c-series), page 370
SmartWash feature (c-series), page 370
Optimum sampling sequence feature (c-series), page 371
Sample interference indices (c-series), page 372
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Photometric technology (c-series), page 350
Optical measurement (c-series), page 353
Related information...
Photometric method (c-series), page 350
End-point assay reactions (c-series), page 351
Rate assay reactions (c-series), page 352
Where:
Abs Absorbance
SD Sample dispense
Related information...
Photometric technology (c-series), page 350
Create a user-defined assay (c-series photometric), page 247
Where:
Abs Absorbance
SD Sample dispense
Related information...
Photometric technology (c-series), page 350
Create a user-defined assay (c-series photometric), page 247
Related information...
Photometric method (c-series), page 350
Optical system and measurement sequence (c-series), page 353
Data reduction calculation (c-series photometric), page 355
Legend:
1. Preamp board
2. Linear photodiode array
3. Diffraction grating
4. Entrance slit
5. Convex lens
6. Water bath lens
7. Cuvette
8. Heat glass
9. Lamp
10. Data acquisition (DAQ) board
11. Central processing unit (CPU) board
The measurement sequence occurs as the optical system performs the following actions:
1. A convex lens focuses the light from a tungsten halogen lamp and passes the light through
the cuvette to measure absorbance changes as the reaction progresses.
2. A second convex lens focuses the light through the entrance slit onto the diffraction grating.
3. The diffraction grating separates the focused light beam into 16 component wavelengths
(340 nm to 804 nm) and reflects the light spectrum onto the photodiode array.
4. The photodiode array measures the light intensity at the different wavelengths.
5. The preamp board, the DAQ board, and the CPU board convert and amplify the signal from
the photodiode array and then communicate transmittance values to the user interface
computer where data reduction and result calculation occur.
Related information...
Optical measurement (c-series), page 353
NOTE: The system adjusts the absorbance data readings to light path length values of 10 mm.
The absorbance data readings are blank corrected, as specified for each test, and then are
converted to concentration units.
Related information...
Optical measurement (c-series), page 353
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Related information...
Potentiometric method (c-series), page 355
Related information...
Potentiometric method (c-series), page 355
ICT Reference Solution and sample delivery and processing (c-series), page 356
Measurement by the ICT module (c-series), page 359
Data reduction calculation (c-series potentiometric), page 360
During ICT Reference Solution delivery and processing, the ICT Reference Solution cup is filled
with the ICT Reference Solution, which is analyzed, and then the waste is removed:
1. The syringe on the left side of the ICT Reference Solution pump moves the ICT Reference
Solution from the bottle, through the warming ring, and into the ICT Reference Solution cup.
2. The ICT unit moves down to position the ICT probe in the ICT Reference Solution cup.
3. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump aspirates the ICT Reference
Solution from the cup into the ICT module.
4. The ICT module measures the ICT Reference Solution. The system converts the
measurements into millivolt readings that are used for reference when sample result
concentrations are calculated.
5. High-concentration waste processing begins:
The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the ICT Reference Solution
from the ICT module to the high-concentration waste compartment.
6. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the liquid waste from the
high-concentration waste compartment.
7. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the liquid waste to the high-
concentration waste tubing.
8. Low-concentration waste processing begins:
The syringe on the right side of the ICT Reference Solution pump moves the remaining ICT
Reference Solution from the ICT Reference Solution cup.
9. The syringe on the right side of the ICT Reference Solution pump moves the solution to the
low-concentration waste compartment in the water bath overflow and waste area.
10. Gravity causes the liquid waste to drain from the low-concentration waste compartment in
the water bath overflow and waste area to the low-concentration waste tubing.
During ICT sample delivery and processing, the sample and the ICT Sample Diluent are
dispensed, the sample is analyzed, and then the waste is removed:
1. The sample pipettor dispenses 15 μL of sample into a cuvette.
2. Reagent pipettor 1 dispenses 69 μL of ICT Sample Diluent (ICTD5) and 276 μL of water into
the cuvette.
Related information...
ICT measurement (c-series), page 356
The following figure shows internal components of the ICT module on the right side of the
module. The direction of the sample flow is indicated by the arrow.
Legend:
1. O-ring
2. Reference electrode
3. Cl- electrode
4. K+ electrode
5. Na+ electrode
Related information...
ICT measurement (c-series), page 356
Related information...
ICT measurement (c-series), page 356
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor
2. Sample probe and whole blood wash cups
3. Mixers
4. Mixer wash cups
5. ICT unit
6. Lamp
7. Reagent 2 pipettor and wash cup
8. Cuvette washer
9. Cuvette segments
10. Reagent 1 pipettor and wash cup
The movement of the reaction carousel, the timing of these movements, and the position of the
components cause each reaction activity to occur at a specified time and location.
During assay processing, the reaction carousel rotates counterclockwise one-fourth turn every 4
seconds to position the cuvettes at each location. Each rotation moves incrementally to 47
cuvette positions in the reaction carousel. As each rotation occurs, the cuvettes pass the
photometric position where the lamp is located, and the photometer measures the absorbance of
each cuvette.
The following illustration shows key positions in the reaction carousel where activities occur.
Figure 104: Reaction carousel positions
The following table describes the movement and timing for all assay protocol types.
Position Description
1 The sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the cuvette at the starting position
[1].
Position Description
2 The reaction carousel rotates one-fourth turn (47 cuvette positions). The cuvette
that contains the sample is located at the first reagent dispense position [2].
Reagent 1 pipettor dispenses reagent 1 into the cuvette.
3 The reaction carousel rotates one-fourth turn to the first mixing position [3] where
mixer 1 mixes the sample and reagent 1.
Rotation from 3 to 4 As the reaction carousel rotates from position 3 to position 4, the cuvette passes
the photometric position [6] where the lamp is located, and the photometer
measures the absorbance.
4 No activity occurs in this position [4].
5 The reaction carousel completes a full rotation of four cycles. Each cycle rotates
the reaction carousel 47 cuvette positions (one-fourth turn). After four cycles are
completed, the cuvette has moved 188 positions (4 x 47 = 188). Since the reaction
carousel has 187 cuvettes, the cuvette is now one position beyond the original
starting position [5].
6 through 153 The reaction carousel continues to rotate and the reaction mixture incubates. The
photometer measures the absorbance each time that the cuvette passes the
photometric position [6] for a total of 38 readings.
154 through 182 The cuvette washer [7] aspirates the reaction mixture to waste and cleans the
cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and purified water. Then, the cuvette
washer dispenses purified water into the cuvette for the water blank measurement,
which ensures cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and
dries the cuvette.
183 through 188 The clean cuvette rotates to the starting position [1].
The following illustration shows the relationship between the timing of photometric readings and
the dispense of samples and reagents. The maximum reaction time is 10 minutes.
Where:
Abs Absorbance
SD Sample dispense
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c-series), page 364
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c-series), page 366
Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c-series), page 367
Assay processing for a pretreatment protocol (c-series), page 368
Assay processing for an ICT protocol (c-series), page 369
Legend:
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor aspirates sample and then dispenses the sample into a cuvette.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor aspirates reagent and then dispenses the reagent into the
cuvette.
3. At position 3, mixer 1 mixes the sample and the reagent.
4. At positions 4 through 153, the reaction mixture incubates, and the photometer measures the
absorbance each time that the cuvette passes the photometric position [6].
5. At positions 154 through 182, the cuvette washer aspirates the reaction mixture to waste and cleans
the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and purified water. Then, the cuvette washer dispenses
purified water into the cuvette for the water blank measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity.
Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette.
Related information...
Assay processing (c-series), page 361
Legend:
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor aspirates sample and then dispenses the sample into a cuvette.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor aspirates reagent and then dispenses the reagent into the
cuvette.
3. At position 3, mixer 1 mixes the sample and the reagent.
4. At positions 4 through 74, the reaction mixture incubates and the photometer measures the
absorbance each time that the cuvette passes the photometric position [7].
5. At position 75, the reagent 2 pipettor aspirates the reagent and then dispenses the second reagent
into the cuvette.
6. At position 76, mixer 2 mixes the second reagent with the sample and reagent mixture.
7. At positions 77 through 153, the reaction mixture incubates, and the photometer measures the
absorbance each time that the cuvette passes the photometric position.
8. At positions 154 through 182, the cuvette washer aspirates the reaction mixture to waste and cleans
the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and purified water. Then, the cuvette washer dispenses
purified water into the cuvette for the water blank measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity.
Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette.
Related information...
Assay processing (c-series), page 361
Legend:
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor aspirates the sample and then dispenses the sample into a cuvette.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor aspirates the diluent and then dispenses the diluent into the
cuvette.
3. At position 3, mixer 1 mixes the sample and the diluent.
4. At position 5, the sample pipettor aspirates the diluted sample and then dispenses the diluted sample
into a new cuvette. Then, the system processes the diluted sample according to the one-reagent or
two-reagent assay protocol as appropriate.
Related information...
Assay processing (c-series), page 361
Legend:
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor aspirates the sample and then dispenses the sample into a cuvette.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor aspirates the pretreatment reagent and then dispenses the
pretreatment reagent into the cuvette.
3. At position 3, mixer 1 mixes the sample and the pretreatment reagent.
4. At position 5, the sample pipettor aspirates the pretreated sample and then dispenses the pretreated
sample into a new cuvette. Then, the system processes the pretreated sample according to the one-
reagent or two-reagent assay protocol as appropriate.
Related information...
Assay processing (c-series), page 361
Legend:
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor aspirates sample and then dispenses the sample into a cuvette.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor aspirates ICT sample diluent and then dispenses the ICT sample
diluent into the cuvette.
3. At position 3, mixer 1 mixes the sample and the ICT sample diluent.
4. At position 40, the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample, and then the ICT module analyzes the
diluted sample.
NOTE: The ICT module analyzes the ICT Reference Solution once before and after each serum
sample and twice before and after each urine sample to provide a reference potential that is used to
calculate results.
5. At positions 154 through 182, the cuvette washer aspirates the reaction mixture to waste and cleans
the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and purified water. Then, the cuvette washer dispenses
purified water into the cuvette for the water blank measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity.
Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the purified water and dries the cuvette.
Related information...
Assay processing (c-series), page 361
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
recognized assay performance criteria. The following list provides examples of recognized assay
performance criteria:
• The U.S. Clinical Laboratory Improvement Act (CLIA)
• Guidelines for Quality Assurance of Medical Laboratory Examinations of the German
Medical Association
• National Academy of Clinical Biochemistry (NACB)
• National Kidney Disease Education Program (NKDEP) Guidelines
• Desirable Biological Variation Database Specifications (C. Ricos et al.)
When possible, reagent carryover testing is performed by using serum-based control samples
that contain analyte concentrations near medical decision levels. Assay pairs that meet the
reagent carryover criteria are not configured with SmartWash parameters. In some instances,
because of system-specific conditions, customers may choose to configure SmartWash
parameters for Abbott assay pairs.
To minimize the consecutive measurement of assays configured as SmartWash pairs, the c-
series uses the optimum sampling sequence feature, which automatically changes the sampling
sequence.
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Onboard solutions (c-series), page 139
Configure SmartWash settings (c-series), page 243
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Related information...
Principles of operation (c-series), page 350
Sample interference indices protocol (c-series), page 372
Sample interference indices measurement (c-series), page 372
Related information...
Sample interference indices (c-series), page 372
Figure 111: Absorption spectra of NADH and hemolyzed, icteric, and lipemic samples (c-
series)
Where:
Abs Absorbance
H Hemolysis
I Icterus
L Lipemia
To measure the three interfering substances, first the system measures absorbance values of
four wavelength pairs. Then by using the appropriate photometric reads, the system applies a
mathematical calculation to determine the relative interferent concentration:
• Lipemia = M (a01 x A1 + a02 x A2 + a03 x A3 + a04 x A4)
• Hemolysis = M (a05 x A1 + a06 x A2 + a07 x A3 + a08 x A4)
• Icterus = M (a09 x A1 + a10 x A2 + a11 x A3 + a12 x A4)
Where:
M The correction for the sample dilution is (Reagent
volume + Sample volume) ÷ Sample volume.
Constants that are specific to each interferent: Constants are used by the system to calculate the
• a01, a02, a03, a04 (lipemia) sample interference indices. Constants are not
• a05, a06, a07, a08 (hemolysis) definable by the operator.
• a09, a10, a11, a12 (icterus)
Absorbance level that is measured at wavelength Absorbance primary wavelength - Absorbance
pairs: secondary wavelength
• A1 (500 nm/524 nm)
• A2 (572 nm/604 nm)
• A3 (628 nm/660 nm)
• A4 (524 nm/804 nm)
Related information...
Sample interference indices (c-series), page 372
Related information...
Principles of operation, page 349
CMIA method (i-series), page 375
Assay processing (i-series), page 380
Related information...
Principles of operation (i-series), page 375
CMIA technology and reaction sequence (i-series), page 375
Optical system and measurement sequence (i-series), page 378
Data reduction calculation (i-series), page 380
Acridinium-labeled conjugate
Pre-Trigger Solution
Trigger Solution
A CMIA reaction sequence is the order of interactions between the analyte in the sample and the
reactants. The sequence is specific to the assay protocol.
The following two-step sequence illustrates the basic principles of a reaction.
1. The sample and the paramagnetic microparticles coated with capture molecules are
dispensed into the reaction vessel (RV). The vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
2. The reaction mixture incubates. The analyte in the sample binds to the capture molecules
on the paramagnetic microparticles and forms an immune complex.
3. A magnet attracts the paramagnetic microparticles (which are bound to the specific analyte)
to a wall of the RV. The wash zone assembly washes the reaction mixture to remove
unbound materials. Additional assay processing can now occur.
4. The pipettor dispenses a chemiluminescent, acridinium-labeled conjugate into the RV. The
conjugate binds to the immune complex to complete the reaction mixture. The vortexer
mixes the reaction mixture.
The reaction mixture incubates.
5. The wash zone assembly washes the reaction mixture to remove unbound materials.
6. The Pre-Trigger Solution nozzle dispenses the Pre-Trigger Solution (hydrogen peroxide) into
the reaction mixture. The vortexer mixes the reaction mixture. The Pre-Trigger Solution:
– Creates an acidic environment to prevent the early release of energy (light emission).
Related information...
CMIA method (i-series), page 375
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
Legend:
1. Photomultiplier tube (PMT)
2. Optics
3. Light pipe
4. Trigger Solution delivery nozzle
5. RV
6. Shutter assembly
7. Magnet
The measurement sequence occurs as the optical system performs the following actions:
1. Closes the shutter around the RV to seal off ambient light.
2. Turns on the high voltage to the PMT, performs a background read (the Pre-Trigger Solution
has been dispensed), and transfers the data to the computer.
3. Dispenses the Trigger Solution into the RV. This solution initiates the chemiluminescent
reaction that results in the emission of photons of light.
4. Uses the light pipe to collect the emitted photons of light and directs them to the PMT,
which is located in the CMIA reader.
5. Performs an activated read with the collected photons of light.
6. Transfers the count data to the computer. Based on the assay type, the chemiluminescent
light produced during this reaction is directly proportional or indirectly proportional to the
amount of analyte in the sample.
7. Sums the signal over a defined time period to yield the RLU.
8. Turns off the high voltage to the PMT.
9. Opens the shutter.
Related information...
CMIA method (i-series), page 375
Optics (Alinity i), page 105
Related information...
CMIA method (i-series), page 375
Related information...
Principles of operation (i-series), page 375
Assay processing for One Step 25 (i-series), page 381
Assay processing for Two Step 18-4 (i-series), page 382
Assay processing for pretreatment (i-series), page 384
STAT assay processing for One Step 11 (i-series), page 386
STAT assay processing for Two Step 4-4 (i-series), page 387
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor dispenses microparticles and the acridinium-labeled
conjugate.
NOTE: For a delayed one-step assay, the reagent 2 pipettor adds the acridinium-labeled
conjugate at position 71 and the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture at position 72.
3. At position 3, the vortexer mixes the sample, microparticles, and the conjugate.
4. At positions 4 through 86, the reaction mixture incubates for 25 minutes.
5. At positions 87 through 90, wash zone 2 washes the reaction mixture in the RV and then
removes unbound materials.
6. At position 94, the Pre-Trigger Solution nozzle dispenses the Pre-Trigger Solution into the
reaction mixture, and then the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
7. At position 98, the CMIA optical system performs a background read, the Trigger Solution
nozzle dispenses the Trigger Solution into the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical
system performs an activated read.
8. At position 100, the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV.
9. At position 101, the RV unloader removes the RV and discards it into the solid waste
container.
Related information...
Assay processing (i-series), page 380
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor dispenses microparticles.
3. At position 3, the vortexer mixes the sample and microparticles.
4. At positions 4 through 63, the reaction mixture incubates for 18 minutes.
5. At positions 64 through 67, wash zone 1 washes the reaction mixture in the RV and then
removes unbound materials.
6. At position 71, the reagent 2 pipettor dispenses the acridinium-labeled conjugate.
7. At position 72, the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
8. At positions 73 through 86, the reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes.
9. At positions 87 through 90, wash zone 2 washes the reaction mixture in the RV and then
removes unbound materials.
10. At position 94, the Pre-Trigger Solution nozzle dispenses the Pre-Trigger Solution into the
reaction mixture, and then the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
11. At position 98, the CMIA optical system performs a background read, the Trigger Solution
nozzle dispenses the Trigger Solution into the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical
system performs an activated read.
12. At position 100, the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV.
13. At position 101, the RV unloader removes the RV and discards it into the solid waste
container.
Related information...
Assay processing (i-series), page 380
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
The following steps describe the assay processing and the CMIA reaction that occurs during a
pretreatment assay protocol.
1. At pretreatment position 1, the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the reaction vessel
(RV).
2. At pretreatment position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor dispenses the first pretreatment reagents
into the sample in the RV.
3. At pretreatment position 6, the vortexer mixes the sample and pretreatment reagents.
4. At pretreatment positions 7 through 48, the reaction mixture incubates for 7 minutes.
5. At pretreatment position 48, the sample pipettor performs one of the following actions to
complete the pretreatment assay protocol:
– Transfers the pretreated sample to a new RV in pretreatment position 1 to process a
second 7-minute pretreatment assay protocol (Pretreatment 7-7)
– Transfers the pretreated sample to a new RV in process path position 1 (Pretreatment
7)
After the pretreatment assay protocol is completed, the one-step or two-step assay protocol
begins.
Related information...
Assay processing (i-series), page 380
Pretreatment path (Alinity i), page 107
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV.
Related information...
Assay processing (i-series), page 380
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
1. At position 1, the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV.
2. At position 2, the reagent 1 pipettor dispenses microparticles.
3. At position 3, the vortexer mixes the sample and microparticles.
4. At positions 4 through 17, the reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes.
5. At positions 18 through 21, wash zone 1 washes the reaction mixture in the RV and then
removes unbound materials.
6. At position 25, the reagent 2 pipettor dispenses the acridinium-labeled conjugate.
7. At position 26, the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
8. At positions 27 through 40, the reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes.
9. At positions 41 through 44, wash zone 2 washes the reaction mixture in the RV and then
removes unbound materials.
10. At position 48, the Pre-Trigger Solution nozzle dispenses the Pre-Trigger Solution into the
reaction mixture, and then the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
11. At position 52, the CMIA optical system performs a background read, the Trigger Solution
nozzle dispenses the Trigger Solution into the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical
system performs an activated read.
12. At position 54, the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV.
13. At position 55, the RV unloader removes the RV and discards it into the solid waste
container.
Related information...
Assay processing (i-series), page 380
Processing center (Alinity i), page 96
NOTES
Introduction
Before operating the Alinity ci-series, become familiar with system performance characteristics,
throughput capabilities and capacities, specifications, and requirements for samples,
temperature, waste, and clearance.
Related information...
System characteristics, page 392
Specifications and requirements, page 394
System characteristics
System characteristics provide a basic overview of the Alinity ci-series.
For additional characteristics that are specific to a processing module, see the appropriate
module type.
Related information...
Performance characteristics and specifications, page 391
Processing module characteristics (c-series), page 392
Processing module characteristics (i-series), page 393
Detection technology:
• Photometric End-point and rate
• Potentiometric Integrated chip technology (ICT) ion-selective electrodes
Pipetting capability Robotic precision with clot detection
Related information...
System characteristics, page 392
Related information...
System characteristics, page 392
Related information...
Performance characteristics and specifications, page 391
Operational specifications, page 394
System capacities, page 397
Physical specifications, page 400
Typical floor loading, page 401
System clearances, page 403
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 403
Optical specifications (c-series), page 406
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements , page 406
Environmental specifications and requirements, page 408
Computer and interface specifications, page 409
External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 410
Bar code label requirements, page 412
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
System installation, page 152
Operational specifications
Operational specifications for processing modules include the following information:
• Dispensing volumes
• Sample probe carryover specifications
• Processing temperatures
• Module throughput and time to first result
• System status transition times
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
Processing module operational specifications (c-series), page 395
Processing module operational specifications (i-series), page 396
Dispensing volumes:
• Sample pipettor 1.5 µL to 35 µL in 0.1 µL increments
• Sample pipettor (ICT) 15 µL per sample
• Reagent 1 pipettor • Reagent 1
45 µL to 250 µL in 1 µL increments
• Onboard solutions
45 µL to 345 µL in 1 µL increments
• Reagent 2 pipettor • Reagent 2
20 µL to 160 µL in 1 µL increments
• Onboard solutions
20 µL to 345 µL in 1 µL increments
• ICT Reference Solution 550 µL per sample
Sample probe carryover performance:
• Serum, plasma, urine, cerebrospinal fluid, and < 0.1 ppm
hemolysate
• Whole blood < 1000 ppm
Temperature:
• Onboard reagent refrigerator 2°C to 10°C
• Reaction mixture 36.7°C to 37.3°C
Throughput:
• Photometric assays Maximum of 900 tests per hour (serum, plasma,
urine, cerebrospinal fluid, and hemolysate
applications)
• Potentiometric assays Maximum of 675 tests per hour
• Whole blood assays Maximum of 225 tests per hour
• Photometric and potentiometric assay mix: Maximum of 1350 tests per hour
– 25% potentiometric (3 tests per sample)
• Mixed load list: Maximum of 900 tests per hour
– 1% to 3% whole blood tests
– 10% to 20% potentiometric tests
• Time to first result • 10 min or less (photometric)
NOTE: The time to first result starts at • 4 min or less (potentiometric)
aspiration and does not include sample
handling.
System status transition times:
NOTE: The Stopped to Processing and Idle to
Processing time intervals were generated with a
Related information...
Operational specifications, page 394
Dispensing volumes:
• Sample 2 µL to 200 µL in 1 µL increments
• Reagent 5 µL to 150 µL in 1 µL increments
• Pre-Trigger Solution 100 µL per test
• Trigger Solution 300 µL per test
Sample probe carryover performance < 0.1 ppm (serum, plasma, urine, or cerebrospinal
fluid)
Temperature:
• Onboard reagent refrigerator 2°C to 12°C
• Reaction mixture 36.4°C to 37.6°C
Throughput:
• Routine assays Maximum of 200 tests per hour
• STAT assays Maximum of 200 tests per hour
• Pretreatment 7 assays Maximum of 200 tests per hour
• Pretreatment 7-7 assays Maximum of 100 tests per hour
• Mixed load list: Maximum of 170 tests per hour
– 10 % pretreatment
– 25 % STAT
– 65 % routine
• Time to first result • 29 min (routine)
NOTE: The time to first result starts at • 36 min to 43 min (pretreatment)
aspiration and does not include sample • 15 min (STAT)*
handling. * The estimated processing time including
sample handling is 18 min.
System status transition times:
Processing module (i-series):
• Offline to Stopped 3 min
• Stopped to Idle 3 min
• Stopped to Running 7 min
• Idle to Running 4 min to 7 min*
* If the pretreatment path is repopulated with
reaction vessels, the duration of initialization is
7 min.
Reagent and sample manager:
• Offline to Stopped 1 min
• Stopped to Idle 15 s
• Stopped to Running 30 s
• Idle to Running 30 s
Related information...
Operational specifications, page 394
System capacities
System capacities include storage information for the software data, processing modules, and
the reagent and sample manager.
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
Software data storage capacities, page 397
Processing module capacities (c-series), page 398
Processing module capacities (i-series), page 399
Reagent and sample manager capacities, page 400
Calibrations:
• Active • 1 active calibration for a maximum of 4
different reagent lots for each assay on a
processing module
• Inactive • Maximum of 3 months
Levey-Jennings graph data Maximum of 4 months
Messages history 120,000 messages
Print spooler 10 print requests
Reagent cartridges 1000 cartridges per processing module
Released control results* 20,000 results per processing module
Released specimen results* 200,000 results
Unreleased results:* 20,000 results
• Specimens
• Controls
• Calibrations
Unreleased results include test orders, tests in
process, and exceptions.
* Results include system-ordered constituents for calculated assays. The constituent results
cannot be displayed on the Results screen.
Related information...
System capacities, page 397
Bulk solutions:
• ICT Reference Solution 975 mL
• Alkaline Wash 500 mL
• Acid Wash 500 mL
Bulk solution reservoirs:
• ICT Reference Solution reservoir 1L
• Alkaline Wash reservoir 0.5 L
• Acid Wash reservoir 0.5 L
Reagent carousel positions 70
NOTE: Four of the 70 positions are available for the
storage of onboard vial racks.
Related information...
System capacities, page 397
Bulk solutions:
• Pre-Trigger Solution 975 mL
• Trigger Solution 975 mL
• Concentrated Wash Buffer 2L
Bulk solution reservoirs:
• Pre-Trigger Solution reservoir 1L
• Trigger Solution reservoir 1L
• Concentrated Wash Buffer reservoir 2L
• Diluted wash buffer reservoir 4L
Biohazard bag size 5 gal
39.37 cm (15.5 in.) x 57.15 cm (22.5 in.)
Process path positions 46
Pretreatment path positions 61
Reagent carousel positions 47
Reaction vessel (RV):
• Total volume 1000 µL
• Maximum reaction mixture volume 400 µL
RV hopper 1200 RVs
Solid waste:
• Container capacity 1000 RVs
5 h of run time at 200 RVs/h
• Waste chute capacity • 50 RVs before system operation is paused
• 208 RVs total capacity
30 min of run time when the waste container is
removed during assay processing
Related information...
System capacities, page 397
Related information...
System capacities, page 397
Physical specifications
The approximate physical specifications for the Alinity ci-series are described in the table for the
following configurations:
Each additional Includes the specifications for one processing module (Alinity
processing module c or Alinity i)
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
System clearances
Table 16: System clearances
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
General requirements, page 712
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
System control module (SCM) electrical specifications and requirements, page 404
Processing module electrical specifications and requirements (c-series), page 404
Processing module electrical specifications and requirements (i-series), page 405
AC power:*
• Voltage 90 VAC to 264 VAC
• Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Circuit breaker that can be reset 20 A
NOTE: If an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) is
used with the system, see the UPS manufacturer
specifications.
Outlet (1):
• North America (twistlock) NEMA L6-20R (240 VAC, 20 A)
• North America (twistlock) NEMA L5-20R (120 VAC, 20 A)
• North America NEMA 5-20R (120 VAC, 20 A)
• Universal IEC 60309 (IP44 Blue) 2P 3W (250 VAC, 16/20 A)
* If an UPS is used, the UPS must meet the voltage, frequency, and power consumption
requirements of the SCM. It is recommended that the UPS be approved for safety by a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL or TUV. In addition, it is
recommended that the UPS meets the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements in IEC
62040-2.
Related information...
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 403
Environmental specifications and requirements, page 408
AC power:*
• Voltage 180 VAC to 264 VAC
• Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Circuit breaker that can be reset 20 A
* If an UPS is used, the UPS must meet the voltage, frequency, and power consumption
requirements of the c-series. It is recommended that the UPS be approved for safety by a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL or TUV. In addition, it is
recommended that the UPS meets the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements in IEC
62040-2.
Related information...
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 403
Environmental specifications and requirements, page 408
AC power:*
• Voltage 180 VAC to 264 VAC
• Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Circuit breaker that can be reset 30 A
NOTE: If an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) is
used with the system, see the UPS manufacturer
specifications.
Outlet (1):
* If an UPS is used, the UPS must meet the voltage, frequency, and power consumption
requirements of the i-series. It is recommended that the UPS be approved for safety by a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL or TUV. In addition, it is
recommended that the UPS meets the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements in IEC
62040-2.
Related information...
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 403
Environmental specifications and requirements, page 408
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
For additional characteristics that are specific to a processing module, see the appropriate
module type.
Water quality:
• Maximum microbial contamination ≤ 1000 colony-forming units per mL
• Minimum resistivity 1 MΩ/cm at 25°C (77°F)
• Pressure (at the system control module) 10 psi to 90 psi
IMPORTANT: Do not process samples when
maintenance is performed on the purified
water system. After maintenance is
completed, ensure that the pressure is within
specifications.
• Temperature 15°C (59°F) to 37°C (98.6°F)
Liquid waste configuration (system control Maximum of 2 gravity-fed waste tubes and
module) 2 pressure waste tubes
Drainage port:
• Location Within 3 m (9.5 ft) from the rear of the system
• Height • c-series ≤ 10 cm (4 in.) above floor level
• i-series ≤ 50.8 cm (20 in.) above floor level
NOTE: If the drainage port specifications are not NOTE: In a multimodule system, use the
met or if the drain is located in a sink or is specifications for the most restrictive processing
otherwise elevated, the external waste pump module type.
(optional accessory) must be used.
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
Processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements (c-series), page 407
Processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements (i-series), page 408
Processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements (c-series)
Table 22: Processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements (c-
series)
Related information...
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements , page 406
Processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements (i-series)
Table 23: Processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements (i-
series)
Related information...
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements , page 406
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
System control module (SCM) electrical specifications and requirements, page 404
Processing module electrical specifications and requirements (c-series), page 404
Processing module electrical specifications and requirements (i-series), page 405
Operator interface:
• Monitor LCD (minimum 21 in.)
Speakers are included in the monitor.
• Touchscreen Standard DVI or higher connection including a USB
connector
• Keyboard Not provided. If a keyboard is provided by the user,
the keyboard needs to have a USB connection.
• Mouse Not provided. If a mouse is provided by the user, the
mouse needs to use optical movement technology
with a USB connection.
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
External waste pump general specifications, page 411
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements, page 411
External waste pump clearances, page 412
Related information...
External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 410
AC power:
• North America • Voltage: 104 VAC to 126 VAC
• Frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
• International • Voltage: 207 VAC to 253 VAC
• Frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Related information...
External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 410
External waste pump, page 123
Related information...
External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 410
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
1D reagent bar code label requirements (c-series), page 412
Sample bar code label requirements, page 416
Related information...
Bar code label requirements, page 412
1D reagent bar code label guidelines (c-series), page 412
1D reagent bar code label data format (c-series), page 414
1D reagent bar code label placement (c-series), page 415
Component Description
Printer type Use a printer with a minimum resolution of 300 dots per inch (DPI). The
appropriate maintenance of a bar code printer is essential.
Component Description
NOTE: Laser and ink-jet printers with resolutions that are less than
300 DPI and dot-matrix printers are not recommended to produce
acceptable labels.
Label stock Use a good-quality, white label stock. The black ink used for bar codes
must be compatible with the label stock used for bar codes.
Printed labels must be clean and dry when they are presented to a bar
code reader.
NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the background label must be
the maximum contrast that is possible. For help with increasing the
contrast, contact the bar code label supplier. If the use of color on the
label is needed, a color band may be used outside the bar code portion
of the label. For optimal performance, use only black bars on a white
background for the bar code portion of the label.
When labels are printed, the system software provides the following
Avery label templates:
• 5520
• L4773
• L7060
Bar code print quality Use labels with an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) grade of
A, B, or C.
Label print quality is an important factor that affects the functionality of
the bar code reader to correctly decode label information. The
performance of the bar code reader can be enhanced by using labels
with an ANSI grade of A, B, or C. Although bar code labels with ANSI
grades lower than C can provide valid reads, the number of no reads is
higher and the possibility of misreads is increased.
NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, Guideline for Bar Code Print Quality,
provides a standardized methodology to measure and grade bar code
print quality. As a usual practice, evaluate all bar code labels according
to this methodology. For help with grading the labels, contact the bar
code label supplier or the print supplier. In addition, commercially
available verifier systems can perform these evaluations.
Related information...
1D reagent bar code label requirements (c-series), page 412
Digit Description
1 to 6 Reagent name: A unique six-digit alphanumeric entry is assigned to the reagent.
NOTE: The reagent name (digits 1 to 6) of the 1D reagent bar code label must be
identical to the name of the corresponding user-defined reagent.
7 to 10 Serial number: A four-digit numeric entry identifies the unique serial number of the
reagent cartridge.
Range: 0000-9999
NOTE: Each cartridge in one lot of reagent must have a unique numeric identifier.
11 to 15 Lot number: A five-digit alphanumeric entry identifies the unique lot number of the
reagent cartridge.
NOTE: The system software creates lot and serial number data for the reagent
cartridge from digits 1 through 6 of the reagent name, digits 11 through 13 of the
reagent lot number, and digits 7 through 10 of the reagent serial number. In the
system software, alpha characters that are used in lot numbers are not case
sensitive.
16 Expiration year: The one-digit numeric entry identifies the year that the reagent
expires.
Range: 0-9
The selection represents the last digit of the year. The range is then interpreted as
1 year before the selection and 8 years in the future. For example, if the current
year is 2003, the following information is applicable:
• A bar code entry of 3 represents an expiration year of 2003.
• A bar code entry of 2 represents an expiration year of 2002.
• A bar code entry of 1 represents an expiration year of 2011.
• A bar code entry of 0 represents an expiration year of 2010.
17 to 18 Expiration week: The two-digit numeric entry identifies the day of the year that the
reagent expires.
Range: 00-52
Examples:
• 00 = Expires at the end of the 7th day of the year
• 01 = Expires at the end of the 14th day of the year
• 51 = Expires at the end of the 364th day of the year
• 52 = Expires at the end of the last day of the year
NOTE: If a value greater than 52 is entered, the reagent expiration is not tracked.
Related information...
1D reagent bar code label requirements (c-series), page 412
Orientation With the handle of the reagent cartridge facing to the right side of the
cartridge, the label can be affixed to the R1 reagent bottle. The R1
reagent bottle is the larger bottle and is positioned leftmost in the
cartridge. The printed bars of the label must be vertically oriented.
Placement The top edge of the label must be aligned with the cartridge transport
tab. The left edge of the label must be aligned with the left edge of the
R1 reagent bottle.
Vertical angle The vertical angle of the label must be ±5 degrees.
When the label is not as vertically straight as possible, the bar code
reader may not locate the required quiet zones and the start and stop
characters.
Figure 121: Correct placement of the 1D reagent bar code label (c-series)
Related information...
1D reagent bar code label requirements (c-series), page 412
Print a 1D reagent bar code report (c-series), page 555
Related information...
Bar code label requirements, page 412
Sample bar code label guidelines, page 417
SID length, page 418
Sample bar code label placement, page 418
Sample management, page 562
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Component Description
Printer type Use a printer with a minimum resolution of 300 dots per inch (DPI). The
appropriate maintenance of a bar code printer is essential.
NOTE: Laser and ink-jet printers with resolutions that are less than
300 DPI and dot-matrix printers are not recommended to produce
acceptable labels.
Printers with resolutions that are less than 600 DPI are not recommended
to produce labels that have a 5.0 mil density (narrow bar width).
Label stock Use a good-quality, white label stock. The black ink used for bar codes
must be compatible with the label stock used for bar codes.
Printed labels must be clean and dry when they are presented to a bar
code reader.
NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the background label must be
the maximum contrast that is possible. For help with increasing the
contrast, contact the bar code label supplier. If the use of color on the
label is needed, a color band may be used outside the bar code portion
of the label. For optimal performance, use only black bars on a white
background for the bar code portion of the label.
Bar code print quality Use labels with an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) grade of
A, B, or C.
Label print quality is an important factor that affects the functionality of
the bar code reader to correctly decode label information. The
performance of the bar code reader can be enhanced by using labels
with an ANSI grade of A, B, or C. Although bar code labels with ANSI
grades lower than C can provide valid reads, the number of no reads is
higher and the possibility of misreads is increased.
NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, Guideline for Bar Code Print Quality,
provides a standardized methodology to measure and grade bar code
print quality. As a usual practice, evaluate all bar code labels according
to this methodology. For help with grading the labels, contact the bar
code label supplier or the printer supplier. In addition, commercially
available verifier systems can perform these evaluations.
Component Description
The quiet zone is the distance from the top edge of the label to the first
black bar and from the last black bar to the bottom edge of the label.
Density Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 5.0 mil (0.127 mm or 0.005 in.).
Ratio (wide to narrow bar) Minimum ratio: 2:1
Maximum ratio: 3:1
Sample bar code label length Generally, a 51 mm label fits a 75 mm sample tube and a 76 mm label
fits a 100 mm sample tube.
Related information...
Sample bar code label requirements, page 416
Change sample bar code settings , page 185
SID length
The following factors affect the number of characters that can fit on a sample bar code label:
• Sample bar code label length
• Sample bar code label placement
• Symbology
• Density
• Ratio
• Quiet zone
A maximum of 20 characters are permitted on the sample bar code label. However, the
maximum number of readable characters may be less than 20 for some symbologies because of
the overall label length, the narrow bar width, and the ratio.
If a checksum function is enabled when a bar code label (Code 39, Codabar, or Interleaved 2 of
5) is printed, a checksum character is added to the label. The checksum character is usually
added after the last character on the right side of the label and on the left side of the stop
character. The operator-readable portion of the label may or may not display the checksum
character. When a checksum function is used on an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label, use a
minimum of four characters.
Related information...
Sample bar code label requirements, page 416
Orientation The label must be perpendicular to the axis of the tube and must be
affixed to the tube in a ladder orientation where the printed bars are
horizontal.
Placement:
• Top • The label must not exceed the top of the tube.
• Bottom • The label must be a minimum of 8 mm from the bottom of the tube.
This placement ensures that the entire label is visible to the bar code
reader when the tube is placed into a sample rack.
Vertical angle The vertical angle of the label must be ±5 degrees.
When the label is not as vertically straight as possible, the bar code
reader may not locate the required quiet zones and the start and stop
characters.
Legend:
1. Placement is too low
2. Placement exceeds vertical angle
3. Edges that are peeled loose
4. Clear tape over the label
5. Flap that extends from the label
Related information...
Sample bar code label requirements, page 416
Related information...
Specifications and requirements, page 394
Sample cup and tube specifications and requirements, page 421
Sample volume requirements, page 423
Figure 125: Alinity ci-series sample cups used with sample tubes
Measurement Limits
1. Height • Nominal: 75 mm to 100 mm
• Extreme: 72 mm to 102 mm
2. Outside diameter • Nominal: 10 mm to 13 mm
• Extreme: Maximum of 13.2 mm
3. Inside diameter • Nominal: NA
• Extreme: Minimum of 7.75 mm
NOTE: The use of serum filters in sample tubes is acceptable if the filter opening (inside
diameter) and the filter height meet the sample tube specifications.
Related information...
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
• If the minimum sample cup volume is less than 150 μL, the sample must be priority loaded
to avoid concentration effects because of sample evaporation. If the sample is not priority
loaded, a minimum volume of 150 μL is necessary to test the sample.
• To ensure accurate liquid level detection, do not fill the sample cups above the 1400 μL
graduation mark.
• The reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if an adequate sample volume is not
used.
• Ensure that the sample volume is adequate so that retesting can be performed if the
samples are loaded on the reagent and sample manager (RSM) and the RSM is configured
to reposition the samples automatically for retesting.
Sample cup:
IMPORTANT: Sample cups cannot be used with
whole blood samples on a c-series because of the
potential for sample probe damage.
• c-series 50 μL (sample cup dead volume) + 8 μL
(overaspiration volume) + Combined sample volume
of the ordered assays and replicates
NOTE: The overaspiration volume in the sample
probe is dispensed into the wash cup after the
sample is pipetted for an assay that requires an
onboard dilution or has a sample volume that is
greater than 15 μL. Therefore, each time this action
occurs, an additional 8 μL overaspiration volume is
aspirated from the sample for the next assay.
• i-series 50 μL (sample cup dead volume) + Combined
sample volume of the ordered assays and replicates
Aliquot tube volumes The minimum sample volume must not be less than
8 mm from the bottom of the tube.
Primary tube volumes The minimum sample volume must not be less than
8 mm above the separation point (clot, gel
separator, or plasma or red cell interface) to
prevent contamination of the sample during
aspiration.
Primary tube volumes (whole blood) The maximum sample volume must not be more
than 78 mm above the bottom of the sample tube.
Related information...
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
Requirements for handling the specimens, page 716
Related information...
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
NOTES
Introduction
This section provides instructions on how to perform normal operating procedures on the Alinity
ci-series.
Before operating the system, become familiar with hardware components of the system and with
fundamental principles of the user interface.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Log On screen, page 454
Notepad flyout, page 458
Home screen, page 463
Consumable inventory management, page 500
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Specimen, calibration, and control orders, page 578
Results screen, page 616
Quality control analysis, page 637
Print flyout, page 658
Search flyout, page 664
Archive flyout, page 666
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Use or function, page 47
Calibration procedures, page 673
Mechanical hazards, page 735
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Cycle power to the system, page 428
Cycle power to the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 432
Power on the processing module, page 436
Power off the processing module, page 440
Power on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 444
Power off the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 446
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
Pause the processing module, page 447
Pause the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 448
Stop the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 449
Perform an emergency shutdown, page 449
Long-term shutdown (i-series), page 452
NOTE: The instrument status for each processing module and the RSM must be one of the
required statuses to ensure that sample processing is not interrupted.
Perform this procedure to cycle power to the system control module (SCM), the RSM, and one
or more processing modules to reestablish communication among the system components, to
store configuration information, or to troubleshoot the system.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the Home screen, tap Shutdown.
3. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
The user interface (UI) computer powers off when the system software completes the
shutdown.
4. Open the SCM front door.
5. Move the SCM power switch downward.
NOTE: When the SCM power switch is turned off, the power is turned off to the RSM for all
processing modules in a multimodule system.
6. Open the front electronics door of each Alinity c processing module in the system.
7. Locate the power switch for each Alinity c processing module.
8. Locate the main power breaker for each Alinity i processing module.
9. Move the power switch downward to power off each Alinity c processing module.
Power off the main power breaker of each Alinity i processing module.
10. Ensure that each processing module remains powered off for 1 minute.
11. Power on the UI computer.
12. Wait for the Log On screen to display on the UI computer.
13. Move the SCM power switch upward to power on the RSM and the SCM bar code scanner.
14. Move the power switch upward to power on each Alinity c processing module.
Power on the main power breaker of each Alinity i processing module.
NOTE: After the power is turned on, the RSM and the processing modules initialize and the
instrument statuses transition to Stopped.
15. Log on to the system software.
16. To transition the instrument statuses to Idle, start the RSM and each processing module.
17. Close the front electronics door of each Alinity c processing module.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Log on, page 457
Cycle power to the processing module and the reagent and sample
manager (RSM)
Required instrument • Processing module: Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Idle
status
• Reagent and sample manager (RSM): Offline, Stopped,
or Idle
NOTE: The instrument status for each processing module and the RSM must be one of the
required statuses to ensure that sample processing is not interrupted.
Perform this procedure to cycle power to the RSM and one or more processing modules to
reestablish communication with the system control module (SCM), to store configuration
information, or to troubleshoot the system.
1. Open the SCM front door.
2. Move the SCM power switch downward.
NOTE: When the SCM power switch is turned off, the power is turned off to the RSM for
each processing module in a multimodule system and for the SCM bar code scanner.
3. Open the front electronics door of one or more of the processing modules.
4. Locate the processing module power switch for one or more of the processing modules.
5. Move the processing module power switch downward to power off one or more of the
processing modules.
6. Ensure that each processing module remains powered off for 1 minute.
7. Move the SCM power switch upward to power on the RSM and the SCM bar code scanner.
8. Move the processing module power switch upward to power on one or more of the
processing modules.
NOTE: After the power is turned on, the RSM and one or more of the processing modules
initialize and the instrument statuses transition to Stopped.
9. To transition the instrument statuses to Idle, start the RSM and one or more of the
processing modules.
10. Close the front electronics door of one or more of the processing modules.
11. Close the SCM front door.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Restore a backup (CSC Logon), page 327
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
2. If the main power breaker of the processing module is off, move the breaker to the ON/I
position.
3. Open the front electronics door of the processing module.
4. Locate the power switch of the processing module.
5. If the power switch of the processing module is off, move the switch upward to power on the
processing module.
NOTE: After the power is turned on, the processing module initializes and the instrument
status transitions to Stopped.
6. To transition the instrument status to Idle, start the processing module.
7. Close the front electronics door of the processing module.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
NOTE: The instrument status for each processing module must be one of the required statuses
to ensure that sample processing is not interrupted.
Perform this procedure to power off one or more processing modules during component
replacement or troubleshooting.
NOTE: If only the front power switch of a processing module is off, the reagent carousel power
is maintained. To turn off all power to the processing module, move the main power breaker of
the module to the off position.
1. Open the front electronics door of the processing module.
2. Locate the power switch of the processing module.
Figure 135: Alinity c processing module power switch
3. Move the processing module power switch downward to power off the processing module.
NOTE: To power off all processing modules in a multimodule system, the power must be
turned off separately for each module.
4. To turn off all power to the processing module, perform steps 5 and 6.
If the reagent carousel power does not need to be turned off, proceed to step 7.
5. Locate the main power breaker of the processing module.
6. Move the main power breaker of the processing module to the OFF/O position to turn off all
power to the processing module.
7. Let the processing module power remain off for a minimum of 1 minute before the power is
turned on again.
8. Close the front electronics door of the processing module.
To power off the Alinity i processing module for more than 7 days, perform a long-term
shutdown.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Perform this procedure to power on the reagent and sample manager (RSM).
NOTE: The SCM power switch provides power to the RSM.
1. Open the SCM front door.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager
(RSM)
Required instrument Stopped or Idle
status
Perform this procedure to complete the following tasks:
• Initialize a processing module or the reagent and sample manager (RSM) and transition the
instrument status from Stopped to Idle.
• Reinitialize a processing module or the RSM when the instrument status is Idle.
• Prepare for sample processing.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Cycle power to the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 432
Power on the processing module, page 436
Power on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 444
Replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash Buffer
(i-series), page 906
Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series), page 909
Empty the bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), page 1297
Empty the diluted wash buffer reservoir (i-series), page 1301
Remove racks from the sample positioners, page 1305
NOTE: When the processing module is paused, the instrument status of the module transitions to
Pausing. Then, the processing module performs the following steps:
• Completes the aspiration for the test in process (i-series).
• Completes the aspiration for each test for the sample in process (c-series).
• Returns the sample rack to the reagent and sample manager.
• Transitions to Idle status. All scheduled tests remain as scheduled until the instrument status
of the processing module transitions to Idle. After the processing module transitions to Idle
status, all scheduled tests become exceptions.
The instrument status of the processing module transitions to Idle unless the Run button is
selected to initiate a run before the status transitions.
NOTE: Do not lift a front or rear processing center cover before the instrument status of the
processing module transitions to Idle.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
NOTE: When the RSM is paused, the instrument status of the RSM transitions to Pausing.
The processing module completes sample aspiration for all scheduled tests and the RSM
returns the racks to their original locations. Scheduled loading and unloading of reagent
cartridges are completed. The instrument status of the RSM transitions to Idle unless the
Run button is selected to initiate a run before the status transitions.
NOTE: Do not lift a front processing center cover before the instrument status of the processing
module transitions to Idle.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Stop the processing module and the reagent and sample manager
(RSM)
Required instrument Running, Processing, or Idle
status
Perform this procedure to transition the instrument status of the system from Running,
Processing, or Idle to Stopped.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the Home screen, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap one or more of the processing modules or the RSM.
– Tap one or more of the processing modules and the RSM.
3. Tap Stop.
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Related information...
System cycle power, start, pause, and stop, page 428
Log On screen
On the Log On screen, the operator can view the following information:
• System information
• Status information
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Log On screen element descriptions, page 454
Log on, page 457
Lock the user interface, page 457
Descriptions of access levels, page 158
Elements
Log On area
Used to enter an operator ID and a four-digit numeric pin to log on to the system. The system
has three types of access levels: General, Supervisor, and Administrator.
Time of Completion Displays the completion time for the last test in process on
the system.
Total Samples Displays the total number of samples that have a status of
Scheduled, Running, or In Process.
Orders Pending Displays the number of test orders that have a status of
Pending, Scheduled, Running, or In Process.
Exceptions Displays the number of exceptions that have not been rerun
or released. The number is displayed in red text.
Displays badges to indicate the statuses of instruments, reagents, and supplies for all system
modules.
Instrument Status Displays the overall instrument status for all system modules.
icon The instrument status is indicated by the following badges:
Reagent Status icon Displays the overall reagent status for all system modules.
The status of reagents loaded on the system is indicated by
the following badges:
Supply Status icon Displays the overall status of supplies for all system
processing modules. The status of the supplies is indicated by
the following badges:
Function buttons
Related information...
Log On screen, page 454
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Log on
Perform this procedure to log on to the Alinity ci-series.
1. If the Log On screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.
If any other screen is displayed, tap the Lock button .
2. Tap an operator logon button.
If the appropriate operator logon button is not displayed, perform the following steps:
a. Tap the Plus button .
b. Type the operator ID.
c. Tap the + Done button.
3. To display the Home screen, tap the four-digit PIN for the operator ID.
Related information...
Log On screen, page 454
Cycle power to the system, page 428
Related information...
Log On screen, page 454
Notepad flyout
The Notepad feature allows operators to document information that is posted to each user
account. For example, notes can be created to provide the instrument status, the status of
sample processing, or laboratory procedures and guidelines. Pinned notes cannot be deleted
from the personal view of an operator. The maximum number of notes displayed for all operators
is 99.
In the Notepad flyout, the operator can view all notes.
The operator can perform the following functions:
• Create a note.
• Add a comment to a note.
• Delete notes from the personal view of the operator.
• Pin or unpin notes that the operator created.
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
View a note, page 458
Create a note, page 459
Pin or unpin a note, page 459
Edit a note, page 460
Add a comment to a note, page 461
Delete a note, page 461
Delete all unpinned notes, page 462
View a note
Perform this procedure to view a note. A blue dot indicates a note or comment that has not been
read.
1. On the screen header, tap Notepad.
2. In the list of notes in the Notepad flyout, tap a note to view.
Notes are displayed in the following order:
a. Pinned notes and comments that have not been read
b. Unpinned notes and comments that have not been read
c. Pinned notes and comments that have been read
d. Unpinned notes and comments that have been read
NOTE: To filter the list by the author of the original note, tap an author in the Author drop-
down list.
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
Create a note
Perform this procedure to create a note that is displayed to all operators when they are logged
on the system. For example, notes can be created to provide the instrument status, the status of
sample processing, or laboratory procedures and guidelines.
1. On the screen header, tap Notepad.
2. In the Notepad flyout, tap Add Note.
3. In the Add Note flyout, tap the Title box and type the title of the note.
4. Tap the Note box and type the note.
NOTE: The author of a note can edit the note until a comment is added to the note. After a
comment has been added, the note cannot be edited.
5. To save the note, tap Done.
To delete the note, tap Cancel. When the confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
6. To create a new note, repeat steps 2, page 459 through 5, page 459.
7. To close the Notepad flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
Perform this procedure to pin a note so that the note cannot be deleted by other operators from
their personal views or to unpin a note so that the note can be deleted.
1. On the screen header, tap Notepad.
2. In the list of notes in the Notepad flyout, tap a note to pin.
Notes are displayed in the following order:
a. Pinned notes and comments that have not been read
b. Unpinned notes and comments that have not been read
NOTE: To filter the list by the author of the original note, tap an author in the Author drop-
down list.
3. To pin a note, tap Pin.
To unpin a note, tap Unpin.
4. To pin or unpin additional notes, repeat steps 2, page 459 and 3, page 460.
5. To close the Notepad flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
Edit a note
Perform this procedure to edit a note. The author of a note can edit the note until a comment is
added to the note. After a comment has been added, the note cannot be edited.
1. On the screen header, tap Notepad.
2. In the list of notes in the Notepad flyout, tap a note to edit.
Notes are displayed in the following order:
a. Pinned notes and comments that have not been read
b. Unpinned notes and comments that have not been read
c. Pinned notes and comments that have been read
d. Unpinned notes and comments that have been read
NOTE: To filter the list by the author of the original note, tap an author in the Author drop-
down list.
3. In the note box, tap Tap to Edit.
4. Edit the note.
5. To save the edits to the note, tap Save.
To delete the edits to the note, tap Cancel.
6. To edit a different note, repeat steps 2, page 460 through 5, page 460.
7. To close the Notepad flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
NOTE: To filter the list by the author of the original note, tap an author in the Author drop-
down list.
3. Tap Add Comment.
4. In the Comment box in the Add Comment flyout, type a comment.
5. To save the comment, tap Done.
To delete the comment, tap Cancel. When the confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
6. To add a comment to a different note, repeat steps 2, page 461 through 5, page 461.
7. To close the Notepad flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
Delete a note
Operator access level • System administrator: Deletes pinned notes from the
views of all operators
• Operator: Deletes pinned notes, which were created by
the operator, from the views of all operators and deletes
unpinned notes from the view of the operator
Perform this procedure to delete pinned and unpinned notes. Unpinned notes are deleted from
the view of the operator. Pinned notes are deleted from the views of all operators.
1. On the screen header, tap Notepad.
NOTE: To filter the list by the author of the original note, tap an author in the Author drop-
down list.
3. Tap Delete.
4. To delete an additional note, repeat steps 2, page 462 and 3, page 462.
5. To close the Notepad flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
Related information...
Notepad flyout, page 458
Home screen
On the Home screen, the operator can view the following information:
• System information and module status information
• System conditions and module conditions that require an operator response
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Home screen element descriptions, page 464
Host Connection Status flyout, page 472
Printer Status/Queue flyout, page 475
Alinity PRO Connection Status flyout, page 477
AbbottLink Connection Status flyout, page 478
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Instrument statuses, page 496
Menu bar
Alert Center - Alert The red triangle (alert badge) navigates to the Alerts tab in
badge the Alert Center flyout. The number of alert messages in the
Alert Center is displayed next to the alert badge. Alerts are
generated for system problems that require immediate
attention.
Sample Status icon Navigates to the All Samples tab on the Sample Status
screen.
Orders icon Navigates to the All Orders tab on the Orders screen.
Results icon Navigates to one of the following tabs on the Results screen:
• Unreleased tab when no badge is present and the system
is configured for manual or hold release of specimen
results.
• Specimen tab when no badge is present and the system
is configured for automatic release of specimen results.
• Exception tab when an amber badge is present,
indicating that one or more test exceptions have been
generated.
Create Order icon Navigates to the Specimen tab on the Create Order screen.
Screen header
Home/System name Displays the screen title and the configured system name.
? Help button Displays Help from the operations manual for the active
screen.
Notepad button Displays the Notepad flyout. A notification badge showing the
number of unread notes is displayed on the Notepad button
when a note for the logged-on operator has not been viewed.
The badge is removed after all unread notes have been
viewed.
Lock button Locks the screen and displays the Log On screen. The
operator must enter a user name and password to unlock the
screen.
Logged on Displays the user name of the operator logged on the system.
Abbott A symbol Displays the Print to File dialog box. The operator can print
the screen to a file or a configured printer.
Host button Displays the Host Connection Status flyout. The button is
displayed only when the system is configured for the host
system. The status of the host communication is indicated by
the following button colors:
Alinity PRO button Displays the Alinity PRO Connection Status flyout. The button
is displayed only when the system is configured for an Alinity
PRO interface. The status of the Alinity PRO connection is
indicated by the following button colors:
AbbottLink button Displays the AbbottLink Connection Status flyout. The button
is displayed only when the system is configured for
AbbottLink. The status of the AbbottLink communication is
indicated by the following button colors:
Mail button Navigates to the All tab on the Abbott Mail Inbox screen. The
button is displayed only when the system is configured for
AbbottLink. A badge displays the number of new mail items
received since the last time the Abbott Mail Inbox was viewed.
Information area
RSM image Displays the RSM, the RSM name (if configured), and the
current status for the RSM.
Processing module Displays the module type, the module name (if configured),
image the module number, and the current status of the processing
module. A separate image is displayed for each processing
module on the system. The following status updates are
displayed on the processing module image:
• Instrument Status
• Reagent Status
• Supply Status
• QC Status
• Calibration Status
• Maintenance
• Tests In Progress
Instrument Status Displays the current status of the RSM and individual
button processing modules. The instrument status is indicated by the
following colors:
NOTE: The Processing status and the Warming status are not
displayed for the RSM.
Reagent Status button Navigates to the Current tab on the Reagent Status screen
for the module selected. The status of reagents loaded in the
reagent carousel and loading area of the RSM is indicated by
the following colors:
Supply Status button Navigates to the Supplies screen for the module selected.
The status of supplies loaded on the system is indicated by
the following colors:
QC Status button Navigates to the Quality Control Summary screen. The status
of the quality control is indicated by the following colors:
Calibration Status Navigates to the Current tab on the Calibration Status screen
button for the module selected. The status of current assay
calibrations is indicated by the following colors:
Orders Pending Displays the number of test orders with a status of Pending,
Scheduled, Running, or In Process. Navigates to the All
Orders tab on the Orders screen.
Orders button Navigates to the All Orders tab on the Orders screen.
Function buttons
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Instrument statuses, page 496
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
Host Connection Status flyout element descriptions, page 473
Elements
Connection Status Displays the current connection status for the host
communication interface: Enabled, Disabled, Disabled and
Query Suspended.
Function buttons
Clear Queue Removes all messages pending transmission to the host. The
button is unavailable until messages are waiting to be
transmitted.
Related information...
Host Connection Status flyout, page 472
Related information...
Host Connection Status flyout, page 472
Perform this procedure to clear all queued messages (including results) that are pending
transmission to the host.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the System Status bar of the Home screen, tap Host.
3. In the Host Connection Status flyout, tap Clear Queue.
4. To close the Host Connection Status flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Host Connection Status flyout, page 472
User interface (UI) computer corrective action procedures, page 1306
Related information...
Host Connection Status flyout, page 472
User interface (UI) computer corrective action procedures, page 1306
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
Printer Status/Queue flyout element descriptions, page 475
View a print job in the printer queue, page 476
Delete a print job, page 476
Elements
Printer Status Displays one of the following statuses for the printer: OK or
Error.
Number of Printer Displays the number of print requests in the printer queue. A
Jobs maximum of 10 printer jobs are allowed in the queue. Print
requests are performed in the order in which they are
received.
Print Queue Displays information about individual jobs in the printer queue.
Status Displays one of the following statuses for the print request:
Queued, Printing, Error, Deleting, or Out of Paper.
Date Displays the date and time that the print request was
submitted to the printer queue.
Pages Displays the number of pages for the document in the printer
queue.
Function buttons
Delete All Deletes all print requests from the printer queue.
Delete Selected Deletes selected print requests from the printer queue.
Related information...
Printer Status/Queue flyout, page 475
Related information...
Printer Status/Queue flyout, page 475
– To delete all print jobs in the printer queue, tap Delete All.
4. To close the Printer Status/Queue flyout, tap Done.
Related information...
Printer Status/Queue flyout, page 475
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
Alinity PRO Connection Status flyout element descriptions, page 477
Elements
Last Update Displays the date and time of the last connection status
update.
Function buttons
Related information...
Alinity PRO Connection Status flyout, page 477
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
AbbottLink Connection Status flyout element descriptions, page 478
Restart AbbottLink, page 478
Elements
Last Updated Displays the date and time of the last connection status
update.
Function buttons
Related information...
AbbottLink Connection Status flyout, page 478
Restart AbbottLink
Perform this procedure to restart the AbbottLink software on the user interface computer.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the System Status bar of the Home screen, tap AbbottLink.
3. In the AbbottLink Connection Status flyout, tap Restart.
The AbbottLink software stops and restarts.
Related information...
AbbottLink Connection Status flyout, page 478
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, All tab element descriptions, page 480
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Assay Files tab element descriptions, page 481
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Assay Inserts tab element descriptions, page 482
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, System Updates tab element descriptions , page 483
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Calibrator Data tab element descriptions (c-series), page 484
Manual File Request screen, page 486
Assay file mail description, page 489
Assay insert mail description, page 489
System update mail description, page 490
Calibrator data mail description (c-series), page 490
Descriptions of mail statuses, page 491
Descriptions of view statuses, page 491
View Abbott Mail items, page 491
View or print Abbott Mail documentation, page 492
Accept Abbott Mail items, page 492
Delete Abbott Mail items, page 493
Manually request assay files, page 493
Manually request calibrator data files, page 494
Decline Abbott Mail system updates, page 495
Print a report, page 662
Elements
View Status Displays a status to show whether the mail is new or has been
viewed. The mail item displays one of the following statuses:
New or Viewed.
Mail Status Displays the status of each item in the Abbott Mail Inbox. The
mail item displays one of the following statues:
• New
• Update
• Error
Category Displays the type of mail item in the Abbott Mail Inbox. The
mail item is associated with one of the following four
categories:
• Assay Files
• Assay Inserts
• System Updates
• Calibrator Data
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the mail item was received.
Revision Displays the version of the document for mail items with
revisions.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Accept Used to remove assay inserts from the Abbott Mail Inbox or to
make selected mail items available for installation or import.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
View Status Displays a status to show whether the mail is new or has been
viewed. The mail item displays one of the following statuses:
New or Viewed.
Mail Status Displays the status of each item in the Abbott Mail Inbox. The
mail item displays one of the following statues:
• New
• Update
• Error
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the mail item was received.
List Number Displays the list number associated with the assay file.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Accept Used to make the selected mail item available for installation.
Assay files with a version number less than or equal to the
installed assay file or a version currently available to install
are not available for installation.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
View Status Displays a status to show whether the mail is new or has been
viewed. The mail item displays one of the following statuses:
New or Viewed.
Mail Status Displays the status of each item in the Abbott Mail Inbox. The
mail item displays one of the following statuses:
• New
• Update
• Error
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the mail item was received.
Commodity Number Displays the commodity number assigned to the assay insert.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Accept Used to set the assay insert status to Current on the Reagent
Cartridge Details screen and removes the mail item from the
Abbott Mail Inbox.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
View Status Displays a status to show whether the mail is new or has been
viewed. The mail item displays one of the following statuses:
New or Viewed.
Mail Status Displays the status of each item in the Abbott Mail Inbox. The
mail item displays one of the following statues:
• New
• Update
• Error
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the mail item was received.
TSB Number Displays the technical service bulletin (TSB) number for the
mail item.
Priority Displays the priority level of the TSB. The mail item displays
one of the following statuses: Mandatory or Optional.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Calibrator Data tab element descriptions (c-series)
The Calibrator Data tab displays the new and viewed calibrator data mail items received in the
Abbott Mail Inbox.
Elements
View Status Displays a status to show whether the mail is new or has been
viewed. The mail item displays one of the following statuses:
New or Viewed.
Mail Status Displays the status of each item in the Abbott Mail Inbox. The
mail item displays one of the following statues:
• New
• Update
• Error
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the mail item was received.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Accept Used to make the selected mail calibrator data item available
for import.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Manual File Request screen, Assay Files tab element descriptions, page 486
Manual File Request screen, Calibrator Data tab element descriptions (c-series), page 487
Requested Categories flyout element descriptions, page 488
Descriptions of assay file request statuses, page 489
Manually request assay files, page 493
Elements
Request Status Displays information about the status of the manual file
request. A maximum of five manual file requests are
displayed.
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the assay file was requested,
timed out, or was completed.
Items Requested Displays the list of assay categories that was requested. If
one category is selected, the name of the category is
displayed. If multiple assay categories are selected, the
number of categories selected is displayed.
Message Displays more information about the status of the manual file
request.
Function buttons
Request Assay Used to request assay file downloads for the selected assay
categories.
Related information...
Manual File Request screen, page 486
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Manual File Request screen, Calibrator Data tab element descriptions (c-series)
On the Calibrator Data tab, the operator can manually request the clinical chemistry calibrator
value assignment data to be downloaded.
Elements
Request Status Displays information about the status of the manual file
request. A maximum of five manual file requests are
displayed.
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the file was requested, timed
out, or was completed.
Message Displays more information about the status of the manual file
request. Displays the number of calibrator data files that were
downloaded or the number of file errors if applicable.
Function buttons
Related information...
Manual File Request screen, page 486
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Function buttons
Related information...
Manual File Request screen, page 486
Expired The request was not received within the 24-hour time-out.
Related information...
Manual File Request screen, page 486
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Manually request assay files, page 493
request a new assay insert through an AbbottLink connection. AbbottLink determines if the new
reagent lot requires a new assay insert.
If a new assay insert is required, the new assay insert is downloaded to Abbott Mail and is
assigned to the new reagent lot in the reagent cartridge details. The status of the assay insert
remains as New until the system administrator reviews and accepts the assay insert in Abbott
Mail.
If the reagent lot uses the current assay insert, the current assay insert is assigned to the new
reagent lot.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Software notifications A software update is available to install on the system, but the
software installer has not been downloaded. When the
software notification is accepted, the software installer is
downloaded to the system and is available for installation.
Software notifications The software notification and the software installer are
and installer downloaded to the system. When the software notification is
accepted, the software is available for installation.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
When calibrator data is requested for an existing calibrator set that has been configured with
one or more calibrator lot numbers, only the calibrator lot number data that is newer than the
configured data is sent to the system software.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Manually request calibrator data files, page 494
Error An error occurred when the mail item was downloaded from
AbbottLink.
Update The mail item is a newer version than the mail item that is
installed on the system.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
3. To filter the list of mail items on the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap a tab (or tap Search).
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Reagents screen, page 533
Perform this procedure to accept Abbott Mail items. When Abbott Mail items are accepted, files
are available for installation or assay inserts are designated as reviewed by the system
administrator, and the items are removed from the Abbott Mail Inbox screen.
NOTE: Thoroughly review the Abbott Mail documentation of the item before accepting the item.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Manually request assay files, page 493
Manually request calibrator data files, page 494
Perform this procedure to request new assay files manually. When new assay files are
requested, all assays files that are not installed or are not available to be installed are
downloaded for each assay category that is selected.
NOTE: Only one active request can be performed at a time. If an automatic request or a manual
request for a file is pending, a new request cannot be initiated.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the System Status bar of the Home screen, tap Mail.
3. On the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap Request.
4. On the Assay Files tab of the Manual File Request screen, tap each assay category that
contains the assay files to download.
NOTE: An individual assay file cannot be requested to download. When new assay files are
requested, all assays files that are not installed or are not available to be installed are
downloaded for each assay category that is selected. After the assay files are downloaded,
any file that is not needed can be deleted from the Abbott Mail Inbox screen.
5. Tap Request Assay.
NOTE: The download speed capability of the laboratory affects the amount of time needed
to process a request. The status of an assay file request can remain as Pending for a
maximum of 24 hours.
6. To return to the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Manual File Request screen, page 486
Assay file mail description, page 489
Delete Abbott Mail items, page 493
Perform this procedure to request new calibrator data files manually. When new calibrator data
files are requested, all calibrator data files that are not installed or are not available to be
installed are downloaded.
NOTE: Only one active request can be performed at a time. If an automatic request or a manual
request for a file is pending, a new request cannot be initiated.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the System Status bar of the Home screen, tap Mail.
3. On the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap Request.
4. On the Manual File Request screen, tap the Calibrator Data tab.
5. On the Calibrator Data tab of the Manual File Request screen, tap Request Calibrator.
NOTE: When new calibrator data files are requested, all calibrator data files that are not
installed or are not available to be installed are downloaded. After the calibrator data files
are downloaded, any file that is not needed can be deleted from the Abbott Mail Inbox
screen.
The download speed capability of the laboratory affects the amount of time needed to
process a request. The status of a file request can remain as Pending for a maximum of 24
hours.
6. To return to the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Calibrator data mail description (c-series), page 490
Delete Abbott Mail items, page 493
Perform this procedure to decline a system update that is not wanted. A system update that has
been downloaded successfully cannot be deleted. A system update that is declined is removed
from the Abbott Mail Inbox screen.
NOTE: Thoroughly review the system update documentation before declining the system update.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the System Status bar of the Home screen, tap Mail.
3. On the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap the System Updates tab.
4. In the list of system updates on the System Updates tab, tap one or more updates (or tap
Select All).
NOTE: To filter the list of system updates, tap Search.
5. Tap Decline.
NOTE: The system administrator cannot decline mandatory updates.
6. In the Comment box in the Reason to Decline System Update flyout, type a reason to
decline for each system update.
NOTE: To decline a system update, a comment must be entered.
7. To confirm the decline of the system update, tap Done.
To cancel the decline of the system update and return to the Abbott Mail Inbox screen, tap
Cancel.
Related information...
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Instrument statuses
Instrument status refers to the operational modes of the Alinity ci-series. The processing
modules and the reagent and sample manager (RSM) have the following instrument statuses:
Status Description
Offline Indicates when the processing module is not communicating with the
system control module (SCM).
This status is displayed for the following conditions:
• Power to the processing module is off.
• Power to the processing module has been turned on, but
communication between the module and the SCM has not been
reestablished.
• Communication failure between the processing module and the SCM
has occurred because of a software error or a system error.
Stopped Indicates when the processing module is turned on and is communicating
with the SCM.
This status is displayed for the following conditions:
• Power to the processing module is on, but Start on the Home screen
has not been selected.
• Stop on the Home screen was selected.
• A diagnostic procedure has completed.
• A procedure has completed with an error.
• A fatal error was detected during assay processing.
Start on the Home screen must be selected to initialize the processing
module and to transition the status to Idle.
Initializing Indicates a temporary status that occurs when Start or Run on the Home
screen is selected.
After initialization is completed, the status transitions to Running,
Processing, or Idle based on whether Start or Run on the Home screen
was selected. Initialization is specific to a module. Based on the module,
the following functions are performed:
• c-series • Initialization after Start is selected:
– Confirms that the volume of water dispensed from the cuvette
washer is adequate
• Initialization after Start or Run is selected:
– Homes the motors
– Confirms that processing center covers are closed
– Verifies that the reagent carousel inventory is adequate
– Confirms that racks and cartridges are not located on the
reagent positioner
– Confirms that the volume of the bulk solutions is adequate
Status Description
– Confirms that the volume of the sample onboard wash solutions
is adequate
• Initialization after Run is selected:
– Washes the probes
– Washes the cuvettes
– Verifies that the supply inventory is adequate
– Sets the optics gain
• i-series • Initialization after Start or Run is selected:
– Homes the motors
– Confirms that processing center covers are closed
– Confirms that the RV unloader is in the correct position
– Performs a vacuum check
– Verifies that the reagent carousel inventory is adequate
– Confirms that racks and cartridges are not located on the
reagent positioner
• Initialization after Run is selected:
– Washes the pipettor probes
– Starts the mixing of the microparticles
– Verifies that the supply inventory is adequate
– Performs a background check
– Fills the process path load lane with clean reaction vessels
(RVs)
– Clears RVs from the pretreatment path and adds clean RVs
• RSM • Initialization after Start or Run is selected:
– Homes all moving parts
– Confirms that front processing center covers are closed for
each processing module
– Confirms that the bar code reader is functioning correctly
– Homes the sample positioner for each processing module
– Confirms that racks and cartridges are not located on the
sample positioners or the RSM transport
Warming Indicates when the processing module has completed initialization but
has not reached the required temperature.
NOTE: This status is not displayed for the RSM.
Status Description
For c-series, this status is displayed after Run on the Home screen is
selected and initialization is completed. During this time, cuvettes are
washed and filled with water. If a sample is not loaded on the RSM, the
module status transitions to Running after these activities are completed.
NOTE: This status is not displayed for the RSM.
Pausing Indicates when the processing module is not aspirating samples and is
completing assay processing before the module status transitions to Idle
or Stopped.
The module status transitions to Idle for the following conditions:
• Pause on the Home screen was selected.
• Supply inventory is insufficient.
When an error is detected during assay processing, the module status
transitions to Stopped.
Maintenance Indicates when a maintenance procedure or a diagnostic procedure is in
process on the processing module.
Related information...
Home screen, page 463
Instrument status transition, page 498
Home screen element descriptions, page 464
* The number of cuvettes that are washed and filled with water is 187.
* If the pretreatment path is repopulated with reaction vessels, the duration of initialization is
7 minutes.
Related information...
Instrument statuses, page 496
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Supplies screen, page 500
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
Supplies screen
On the Supplies screen, the operator can view the following information:
• c-series
– Percentage of bulk solutions
– Percentage of onboard solutions in the sample wash solution area
– Status of the liquid waste in the high-concentration waste bottle
– Status of the ICT module
• i-series
– Percentage of bulk solutions
– Status of the reaction vessel (RV) waste
– Status of RVs
NOTE: The c-series and the i-series calculate the supply volume and the percent-remaining
information on required tests for samples that have been scheduled on the reagent and sample
manager.
Related information...
Consumable inventory management, page 500
Supplies screen element descriptions (c-series), page 501
Supplies screen element descriptions (i-series), page 505
Verify the supply and waste inventory, page 508
Elements
Bottle Empty Displays when the bulk solution bottle on the bulk solution
door is empty.
Status bar The Alkaline Wash area and the Acid Wash area display a
graphical representation of the status and total remaining
supply. The ICT Reference area displays a graphical
representation of the status and total remaining supply only if
the c-series is configured to use the ICT module. Statuses are
indicated by the following colors:
1. Green = OK
2. Yellow = Low Level or Overridden
3. Red = Empty, Lot Expired
When an item meets the criteria for more than one status, the
higher number status is applied to the item. For example, an
item that is both Low Level and Lot Expired is displayed as Lot
Expired.
Replaced button Used to confirm bottle replacement when the bar code
scanner is not used.
Expiration Displays the expiration date for the bulk solution currently in
use. The color-coded indicator changes colors as follows:
Lot Displays the lot number for the solution currently in use.
Stability Days Displays the number of days that the bulk solution has been
on the system. The color-coded indicator changes colors as
follows:
The indicator is yellow when the supply item status has been
overridden.
When an item meets the criteria for more than one status, the
higher number item status is applied. For example, an item
that is both Exceeded and Lot Expired is displayed as Lot
Expired.
Expiration Displays the expiration date for the ICT module currently in
use. The color-coded indicator changes colors as follows:
Days On Board Displays the number of days that the ICT module has been
installed. The color-coded indicator changes to yellow when
the number of days on the system exceeds 90 days.
Samples Processed Displays the number of ICT samples processed. The color-
coded indicator changes to yellow when the number of
samples processed exceeds 20,000 samples.
When an item meets the criteria for more than one status, the
higher number item status is applied. For example, an item
that is both Low Level and Lot Expired is displayed as Lot
Expired.
Expiration Displays the expiration date for the sample onboard wash
solution. The color-coded indicator changes colors as follows:
Lot Displays the lot number for the solution currently in use.
Stability Hours Displays the number of hours of onboard stability for the
sample onboard wash solution. The color-coded indicator
changes colors as follows:
Position The Acid Probe Wash area displays position 1, the location of
the sample onboard wash solution in the sample wash
solution area. The Detergent A area displays position 2, the
location of the sample onboard wash solution in the sample
wash solution area.
NOTE: The Liquid Waste area is displayed only if the area is configured for Liquid Waste
Container.
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Replace the ICT module or the ICT probe (c-series), page 859
Elements
Bottle Empty Displays when the bulk solution bottle on the bulk solution
door is empty.
When an item meets the criteria for more than one status, the
higher number item status is applied. For example, an item
that is both Low Level and Stability Expired is displayed as
Stability Expired.
Replaced button Used to confirm bottle replacement when the bar code
scanner is not used. This action resets the onboard stability
time when the operator indicates that the item is replaced.
Expiration Displays the expiration date for the bulk solution currently in
use. The color-coded indicator changes colors as follows:
Lot Displays the lot number for the solution currently in use.
Stability Days Displays the number of days that the bulk solution has been
onboard the system. The color-coded indicator changes
colors as follows:
The indicator is yellow when the supply item status has been
overridden.
RVs area
Lot Displays the lot number for the RVs currently in use.
RV Waste area
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Initiate or resume sample processing, page 574
1. Verify that a new bulk solution is within the expiration date on the bulk solution bottle label.
Do not use solutions that are expired.
NOTE: When bulk solution bottles are installed, the Alinity ci-series tracks and maintains a
record of the bulk solution lot number, the expiration date and, when applicable, the onboard
stability.
2. On the menu bar, tap Supplies.
3. On the Supplies screen, tap a Module button.
4. Use the bar code scanner to scan the bar code on the new bulk solution bottle.
Under Supply Details in the flyout, the system automatically updates the bulk solution with
the lot number and expiration date of the new bottle.
To enter manually the lot number and the expiration date, perform the following steps:
a. Tap Update for the new bulk solution.
b. Under Supply Details in the flyout, enter the expiration date and the lot number.
c. To save the information, tap Done.
5. Repeat step 4, page 509 for each bulk solution that is replaced.
6. Open the bulk solution door.
7. Press the bottle release button to disengage the empty bulk solution bottle from the bottle
holder.
NOTE: The color of the bulk solution cap matches the color of the bottle release button.
8. Remove and discard the empty bulk solution bottle according to the laboratory waste
disposal procedures of the facility.
9. Remove the protective cover from the cap of the new bulk solution bottle.
10. Invert the new bulk solution bottle and place it in the bottle holder.
11. Push down the bottle until it locks.
12. Close the bulk solution door.
NOTE: When the bulk solution door is closed, the door sensor confirms that the bottle was
replaced.
To confirm manually that the bottle was replaced, tap Replaced on the Supplies screen.
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Replace sample onboard wash solutions and update the inventory (c-series)
Perform this procedure to replace the sample onboard wash solutions, Acid Probe Wash and
Detergent A, and to update the inventory when the sample tubes are empty or the wash solutions
are expired.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. To replace Acid Probe Wash, use a measuring device to dispense up to 10 mL of the wash
solution from the cartridge into a 16 mm x 100 mm sample tube.
2. To replace Detergent A, use a measuring device to dispense up to 10 mL of the wash
solution from the cartridge into a 16 mm x 100 mm sample tube.
3. Lift the rear processing center cover.
4. Locate the sample wash solution holder.
5. Remove each empty or expired tube of wash solution and place each new tube in the
appropriate position:
– Acid Probe Wash [1]
– Detergent A [2]
IMPORTANT: The operator has a responsibility to load the correct wash solution in the
correct position.
6. Discard the used sample tubes according to the laboratory waste disposal procedures of the
facility.
7. Close the rear processing center cover.
8. On the menu bar, tap Supplies.
9. On the Supplies screen, tap a Module button.
10. Use the bar code scanner to scan the bar code on the Acid Probe Wash cartridge.
Under Supply Details in the flyout, the system automatically updates the sample onboard
wash solution with the lot number and expiration date of the cartridge.
To enter manually the lot number and the expiration date, perform the following steps:
a. Tap Update for the new sample onboard wash solution.
b. Under Supply Details in the flyout, enter the expiration date and the lot number.
c. To save the information, tap Done.
NOTE: After the new sample onboard wash solution is updated in the system software, the
onboard stability of the solution is 24 hours.
11. Repeat step 10, page 512 for the Detergent A cartridge.
12. Place a new replacement cap on each bottle in each cartridge to store the cartridges for
future use.
13. Store the cartridges in an upright position according to instructions in the product
documentation.
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
5501 Daily Maintenance (c-series), page 759
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle and update the inventory (c-series)
Perform this procedure to empty the high-concentration waste bottle when the bottle is full.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a lifting hazard.
1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the waste bottle cap.
2. Place an absorbent towel next to the waste bottle to absorb any spills from the cap.
3. Unscrew the waste bottle from the cap. Ensure that the tubing attached to the cap is not
kinked.
4. Place the cap with the attached tubing on the absorbent towel.
5. Dispose of liquid waste according to the laboratory biohazard waste disposal procedures of
the facility.
CAUTION: Do not move open waste containers that are filled with liquid. Close full
or partially full containers before attempting to move them. Keep the closures in
place while the containers are moved.
6. Screw the cap onto the waste bottle. Ensure that the tubing attached to the cap is not
kinked.
7. Reconnect the float switch cable.
8. On the menu bar, tap Supplies.
9. On the Supplies screen, tap a Module button.
10. Tap Update for the liquid waste.
11. Under Supply Details in the flyout, tap the Emptied Liquid Waste check box.
12. To save the information, tap Done.
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Optional components, page 123
Waste handling and disposal, page 728
Perform this procedure to empty the RV waste container and to update the RV waste status.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Waste handling and disposal, page 728
8. To add a full bag of RVs, pour all contents of the bag into the RV hopper.
To add a partial bag of RVs, pour some contents of the bag into the RV hopper and
estimate the quantity of RVs that were added.
NOTE: Do not overfill the RV hopper.
9. Close the RV hopper cover.
Related information...
Supplies screen, page 500
Related information...
Consumable inventory management, page 500
Cal/QC Inventory screen element descriptions, page 519
Cal/QC Inventory screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 520
Descriptions of vial statuses, page 521
Verify vial inventory data, page 522
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) sample processing for onboard calibrators and controls,
page 567
Onboard storage criteria for calibrator and control vials, page 568
Elements
M/P Displays the module (M) number and position (P) number in
the reagent carousel for vial racks that are stored on the
system. Dashes are displayed for the module and position
when the vial rack is not located in the reagent carousel.
Vial Status Displays the calibrator or control vial status (Empty, LLS Error,
Expired, Low Alert, Overridden, or OK).
In Use Stability Displays the remaining time that the calibrator or control is
known to have been removed from refrigerated storage. In-
use stability tracking occurs after the vial is scanned by the
RSM bar code reader. For calibrators, in-use stability tracking
stops when the vial is unloaded from the RSM (for c-series
and i-series) or is returned to the reagent carousel (only for c-
series). For controls, in-use stability tracking stops when the
vial is unloaded from the RSM or is returned to the reagent
carousel. Quality controls that have the in-use stability
configured as zero are not tracked.
Load Status Displays the status of vial racks that are loaded or unloaded
between the RSM and the reagent carousel.
Function buttons
Related information...
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Function buttons
Related information...
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
LLS Error One liquid level sense or pressure monitor error occurred
during aspiration of a Cal or QC vial.
Related information...
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
Reagents screen, page 533
Related information...
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
Search for or filter data, page 664
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Load trays on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 524
Load racks on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 526
Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 527
Load onboard solutions and sample diluents on the reagent and sample manager (RSM) (c-
series), page 530
Load racks and reagent cartridges into temporary priority positions, page 531
Unload trays from the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 533
Reagent carousel inventory management, page 533
Sample management, page 562
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
IMPORTANT: When transporting or loading racks, avoid splashing the sample outside the
sample cups and tubes.
1. Position the rack or cartridge so that the rack handle or cartridge handle is located at the
front of the tray, which is indicated by an arrow.
2. Slide the rack or cartridge into the tray until the rack or cartridge stops.
3. Confirm that the rack or cartridge is flush against the back of the tray.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 527
Prepare reagent cartridges, page 548
Prepare onboard solutions (c-series), page 551
Prepare sample diluents and user-defined reagents (c-series), page 552
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for immediate use, page 572
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for onboard storage, page 549
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
IMPORTANT: When transporting or loading racks, avoid splashing the sample outside the
sample cups and tubes.
1. For routine loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are not illuminated, which indicates that the positions are available.
For priority loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are blue, which indicates that the positions are available.
2. Hold the tray handle, which is indicated with an arrow, and slide the tray into a bay on the
RSM until the tray stops.
If the tray contains racks or cartridges, green status indicators are illuminated.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Load racks and reagent cartridges into temporary priority positions, page 531
Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 527
Perform this procedure to load prepared sample racks or vial racks on the RSM. Racks can be
loaded in routine positions or priority positions.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
IMPORTANT: When transporting or loading racks, avoid splashing the sample outside the
sample cups and tubes.
1. For routine loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are not illuminated, which indicates that the positions are available.
For priority loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are blue, which indicates that the positions are available.
2. Hold the rack handle, and slide the rack into a routine position or a priority position on the
RSM until a green status indicator illuminates.
If the position on the RSM does not contain a tray, load the rack into a tray and slide the
tray into the RSM.
NOTE: For calibrator and control vials that have an onboard stability claim, onboard stability
tracking occurs after the vial is scanned by the bar code reader.
For calibrators that have an in-use stability claim, in-use stability tracking occurs after the vial is
scanned by the bar code reader. After the vial is unloaded from the RSM, the timer for in-use
stability tracking stops.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Automated retest of specimens, page 583
Perform this procedure to load prepared cartridges on the RSM. The RSM automatically loads
cartridges in the reagent carousel. Cartridges can be loaded in routine positions or priority
positions. If one cartridge of a two-cartridge reagent set is loaded in a priority position, both
cartridges will be priority loaded.
NOTE: To ensure correct tracking status, do not move the cartridges to a processing module
that is controlled by a different system control module.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. For routine loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are not illuminated, which indicates that the positions are available.
For priority loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are blue, which indicates that the positions are available.
2. Hold the cartridge handle, and slide the cartridge into a routine position or a priority position
on the RSM until a green status indicator illuminates.
If the position on the RSM does not contain a tray, load the cartridge into a tray and slide
the tray into the RSM.
NOTE: Some assays require two reagent cartridges. These reagent cartridges are indicated
with 1/2 and 2/2 on them. Both reagent cartridges must be loaded, but they do not need to
be inserted into adjacent positions. After the reagent cartridges are loaded on the RSM and
the bar code reader scans the bar code label, the system software links the two reagent
cartridges as a set. If a two-cartridge reagent set is removed from the system, the reagent
set must be replaced as a set.
NOTE: For products that have an onboard stability claim, onboard stability tracking occurs
after the cartridge is scanned by the bar code reader. After the cartridge is unloaded from
the reagent carousel and is removed from the RSM, the timer for onboard stability tracking
stops.
For information about product onboard stability, see the product documentation.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Prepare onboard solutions (c-series), page 551
Prepare sample diluents and user-defined reagents (c-series), page 552
Prepare reagent cartridges, page 548
Load trays on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 524
Perform this procedure to load prepared onboard solution and sample diluent cartridges on the
RSM. The RSM automatically loads cartridges in the reagent carousel. Cartridges can be loaded
in routine positions or priority positions.
NOTE: To ensure correct tracking status, do not move the cartridges to a processing module
that is controlled by a different system control module.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. For routine loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are not illuminated, which indicates that the positions are available.
For priority loading on the RSM, confirm that the status indicators above the bay positions to
load are blue, which indicates that the positions are available.
2. Hold the cartridge handle, and slide the cartridge into a routine position or a priority position
on the RSM until a green status indicator illuminates.
If the position on the RSM does not contain a tray, load the cartridge into a tray and slide
the tray into the RSM.
NOTE: For onboard solutions that have an onboard stability claim, onboard stability tracking
occurs after the cartridge is scanned by the bar code reader. After the cartridge is unloaded
from the reagent carousel and is removed from the RSM, the timer for onboard stability
tracking stops.
For information about product onboard stability, see the product documentation.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
2. Insert a rack, cartridge, or tray into any position on the loading area of the specific
processing module.
If a rack is inserted into a position, the system designates the position as a priority position.
If a tray is inserted into a position, all positions of the tray are designated as priority
positions. When the rack is removed, the blue status indicator for the priority position is not
illuminated.
NOTE: After the priority button is pressed, the rack, cartridge, or tray must be inserted into a
position within 10 seconds. To deactivate the RSM priority button before the time-out
expires, press the priority button again.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Load trays on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 524
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
• Grasp the tray handle, which is indicated with an arrow, and slide the tray out of the RSM.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Status indicators, page 65
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Reagents screen, page 533
Reagents screen
On the Reagents screen, the operator can view the following information for cartridges and
racks that are loaded in the reagent carousel:
• The Current tab displays:
– A list of cartridges and racks that are currently loaded on the system for all modules.
– A graphical representation of the reagent carousel for individual modules that indicates
the position and status of the cartridges and racks.
• The Historical tab displays a list of cartridges and racks that are currently loaded on the
system and were previously loaded on the system.
Related information...
Reagent carousel inventory management, page 533
Reagents screen, Current tab element descriptions, page 534
Reagents screen, Historical tab element descriptions, page 538
Reagents screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 539
Reagent Cartridge Details screen, page 540
Descriptions of cartridge statuses, page 543
Descriptions of load statuses, page 545
Descriptions of assay insert statuses, page 546
Verify the reagent carousel inventory, page 547
Prepare reagent cartridges, page 548
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for onboard storage, page 549
Prepare onboard solutions (c-series), page 551
Prepare sample diluents and user-defined reagents (c-series), page 552
Print a 1D reagent bar code report (c-series), page 555
Unload racks and cartridges from a reagent carousel to the RSM, page 557
Cancel a rack unload or a cartridge unload, page 558
Unload reagents from the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 558
Disable a reagent cartridge, page 559
Enable a reagent cartridge, page 560
View or print assay inserts, page 561
Delete a reagent carousel item (CSC Logon), page 561
Descriptions of vial statuses, page 521
View or print Abbott Mail documentation, page 492
Print a report, page 662
Search for or filter data, page 664
Elements
All button Displays the reagent status information in a table format for
all modules.
M/P Displays the module (M) number and the position (P) number
in the reagent carousel where the reagent carousel inventory
item is loaded.
RSM / P Displays the RSM module number and the position (P)
number on the loading area where the reagent carousel
inventory item is loaded or unloaded.
Cartridge Status Displays the status of the reagent carousel inventory item.
For statuses other than OK, Mixing (only for i-series), Low
Alert, and Overridden, the text in the list associated with the
item is displayed in red.
Cal Status Displays the calibration status for the assay that uses the
reagent cartridge. Information is displayed only for reagent
cartridges.
Lot Displays the lot number for the reagent carousel inventory
item. Information is not displayed for vial racks.
Load Status Displays the load or unload status of the reagent carousel
inventory item.
Onboard Stability Displays the number of onboard stability days that remain for
reagent carousel inventory items that have an onboard
stability claim. If the remaining time is less than 24 hours, < 1
is displayed. Information is not displayed for vial racks.
Cartridge Status Displays the status of the reagent carousel inventory item.
For statuses other than OK, Mixing (only for i-series), Low
Alert, and Overridden, the text in the list associated with the
item is displayed in red.
Cal Status Displays the calibration status for the assay that uses the
reagent cartridge. Information is not displayed for vial racks.
Load Status Displays the load or unload status of the reagent carousel
inventory item.
Scheduled Tests Displays the number of scheduled tests for the reagent
carousel inventory item.
Ready to Unload Displays the time that the reagent carousel inventory item is
ready to unload.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All. This function button is
displayed only when the All button is selected.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
M/P Displays the module (M) number and the position (P) number
in the reagent carousel where the reagent carousel inventory
item is loaded.
Cartridge Status Displays the status of the reagent carousel inventory item.
For statuses other than OK, Mixing (only for i-series), Low
Alert, and Overridden, the text in the list associated with the
item is displayed in red.
Cal Status Displays the calibration status for the assay that uses the
reagent cartridge. Information is displayed only for reagent
cartridges.
Lot Displays the lot number for the reagent carousel inventory
item. Information is not displayed for vial racks.
Onboard Stability Displays the number of onboard stability days that remain for
reagent carousel inventory items that have an onboard
stability claim. If the remaining time is less than 24 hours, < 1
is displayed. Information is not displayed for vial racks.
Unload Time Displays the time that the reagent carousel inventory item was
unloaded.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Function buttons
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Search flyout, page 664
Descriptions of cartridge statuses, page 543
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 708
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Reagent Cartridge Details screen element descriptions, page 541
Enable a reagent cartridge, page 560
Elements
Onboard Stability Displays the number of onboard stability hours that remain for
(Hours) the reagent cartridge.
Stability Status Displays the status of the stability of the reagent cartridge:
• OK: The stability has not been exceeded.
• Expired: The stability has been exceeded.
Module Displays the number of the module used to process the test.
CAL Status Displays the calibration status for the assay that uses the
reagent cartridge.
RSM/P Displays the reagent and sample manager (RSM) module and
position number where the reagent cartridge is located.
Load Status Displays the status of reagents that are loaded or unloaded
between the RSM and the reagent carousel.
Used to view a portable document format (PDF) version of an assay insert if the status of the
assay insert details is New or Current.
Date and Time Displays the date and time that an assay insert download was
requested.
Function buttons
Related information...
Reagent Cartridge Details screen, page 540
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
When a reagent carousel inventory item has a status of Empty, LLS Error, or Expired, the system
initiates a cartridge unload request.
The following list provides descriptions of the cartridge statuses. When the Cartridge Status
column header is selected, the statuses are sorted in the following order:
No Assay A reagent is not used by any assay file that is installed on the
system.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Reagents screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 539
Partially unloaded The first cartridge of a two-cartridge reagent set has been
unloaded into the RSM, but the second cartridge cannot be
unloaded into the RSM because no positions are available.
Scanning The bar code reader has scanned the first cartridge of a two-
cartridge reagent set and is waiting to scan the second
cartridge.
Processing An onboard vial rack has been removed from the reagent
carousel for control processing or calibration processing.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Current The system administrator has reviewed and has accepted the
assay insert in Abbott Mail.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
View or print assay inserts, page 561
NOTE: The status that is displayed reflects the inventory that remains after the system
processes samples that are scanned by the RSM bar code reader.
Orders can be created when inventory levels are insufficient. However, when sample processing
is initiated while the levels are insufficient, tests become exceptions and are not processed.
1. On the menu bar, tap Reagents.
The Current tab of the Reagents screen displays the reagent carousel inventory for all
modules.
2. To display the reagent carousel inventory for one module, tap a Module button.
3. Verify the reagent carousel inventory.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Initiate or resume sample processing, page 574
Prerequisite For instructions for reagent handling and use, see the assay
documentation.
Perform this procedure to prepare reagent cartridges to load on the reagent and sample
manager (RSM).
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
IMPORTANT: For i-series reagent cartridges that have an integrated septum, during assay
processing, the reagent pipettor pierces the reagent cartridge septum. After the septum is
pierced, do not invert the cartridge since this action causes reagent leakage and may
compromise test results. Store pierced cartridges in an upright position.
1. Verify that the reagent cartridges are within the expiration date on the cartridge label. Do not
use cartridges that are expired.
NOTE: When a reagent cartridge is scanned by the RSM bar code reader, the Alinity ci-
series tracks and maintains a record of the cartridge reagent lot number and expiration
date.
2. Verify that the reagent bottles have not leaked.
3. Turn the cap counterclockwise on each reagent bottle until the cap stops.
4. Align the tabs on the cap with the grooves in the reagent cartridge and pull the cap to
remove it.
NOTE: A reagent bottle that has a yellow cap requires special preparation. For specific
instructions for reagent handling, see the assay documentation.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 527
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for onboard storage
Prerequisite For instructions for calibrator or control handling and use, see
the assay documentation.
Perform this procedure to prepare and load calibrator or control vials for storage on the Alinity
ci-series.
NOTE: To ensure correct tracking status, do not move the vials to a processing module that is
controlled by a different system control module.
Onboard stability tracking occurs after the vial is scanned by the RSM bar code reader. In-use
stability tracking occurs when the calibrator is not in refrigerated storage while on the system.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Verify that the calibrators or controls are within the expiration dates on the vial labels. Do
not use calibrators or controls that are expired.
NOTE: When a calibrator or control vial is scanned by the RSM bar code reader, the Alinity
ci-series tracks and maintains a record of the calibrator lot number and expiration date or
the control lot number and expiration date.
2. Inspect each vial for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a clean applicator stick before
performing sample processing. Use a new applicator stick for each vial to prevent cross
contamination.
3. Open each vial and discard the caps.
4. Place each vial in the onboard vial rack with standoffs so that the vial bar code is visible in
the rack window and the bar code fills the width of the window.
NOTE: After a vial is scanned by the RSM bar code reader, the vial is assigned to the
onboard vial rack and cannot be moved.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for immediate use, page 572
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Automated control ordering, page 579
Automated calibration ordering, page 581
Prerequisite For instructions for onboard solution handling and use, see
the product documentation.
Perform this procedure to prepare cartridges of c-series onboard solutions to load on the
reagent and sample manager (RSM).
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Verify that the onboard solution cartridges are within the expiration date on the cartridge
label. Do not use cartridges that are expired.
NOTE: When a cartridge is scanned by the RSM bar code reader, the Alinity ci-series tracks
and maintains a record of the cartridge lot number and expiration date.
2. Verify that the onboard solution bottles have not leaked.
3. Turn the cap counterclockwise on each onboard solution bottle until the cap stops.
4. Align the tabs on the cap with the grooves in the cartridge and pull the cap to remove it.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 527
Perform this procedure to fill and label reagent cartridges with the following items to load on the
reagent and sample manager (RSM):
• Saline for use as a diluent
• Saline for use with the Sample Interference Indices Saline Protocol
• User-defined diluents
• User-defined reagents
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Verify that the saline, the diluent, and the reagents are within the expiration dates if dates
are provided. Do not use solutions that are expired.
2. Affix the 1D reagent bar code label to an R1 reagent bottle according to the following
guidelines. The R1 bottle is the larger bottle and is positioned leftmost in the cartridge when
the cartridge handle faces to the right side of the cartridge.
– Vertically orient the printed bars of the label within a vertical angle limit of ±5 degrees.
– Align the top edge of the label with the cartridge transport tab at the left edge of the R1
bottle.
– R1 bottle: 74 mL
– R2 bottle: 47 mL
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the maximum fill volumes for the reagent bottles to prevent
damage to the reagent carousel.
Figure 144: Prepare sample diluents and user-defined reagents
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Reagent cartridge with empty bottles (c-series), page 145
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 527
Perform this procedure to print a 1D reagent bar code report. The report provides reagent
cartridge labels to use with the following solutions:
• Saline for use as a diluent
• Saline for use with the Sample Interference Indices Saline Protocol
• User-defined diluents
• User-defined reagents
NOTE: The 1D reagent bar code report can be printed only for one diluent or one reagent at a
time. Additional reports can be generated after one report is completed.
1. On the menu bar, tap System, and then tap Configure.
NOTE: The Configure command can be configured as an icon on the menu bar and thereby
is removed from the System menu.
2. On the General tab of the Configure screen, tap Reagents and Supplies.
3. On the Reagents and Supplies screen, tap the name of the diluent or reagent to print the
report:
– To print a label report for saline or another diluent, tap the diluent name under Diluent
Low Alert on the Reagents/Diluents tab.
– To print a label report for saline for the sample interference indices or a user-defined
reagent, tap the reagent name on the c-series Reagents tab.
4. Tap Print 1D Bar Code.
5. In the Print 1D Bar Code flyout, choose a printer or tap Print to File in the Print Location
drop-down list.
6. In the Label Options area, enter the following information:
– Lot
– Expiration
NOTE: The 1D bar code format encodes expiration dates by the week. If the entered
expiration date does not correspond to the end of a seven-day week, the expiration date
for the printed bar code is the end of the previous week.
– Starting Serial Number
– Number of Labels
NOTE: When the entry for the starting serial number is added to the number of labels to
print, the entry must not exceed 9999.
7. In the Report Selection list, tap one of the following options that correspond to the label
type:
– 1D Bar Code Report - 5520
– 1D Bar Code Report - L4773
– 1D Bar Code Report - L7060
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
1D reagent bar code label placement (c-series), page 415
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Perform this procedure to unload an item from a reagent carousel to the RSM. This procedure
provides space for a different item in the reagent carousel. Reagent carousel inventory may
include the following items:
• Reagents
• Onboard solutions and diluents
• Calibrators and controls
• Maintenance items
The Alinity ci-series automatically unloads items that have a cartridge status of Empty, Expired,
or LLS Error.
1. On the menu bar, tap Reagents.
The Current tab of the Reagents screen displays the reagent carousel inventory for all
modules.
2. To display the reagent carousel inventory for one module, tap a Module button.
3. Confirm that the carousel item to unload is not required for tests that are in process.
If an item is unloaded, all scheduled tests that require the item become exceptions.
NOTE: View the Scheduled Test column to identify whether a reagent has any scheduled
tests.
4. Tap the item to unload.
5. Tap Unload.
The item is unloaded to an available position on the RSM that is nearest to the system
control module.
NOTE: Multiple items can be selected and unloaded from the reagent carousel inventory
that is displayed for all modules on the Current tab. Only one item can be selected and
unloaded from the reagent carousel inventory that is displayed for the selected module.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Unload reagents from the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 558
Perform this procedure to cancel an unload request that was initiated by an operator and to
leave an item in the reagent carousel.
NOTE: If the system initiates an unload request because the carousel item has a cartridge status
of Expired, Empty, or LLS Error, the operator cannot cancel the unload request.
1. On the menu bar, tap Reagents.
The Current tab of the Reagents screen displays the reagent carousel inventory for all
modules.
2. To display the reagent carousel inventory for one module, tap a Module button.
3. Confirm that the carousel item has a load status of Scheduled Unload.
4. Tap the carousel item.
5. Tap Cancel Unload.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
• Blinking green
• Steady green
• Alternating green and amber
Perform this procedure to unload reagents from the RSM when the reagents are not needed on
the system.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Slide the reagent cartridge, or the tray that contains the cartridge, out of the RSM.
NOTE: Onboard stability tracking occurs after the reagent cartridge is scanned by the bar
code reader and is being loaded in the reagent carousel. After the reagent cartridge is
unloaded from the reagent carousel and is removed from the RSM, the timer for onboard
stability tracking stops.
For information about reagent onboard stability, see the assay documentation.
2. Place a new replacement cap on each reagent bottle in the reagent cartridge to store the
cartridge for future use.
Empty reagent cartridges can be discarded without replacement caps.
3. Store reagent cartridges in an upright position in refrigerated storage according to
instructions in the assay documentation.
Two reagent cartridges that are linked together by the system software must be stored
together as a set.
IMPORTANT: After an immunoassay reagent cartridge septum is pierced, do not invert the
reagent cartridge since this action causes reagent leakage and may compromise test
results.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Unload racks and cartridges from a reagent carousel to the RSM, page 557
The Current tab of the Reagents screen displays the reagent carousel inventory for all
modules.
2. To display the reagent carousel inventory for one module, tap a Module button.
3. Under Reagent Carousel List, tap a reagent cartridge to disable.
4. Tap Details.
5. On the Reagent Cartridge Details screen, tap Disable.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. To return to the Reagents screen, tap Done.
IMPORTANT: To order a calibration or control for a disabled reagent cartridge, the cartridge
must be selected in the Assay Options flyout. If only one reagent cartridge is loaded on the
system, the disabled reagent cartridge is selected automatically.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Enable a reagent cartridge, page 560
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Disable a reagent cartridge, page 559
Reagent Cartridge Details screen, page 540
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
Perform this procedure to view or print assay inserts from the Reagent Cartridge Details screen.
1. On the menu bar, tap Reagents.
The Current tab of the Reagents screen displays the reagent carousel inventory for all
modules.
2. To display the reagent carousel inventory for one module, tap a Module button.
3. Under Reagent Carousel List, tap a reagent cartridge.
4. Tap Details.
5. On the Reagent Cartridge Details screen, tap Print.
6. Under Report Selection in the Print flyout, tap Assay Insert.
7. To rotate the document, use the Rotate toolbar.
8. To browse the document, use the Page toolbar.
9. To increase or decrease the font size in the document, use the Zoom toolbar.
10. To fit the document to the window width ( ) or to resize the document to fit one full page in
the window ( ), use the Fit toolbar.
11. To find a word or phrase in the document, use the Find toolbar.
12. To print the document, tap Print.
To return to the Reagents screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Descriptions of assay insert statuses, page 546
Related information...
Reagents screen, page 533
Sample management
Sample management includes procedures used to prepare samples, to initiate processing, and
to unload samples. For more information about specimen collection, preparation, and storage,
see requirements for handling the specimens and see the assay documentation.
Before samples are loaded on the Alinity ci-series, the operator must be familiar with sample and
sample bar code label requirements.
Related information...
Reagent and sample management, page 523
Sample processing, page 562
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for immediate use, page 572
Initiate or resume sample processing, page 574
Suspend and access a sample that has tests in process, page 575
Unload samples from the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 575
Unload vials from the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 576
Sample bar code label requirements, page 416
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
Sample processing
The progression of samples through the Alinity ci-series differs based on the system
configuration and the available reagent inventory.
Various hardware components are used to process assays. Not all assay types use every
component on the system. The system continues to process assays when the appropriate
hardware component is available.
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
NOTE: Control orders for calculated assays are processed independently of the configuration
parameter. The system software automatically runs one replicate of each constituent assay for
one reagent cartridge on one module. The cartridge and module are selected by the system
software.
All Reagent Selection options require the following conditions for the control order to process:
• A calibration for the assay either is available with a status of Active or Pending QC, or is in
process.
• Reagent cartridges with the same lot as the available or in-process calibration are loaded on
the system.
Module For each selected module, the system runs the control order
for each reagent lot or cartridge, based on the Run Controls
for Onboard Reagents by configuration parameter, if the
assay is configured for use on each selected module.
NOTE: The Module option is available only for multimodule
systems that have more that one module of the same type.
Auto The system runs the control order on each module with the
assay that is configured for use and for each reagent lot or
Select cartridge The system runs the control order for the selected reagent
cartridge if the cartridge status is OK, Low Alert, Overridden,
Disabled, or Mixing and the assay is configured for use on the
module where the selected reagent cartridge is located.
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
NOTE: The Module option is available only for multimodule systems that have more than one
module of the same type.
If the Reagent Selection option is Auto, the following conditions are applicable for all modules
that have an instrument status of Running or Processing when the calibrator samples are
scanned:
• The system calibrates all reagent lots that are loaded on the system when no reagent lots
for the assay have a calibration status of Active or Pending QC.
• The system calibrates all reagent lots that are loaded on the system when all reagent lots
for the assay have a calibration status of Active or Pending QC.
• The system calibrates only the reagent lots that are loaded on the system that do not have
a calibration status of Active or Pending QC when some reagent lots for the assay have a
calibration status of Active or Pending QC and some do not.
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
Create a calibration order, page 599
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
On a multimodule system, samples are routed to the first available processing module. If multiple
processing modules are available, the system first routes the samples to the numbered module
that has the lowest number.
Figure 145: RSM sample processing
After a sample rack or a vial rack for immediate use is loaded on the loading area of the RSM
and a run is initiated, the RSM performs the following functions:
1. The RSM transport moves to the position of the first rack according to the system software
prioritization and picks up the rack. The status indicator on the RSM is amber, which
indicates that the rack is being accessed by the RSM transport.
2. The RSM transport positions the rack for the bar code reader to identify the rack ID and the
SID. Then the RSM transport returns the rack to its original position in the loading area.
3. The system software determines if an order is present in the software for each sample in
the rack. If no orders are present and the system is configured for host order queries, the
user interface computer sends a query to the host.
4. The RSM transport moves the rack to an available sample positioner lane if an order is
present or a query returns a test order. If a sample positioner lane is not available, the rack
remains on the loading area until a sample positioner lane is available.
5. The sample positioner moves the rack to the aspiration position.
6. The sample pipettor aspirates the sample.
7. The sample positioner moves the rack to the transport position.
8. The RSM transport picks up the rack and, if necessary, moves the rack to a sample
positioner on the next processing module if a sample positioner is available. Then the RSM
transport returns the rack to its original position on the loading area.
NOTE: If a sample positioner is not available on the next processing module, the rack is
returned to its original position on the loading area until a sample positioner on the next
module is available.
9. The status indicator blinks green after all samples in the rack are aspirated.
If the system is configured to reposition samples for reruns automatically, the status
indicator is amber until all reruns are aspirated.
If tests are added to a sample or reruns are requested before the sample is unloaded, the
status indicator changes from blinking green to amber while the sample is reaspirated.
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) sample processing for onboard calibrators and
controls
After an onboard vial rack is loaded on the loading area of the reagent and sample manager
(RSM) and a run is initiated, the required sample processing is completed and the rack is loaded
in the reagent carousel.
On a multimodule system, samples are routed to the first available processing module. If multiple
processing modules are available, the system first routes the samples to the numbered module
that has lowest number.
NOTE: All vials in the onboard vial rack must meet the criteria for onboard storage.
Onboard vial racks are processed as priority racks regardless of the position of the rack on the
loading area of the RSM.
Onboard stability tracking occurs when the software schedules the rack to be loaded on the
system. The onboard stability tracking of calibrators and controls continues when the rack is
unloaded.
After an onboard vial rack is loaded on the loading area of the RSM and a run is initiated, the
RSM performs the following functions:
1. The RSM transport moves to the position of the first onboard vial rack according to the
system software prioritization and picks up the rack. The status indicator on the RSM is
amber, which indicates that the rack is being accessed by the RSM transport.
2. The RSM transport positions the onboard vial rack for the bar code reader to identify the
rack ID and the SID. Then the RSM transport returns the rack to its original position on the
loading area.
3. The system software determines if an order is present in the software for each calibrator set
and control in the onboard vial rack. If no orders are present, the samples are evaluated to
determine whether automated orders for calibration sets and controls can be created.
4. If no automated orders are created, the onboard vial rack is scheduled to be loaded in the
reagent carousel. The RSM transport loads the onboard vial rack on the reagent positioner
according to the processing priorities of the RSM.
5. The reagent transport moves the onboard vial rack to an available position in the reagent
carousel for storage.
NOTE: If the onboard vial rack cannot be loaded in the reagent carousel, the rack remains
in its original position on the loading area and the status indicator blinks green.
6. If sample processing is required as a result of existing or automated orders, the onboard vial
rack is moved to an available sample positioner lane and sample processing is completed
according to the processing priorities of the RSM.
7. After all sample processing is completed, the onboard vial rack is processed as described in
steps 4 and 5.
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
Racks, page 144
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
Racks, page 144
Cal/QC Inventory screen, page 518
NOTE: Regardless of these criteria, available reagent cartridges are used before cartridges that
have a status of Mixing.
When more than one reagent cartridge is required for an assay, the cartridges are linked
together when loaded on the system and are evaluated as a set.
Constituents of calculated assays that use the same reagent cartridge must be run with the
same reagent lot.
Related information...
Sample processing, page 562
Create a specimen order, page 595
Create a control order, page 597
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. If loading calibrators or controls, verify that they are within the expiration date on the bottle
label. Do not use calibrators or controls that are expired.
2. Refer to the assay documentation to determine the minimum sample volume that is required
in the sample cup or tube for the tests to be processed.
NOTE: The minimum sample volume information is printed in the Order List Report.
3. Use the sample gauge to verify that the sample volume in an aliquot tube is adequate:
a. Load the aliquot tube into the sample rack so that the sample volume is visible in the
sample rack window [1].
b. Verify that the amount of sample in the aliquot tube exceeds the 8 mm sample gauge
line [2].
IMPORTANT: Do not use the sample gauge to verify aliquot tube volumes for c-series
whole blood applications.
4. Verify that the sample volume above the separation point (clot, gel separator, or plasma or
red cell interface) in a primary tube is a minimum of 8 mm.
5. Use the sample cup volume graduation marks to verify that the sample volume in a sample
cup is adequate.
6. If loading non-bar-coded samples, print the Order List Report to ensure that each sample is
loaded in the correct rack and position.
IMPORTANT: The operator has a responsibility to load the correct sample in the correct
rack and position.
7. Load the sample into the sample rack so that the sample bar code, if used, is visible in the
sample rack window and the bar code fills the width of the window.
IMPORTANT: If loading sample cups or tubes, ensure that they are pushed down
completely in the sample rack and they are not tilted.
Avoid splashing the sample outside the sample cups or tubes.
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
Sample bar code label requirements, page 416
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Load racks on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 526
Automated control ordering, page 579
Create a specimen order, page 595
Create a control order, page 597
Create a calibration order, page 599
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for immediate use
Prerequisite For instructions for calibrator or control handling and use, see
the assay documentation.
Perform this procedure to prepare and load calibrator or control vials for assay processing on
the Alinity ci-series.
NOTE: To ensure correct in-use stability tracking status, do not move the vials to a processing
module that is controlled by a different system control module.
In-use stability tracking occurs after the vial is scanned by the RSM bar code reader. After the
vial is removed from the reagent and sample manager, the timer for in-use stability tracking
stops. For vials that are stored on the system, the timer for in-use stability tracking stops when
the vials are returned to the reagent carousel.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Verify that the calibrators or controls are within the expiration dates on the vial labels. Do
not use calibrators or controls that are expired.
NOTE: When a calibrator or control vial is scanned by the RSM bar code reader, the Alinity
ci-series tracks and maintains a record of the calibrator lot number and expiration date or
the control lot number and expiration date.
2. Inspect each vial for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a clean applicator stick before
performing sample processing. Use a new applicator stick for each vial to prevent cross
contamination.
3. Open each vial and discard the caps.
4. Place each vial in the white vial rack with standoffs so that the vial bar code is visible in the
rack window and the bar code fills the width of the window.
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
Load racks and cartridges into trays, page 523
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for onboard storage, page 549
Automated control ordering, page 579
Automated calibration ordering, page 581
Create a calibration order, page 599
NOTE: Verify that each processing module has adequate supplies and reagents before initiating
or resuming sample processing.
1. On the menu bar, tap the Home icon.
2. On the Home screen, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap one or more of the processing modules or the RSM.
– Tap one or more of the processing modules and the RSM.
3. Tap Run.
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
Verify the reagent carousel inventory, page 547
Verify the supply and waste inventory, page 508
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
Sample Status screen, page 603
Search for or filter data, page 664
• Blinking green
• Steady green
• Alternating green and amber
Perform this procedure to unload samples from the RSM when the samples are not needed on
the system.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
IMPORTANT: When transporting or unloading racks, avoid splashing the samples outside the
sample cups and tubes.
1. Slide the rack, or the tray that contains the rack, out of the RSM.
2. Remove the samples from the rack.
3. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container.
4. Store the remaining samples according to laboratory guidelines.
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
Perform this procedure to unload calibrator or control vials from the RSM when the calibrator or
control is not needed on the system.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
IMPORTANT: When transporting or unloading racks, avoid splashing the calibrators or controls
outside the vials.
1. Slide the rack, or the tray that contains the rack, out of the RSM.
NOTE: In-use stability tracking occurs after a vial is scanned by the bar code reader. After
the vial is removed from the RSM, the timer for in-use stability tracking stops.
For information about reagent in-use stability, see the assay documentation.
2. Remove the vials from the rack.
NOTE: Racks that contain vials can be placed in refrigerated storage. To maintain reagent
in-use stability for storage, each vial must contain a replacement cap before the vials are
stored.
3. Place a new replacement cap on each vial to store the vials for future use.
NOTE: Empty vials without replacement caps can be discarded in a biohazard waste
container.
4. Store the vials in refrigerated storage according to instructions in the assay documentation.
Related information...
Sample management, page 562
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Automated ordering, page 578
Orders screen, page 584
Sample Status screen, page 603
Automated ordering
Order requests for specimens, controls, and calibrations can be created automatically. The
following list describes automated ordering capabilities according to sample type:
Related information...
Specimen, calibration, and control orders, page 578
Host orders, page 578
Automated control ordering, page 579
Automated calibration ordering, page 581
Automated retest of specimens, page 583
Host orders
Automated specimen ordering is available by using host computer downloads or host order
queries. For automated ordering by a host computer, the system must be configured to
communicate with the host.
Host computer Specimen orders are downloaded from the host computer to
download the user interface (UI) computer. When the bar code reader
scans a bar-coded specimen, and the host computer has
downloaded an order to the UI computer, the system
processes the order.
Rerun orders that are sent by the host computer are rerun if
the specimen has not been unloaded from the reagent and
sample manager. Orders that are downloaded can be viewed
on the Orders screen.
Host order query A specimen order is downloaded from the host computer to
the UI computer after a request is sent from the UI computer.
When the bar code reader scans a bar-coded specimen, and
an order does not exist on the UI computer, the UI computer
sends a query to the host computer.
If the host computer has an order request for the specimen,
the order is sent to the UI computer. When the order is
received, the order can be viewed on the Orders screen.
If the host computer has no order requests for the specimen
(or no record of the sample), a message is generated and is
displayed on the Host tab of the System Logs screen.
NOTE: If the host computer creates rerun orders, the orders
must be downloaded to the UI computer. The UI computer
does not send queries for rerun orders.
Related information...
Automated ordering, page 578
Configure host settings, page 211
Configure HL7 communication settings, page 214
Configure ASTM communication settings, page 217
Control vials in vial racks and onboard vial racks and bar-coded samples in sample racks are
evaluated when they are scanned by the RSM bar code reader for each processing module that
has an instrument status of Running or Processing.
The rack ID of a vial rack or an onboard vial rack notifies the system software that calibrators or
controls are loaded in the rack. The SID for controls in a vial rack or an onboard vial rack is
composed of the control lot number, the control level, and the vial serial number. The SID for
controls in a sample rack is composed of the control lot number and level, and QQQ is added to
the beginning of the SID.
The scanned bar code is compared to the configured single-constituent and multiconstituent
controls. If the bar code corresponds to a configured control lot number and level, and an order
for the control is present in the system software, the order is completed. The order is not
completed for a control vial that has a vial status of Empty, Expired, or LLS Error.
If no control order is present in the system software and the control vial meets the criteria to
create an automated order, the system automatically creates the order and processes the tests
for the SID. The order that is created can be viewed on the Orders screen.
NOTE: Control vials that are stored on the system are evaluated for automated control orders
every 15 minutes on each processing module that has an instrument status of Processing (and
when the instrument status transitions from Idle to Running or Processing).
On multimodule systems, automated control orders are evaluated on all processing modules on
which the analyte can be run.
Automated control orders are created for controls that have the Automated parameter on the
Control Configuration screen configured as Yes if the following criteria are met:
• No order has been created since the configured shift start time.
The order is created for all analytes that use the control lot number and level with an
onboard reagent lot or reagent lot and cartridge combination for assays configured to run
controls by using a cartridge.
• The time interval or test interval has been exceeded.
The order is created for each onboard reagent lot or reagent lot and cartridge combination.
NOTE: The time interval is determined from the configured shift start time and resets daily
at the shift start time. Orders that are created when the time interval is exceeded are
created independently from manual orders and those orders created as the result of a
configured test interval.
Orders are created for a calculated assay only when the Start Time parameter on the
Control Configuration screen is defined for the control level.
The test interval for an assay begins when an order for the control lot number and level is
completed without a Westgard failure or a quality control (QC) range failure. The interval is
based on the number of specimen tests initiated for the assay since the last valid order. The
test interval resets after it is exceeded and a valid control result is generated for the control
level and the analyte.
• The most recent control result for the analyte generated a Westgard failure or a QC range
failure.
Orders are created for the onboard reagent lot or reagent lot and cartridge combination.
NOTE: Orders are not created if the control is in an onboard vial rack that has been
assigned a position in the reagent carousel.
• A usable calibration is present for the assay that has not been verified by quality control or
a calibration order for the assay has a status of Scheduled or Running.
Automated control orders are created for controls that have the Automated parameter on the
Control Configuration screen configured as No when control samples are scanned by the RSM
bar code reader if no order has been created since the configured shift start time.
NOTE: The order is created for all analytes that use the control lot number and level if an
onboard reagent lot or reagent lot and cartridge combination is present.
Regardless of the configured option for the Automated parameter, automated control orders are
not created in the following instances:
• A control order that has a status of Pending is present.
• The reagent cartridge status is Disabled.
• The control vial status is Empty, Expired, or LLS Error.
Related information...
Automated ordering, page 578
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Edit a quality control, page 298
Manually create a new quality control lot, page 295
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for immediate use, page 572
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for onboard storage, page 549
Calibrator vials in vial racks and onboard vial racks are evaluated when they are scanned by the
RSM bar code reader for each processing module that has an instrument status of Running or
Processing.
The rack ID of a vial rack or an onboard vial rack notifies the system software that calibrators or
controls are loaded in the rack. The SID for calibrators in a vial rack or an onboard vial rack is
composed of the calibrator lot number and the vial serial number.
The scanned bar code is compared to the configured calibrator set. If the bar code corresponds
to a configured calibrator lot number and an order for the calibrator set is present in the system
software, the order is completed. No automated orders are created. The order is not completed
for a calibrator vial in the calibrator set that has a vial status of Empty, Expired, or LLS Error.
If no calibration order is present in the system software and the calibrator vial meets the criteria
to create an automated order, the system automatically creates and processes the order. The
order that is created can be viewed on the Orders screen.
NOTE: For c-series assays that are used for full and adjustment calibrations, calibrator vials are
evaluated first for the full calibration. If orders are not created for the full calibration, the
adjustment calibration is evaluated.
NOTE: Calibrator vials that are stored on the system are evaluated for automated calibration
orders every 15 minutes on each processing module that has an instrument status of Processing
(and when the instrument status transitions from Idle to Running or Processing).
On multimodule systems, automated calibration orders are evaluated on all processing modules
on which the analyte can be run.
Automated calibration orders are created if the following criteria are met:
• No calibration with a status of Active or Overridden is present for the assay.
Orders are created for each uncalibrated onboard reagent lot or reagent lot and cartridge
combination for assays configured to run calibrations by using a cartridge.
• All onboard reagent lots or reagent lot and cartridge combinations have a status of Active or
Overridden, but one or more lots or lot and cartridge combinations will expire within 8 hours.
Orders are created for the onboard reagent lots or reagent lot and cartridge combinations
that will expire if a calibration is not in process.
• The calibrator is a single-constituent calibrator, all onboard reagent lots or reagent lot and
cartridge combinations have a status of Active or Overridden, and no calibrations are in
process.
Orders are created for all onboard reagent lots or reagent lot and cartridge combinations.
NOTE: Order are not created if the calibrator is in an onboard vial rack that has been
assigned a position in the reagent carousel.
• The calibrator is in an onboard vial rack and a calibration that has a status of Active is
present, but the calibration will expire before the onboard vial rack is evaluated again, and
no calibrations are in process.
The order is created for each onboard reagent lot or reagent lot and cartridge combination
that will expire.
• The assay is a c-series assay that uses the factor data reduction method, and the
calibration is expired or will expire before the next evaluation interval.
Orders are created for all onboard reagent lots or reagent lot and cartridge combinations.
Related information...
Automated ordering, page 578
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for immediate use, page 572
Prepare and load vials into vial racks for onboard storage, page 549
Related information...
Automated ordering, page 578
Configure reagent and sample manager module settings, page 174
Load racks on the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 526
Orders screen
On the Orders screen, the operator can view specimen, control, calibration, and rerun orders.
The operator can perform the following functions:
• Find information about a specific order based on specified search criteria.
• Access the order information.
• Add a comment to a test order.
• Delete an order.
• Create a new specimen order, control order, or calibration order.
Related information...
Specimen, calibration, and control orders, page 578
Orders screen element descriptions, page 584
Orders screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 586
Order Details screen, page 588
Create Order screen, page 591
Descriptions of test statuses, page 601
Descriptions of processing codes, page 602
Delete a test from a sample order, page 602
System checkout, page 152
All Orders tab, Rerun tab, Specimen tab, Control tab, Calibrator tab
Displays rerun, specimen, control, and calibrator test orders. Order status information can be
filtered by order type by selecting the Rerun tab, Specimen tab, Control tab, or Calibrator tab.
Elements
R/P Displays the rack ID (R) and position (P) number. The rack/
position can be sorted in ascending order, first
alphanumerically by rack, and then numerically by position.
SID Displays the sample identification for the order, which can be
one of the following items:
• The bar code number or identification assigned to the
specimen.
Name Displays the name, which can be one of the following items:
• The patient's name.
• The control name with the control level number and the
control level name, if configured, for control orders.
• The calibrator or calibrator set name, CAL (only for i-
series), and the calibrator level for calibration orders.
Test Type Displays the sample type for the order: Specimen, Control, or
Calibrator. The Test Type column is displayed only on the All
Orders tab and the Rerun tab.
Time Displays the estimated time that the order will be completed
(in a 24-hour format). Time information is displayed for all
samples with a status of Running.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of test statuses, page 601
Descriptions of processing codes, page 602
Elements
Module Used to search by the module. The module number for orders
of calculated assays is 6 (the system control module).
Status Used to search by the test status. The Search flyout has four
test statuses:
• Pending
• In Process
• Scheduled
• Running
Test Type Used to search the results for a specific sample type. The
Search flyout has three options:
• Specimen
• Control
• Calibrator
Function buttons
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Order Details (Specimen, Control, and Calibrator) screen element descriptions, page 588
Add a comment to an order, page 590
Elements
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was
ordered.
Test Type Displays the sample type for the test: Specimen or Control.
Module/Position Displays the module number and position of the rack on the
loading area.
Time of Completion Displays the date and time that the tests in process were
completed.
Control Lot Displays the lot number of the control. This element is
displayed only for controls.
Calibrator Lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator. This element is
displayed only for calibrators.
Time of Completion Displays the date and time that the tests in process were
completed.
Date of Birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. This element is
displayed only for specimens.
Draw Date and Time Displays the date and time that the sample was drawn. This
element is displayed only for specimens.
Lot Expiration Displays the date and time of the control or calibrator lot
expiration. This element is not displayed for specimens.
Reagent Lot Displays the master lot number for the reagent.
Location Displays the location associated with the patient. This element
is displayed only for specimens.
Function buttons
Previous Displays the previous item when multiple items are selected.
Next Displays the next item when multiple items are selected.
Related information...
Order Details screen, page 588
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Order Details screen, page 588
Search for or filter data, page 664
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Create Order screen, Specimen tab element descriptions, page 591
Create Order screen, Control tab element descriptions, page 593
Create Order screen, Calibration tab element descriptions, page 594
Create a specimen order, page 595
Create a control order, page 597
Create a calibration order, page 599
Add a test to a specimen order, page 600
Elements
Rack Used to enter the rack ID in which samples are placed for
processing. This element is optional when bar-coded samples
are used.
Position Used to enter the position for the rack or sample on the
reagent carousel in which the sample is placed for
processing. This element is optional when bar-coded samples
are used.
Manual Dilution: 1 - Used to enter the dilution factor to calculate the sample
concentration automatically and to report the result.
Designate Sample Used to enter the S code on the Orders screen, the Results
STAT check box screen, and the Sample Status screen. The operator must
priority load the samples with the S code to process the
samples first.
Assays area
All option Displays all assays that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Assays Displays all assays that are available for a selected module.
Function buttons
Add Order Saves and navigates to the order on the Orders screen.
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Orders area
Rack Used to enter the rack ID in which samples are placed for
processing. This element is optional when bar-coded samples
are used.
Position Used to enter the position for the rack or sample on the
reagent carousel in which the sample is placed for
processing. This element is optional when bar-coded samples
are used.
Control Name Displays the control identification name that can be selected
from the drop-down list.
Control Lot Displays the control lot number that can be selected from the
drop-down list.
Control Level Displays the control level that can be selected from the drop-
down list.
Manual Dilution: 1 - Used to enter the dilution factor to calculate the sample
concentration automatically and to report the result.
Designate Sample Used to display the S code on the Orders screen, the Results
STAT check box screen, and the Sample Status screen. The operator must
priority load the samples with the S code to process the
samples first.
Assays area
All option Displays all assays that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Assays Displays all assays that are available for a selected module.
Function buttons
Add Order Saves and navigates to the order on the Orders screen.
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Rack Used to enter the rack ID in which samples are placed for
processing. This element is optional when bar-coded samples
are used.
Assays area
All option Displays all assays that are available on the system.
i-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity i
processing modules.
c-series option Displays all assays that are available on one or more Alinity c
processing modules.
Assays Displays all assays that are available for a selected module.
Function buttons
Add Order Saves and navigates to the order on the Orders screen.
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
read, the system automatically uses the scanned rack ID as the unique rack ID and the
sample is processed as entered.
– If the specimen was diluted manually, type the dilution factor in the Manual Dilution: 1 -
box.
NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. Assays that do not support manual
dilution are displayed as unavailable when a manual dilution is selected. For dilution
information, see the assay documentation.
– To display the STAT processing code for the SID, tap the Designate Sample STAT
check box.
NOTE: Samples that are designated as STAT must be priority loaded to be processed
as STAT samples.
4. In the Comments box, type additional information that is associated with the sample.
Comments are displayed and are printed with each test that is ordered for the sample.
5. Under Assays, tap an assay panel to run (or tap one or more of the individual assays to
run).
The number of selected assays is displayed.
NOTE: To filter the list of available assays, tap the option for i-series, c-series, or
Calculated.
To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap only the calculated assay.
The system automatically orders the assays that are necessary to complete the
calculation but does not release or report the results ordered by the system.
Constituent assays for some calculated immunoassays that are installed from an assay
file (assay numbers 3000 through 3999) cannot be ordered automatically by the system
and must be ordered separately. For specific assay requirements, see the assay
documentation.
– Tap the calculated assay and one or more of its constituent assays.
The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays that are necessary to
complete the calculation but does not release or report the constituent results ordered
by the system.
– Tap the calculated assay and all of its constituent assays.
The system releases and reports all results.
6. Tap Assay Options.
7. For each selected assay in the Assay Options flyout, perform the following steps if these
situations occur:
– If more than one processing module of the same type is configured for a system, under
Module Selection, tap Module to specify a processing module, and then tap the
appropriate module check boxes to override the system module scheduler.
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Reagent inventory processing, page 569
– To display the STAT processing code for the control, tap the Designate Sample STAT
check box.
NOTE: Controls that are designated as STAT must be priority loaded to be processed
as STAT controls.
6. Under Assays, tap an assay panel to run (or tap one or more of the individual assays to
run).
The number of selected assays is displayed.
NOTE: To filter the list of available assays, tap the option for i-series, c-series, or
Calculated.
7. Tap Assay Options.
8. For each selected assay in the Assay Options flyout, perform the following steps:
– Tap a Reagent Selection option to designate the reagent cartridge or the processing
module to run the control:
• The default is Auto. The system determines which reagent cartridge is used to
perform the test according to reagent inventory processing.
• If more than one reagent cartridge is loaded in the reagent carousel, tap Select
Cartridge, and then tap a reagent cartridge in the list.
• If more than one processing module of the same type is configured for a system,
tap Module to specify a processing module, and then tap the appropriate module
check boxes to override the system module scheduler.
– Under Dilution Protocols/Number of Replicates, if the default number of replicates for
one or more dilutions is incorrect, tap the correct number of replicates for each dilution.
IMPORTANT: For i-series assays, do not order more than 10 tests for each sample that
is loaded in sample cups.
For c-series ICT assays, do not order more than 15 tests for each sample that is loaded
in sample cups or tubes.
The total number of tests for each sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and
available reagent lots for the order.
9. To save the assay option selections, tap Done.
10. To save the control order, tap Add Order.
11. To view the control order, tap Order Status.
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Install assay files, page 272
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Reagent inventory processing, page 569
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Install assay files, page 272
Load samples into sample racks, page 569
Calibration sample processing, page 564
– If more than one processing module of the same type is configured for a system, under
Module Selection, tap Module to specify a processing module, and then tap the
appropriate module check boxes to override the system module scheduler.
– Under Dilution Protocols/Number of Replicates, if the default number of replicates for
one or more dilutions is incorrect, tap the correct number of replicates for each dilution.
IMPORTANT: For i-series assays, do not order more than 10 tests for each sample
loaded in sample cups.
For c-series ICT assays, do not order more than 15 tests for each sample loaded in
sample cups or tubes.
The total number of tests for each sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and
available reagent lots for the order.
7. To save the assay option selections, tap Done.
8. To save the additional specimen order, tap Add Order.
9. To view the additional specimen order, tap Order Status.
Related information...
Create Order screen, page 591
Search for or filter data, page 664
Pending The test is ordered, but the RSM bar code reader has not
scanned the corresponding sample.
Scheduled The test is ordered and the sample is scanned by the RSM
bar code reader, but the instrument has not aspirated the
sample.
In Process For a calculated test, the tests that are necessary to calculate
the test result are in process.
Exception The test order failed and a test result was not generated.
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Orders screen element descriptions, page 584
Sample Status screen element descriptions, page 604
Orders screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 586
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Results screen, page 616
Orders screen element descriptions, page 584
Sample Status screen element descriptions, page 604
Results screen, Unreleased tab element descriptions, page 617
Results screen, Specimen tab element descriptions, page 618
Perform this procedure to delete a test that does not need to be processed.
1. On the menu bar, tap Orders.
2. In the list on the Orders screen, tap one or more tests (or tap Select All).
Related information...
Orders screen, page 584
Search for or filter data, page 664
Related information...
Specimen, calibration, and control orders, page 578
Sample Status screen element descriptions, page 604
Sample Status screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 606
Sample Details screen, page 608
Rerun a test or an exception for a specimen or control, page 612
Release a specimen result or a control result, page 614
Suspend and access a sample that has tests in process, page 575
Sample status information can be filtered by sample type by selecting the Specimen tab,
Control tab, or Calibrator tab.
Elements
SID Name SID: Displays the sample identification, which can be one of
the following items:
• The bar code number or identification assigned to the
specimen.
• The control name and level.
• The calibrator name and level.
R/P M/P R/P: Displays the rack ID (R) and position (P) number. The
rack/position can be sorted in ascending order, first
alphanumerically by rack, and then numerically by position.
M/P: Displays the module number (M) and position (P) of the
rack on the loading area. The M/P is displayed in green text.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Sample Status screen, page 603
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of test statuses, page 601
Descriptions of processing codes, page 602
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Elements
Find Sample Used to select a location in the database to find the sample.
The Search flyout has two options:
Function buttons
Related information...
Sample Status screen, page 603
Search flyout, page 664
Related information...
Sample Status screen, page 603
Sample Details (Specimen, Control, and Calibrator) screen element descriptions, page 608
Add a comment to a result or an exception, page 612
Elements
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was
processed.
Module/Position Displays the module number and position of the rack on the
loading area.
Time of Completion Displays the date and time that the tests in process were
completed.
Date of Birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. This element is
displayed only for specimens.
Transmission Status Displays the status of the test transmission to the host. This
element is not displayed for calibrators.
Released By Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was
released. This element is not displayed for calibrators.
Control Lot Exp. Displays the expiration date of the control lot.
Calibration Method Displays the data reduction method used for the assay.
Calibrator Lot Exp. Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot.
Absorbance/mV (c- Displays the response value used to calculate the result:
series)
• Millivolt (only for ICT)
• Absorbance (only for photometric assays)
RLU (i-series) Displays the response value in relative light units that is used
to calculate the result.
Normal Range Displays the normal or therapeutic range for the assay. This
element is displayed only for specimens.
Control Range Displays the control range configured for the assay. If a
control range is not configured, the control range that is
displayed is calculated based on the configured expected
mean and expected standard deviation (1 SD). This element is
displayed only for controls.
Cuvette (c-series) Displays the number of the cuvette used to process the test.
This element is not displayed for calibrators.
Reagent Lot Displays the master lot number for the reagent.
Location Displays the location associated with the patient. This element
is displayed only for specimens.
Draw Date and Time Displays the date and time that the sample was drawn. This
element is displayed only for specimens.
Archive Status Displays the archive status of the test: Archived or Not
Archived. This element is not displayed for calibrators.
Archive Date and Time Displays the date and time that the test was archived. This
element is not displayed for calibrators.
Function buttons
Previous Displays the previous item when multiple items are selected.
Next Displays the next item when multiple items are selected.
Related information...
Sample Details screen, page 608
Results screen:
– On the menu bar, tap Results.
The default is the Unreleased tab.
– To add a comment to a released specimen, a released control, or an exception, tap the
appropriate tab.
NOTE: To filter the list, tap Search.
2. In the list, tap one or more results or exceptions (or tap Select All).
3. Tap Details.
4. In the Comment box, type additional information that is associated with the result or
exception.
Comments are displayed and are printed with the result or exception. In addition, comments
for samples and tests are displayed if comments were entered.
5. If more than one result or exception was selected, tap Next or Previous to display each
order, and then type a comment for each order.
6. To save the comments, tap Done.
Related information...
Sample Details screen, page 608
Results screen, page 616
Result Details screen, page 624
Search for or filter data, page 664
Results screen:
– On the menu bar, tap Results.
The default is the Unreleased tab.
– To rerun an exception, tap the Exception tab.
NOTE: To filter the list, tap Search.
4. In the list, tap one or more tests to rerun (or tap Select All).
NOTE: To rerun a calculated assay, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap only the calculated assay.
The system automatically orders the assays that are necessary to complete the
calculation but does not release or report the results ordered by the system.
Constituent assays for some calculated immunoassays that are installed from an assay
file (assay numbers 3000 through 3999) cannot be ordered automatically by the system
and must be ordered separately. For specific assay requirements, see the assay
documentation.
– Tap the calculated assay and one or more of its constituent assays.
The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays that are necessary to
complete the calculation but does not release or report the constituent results ordered
by the system.
– Tap the calculated assay and all of its constituent assays.
The system releases and reports all results.
5. Tap Rerun.
6. For each selected assay in the Rerun Options flyout, perform the following steps:
Related information...
Sample Status screen, page 603
Sample specifications and requirements, page 420
Results screen, page 616
Search for or filter data, page 664
Results screen:
– On the menu bar, tap Results.
The default is the Unreleased tab.
NOTE: To filter the list, tap Search.
2. In the list, tap one or more tests to release (or tap Select All).
3. Tap Release.
Related information...
Sample Status screen, page 603
Delete a quality control, page 302
Results screen
On the Results screen, the operator can view the following information:
• Specimen and control results
• Specimen and control exceptions
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Results screen, Unreleased tab element descriptions, page 617
Results screen, Specimen tab element descriptions, page 618
Results screen, Control tab element descriptions, page 620
Results screen, Exception tab element descriptions, page 621
Results screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 622
Result Details screen, page 624
Rerun Options flyout, specimen order element descriptions, page 628
Rerun Options flyout, control order element descriptions, page 629
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Descriptions of transmission statuses, page 634
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c-series), page 634
Delete a sample result or an exception, page 635
Transmit a result or an exception to the host, page 635
Rerun a test or an exception for a specimen or control, page 612
Release a specimen result or a control result, page 614
Descriptions of processing codes, page 602
Archive the results, page 668
Add a comment to a result or an exception, page 612
Elements
Module ID Displays the number of the module used to process the test.
The module number for results of calculated assays is 6
(system control module).
Name Displays the name, which can be one of the following items:
• The name of the specimen.
• The control name with the control level number and the
control level name, if configured, for control orders.
• The calibrator or calibrator set name, CAL (only for i-
series), and the calibrator level for calibration orders.
Time Displays the date and time that the test completed processing.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Release Moves the selected test results to the Specimen tab or the
Control tab.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Descriptions of processing codes, page 602
Elements
Module ID Displays the number of the module used to process the test.
The module number for results of calculated assays is 6 (the
system control module).
Time Displays the date and time that the test completed processing.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Elements
Module ID Displays the number of the module used to process the test.
The module number for results of calculated assays is 6 (the
system control module).
Lot Displays the lot number of the control that was processed.
Flag Displays the flags associated with the quality control results.
Time Displays the date and time that the test completed processing.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Elements
Module ID Displays the number of the module used to process the test.
Test Type Displays the type of sample that was ordered: Specimen,
Control, or Calibrator.
Status Displays the status of the exception, which can be one of the
following statuses:
Message Code Displays the numeric message code for the exception and the
message text that describes the error.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Release Marks the exception with a Released status and releases the
exception for transmission to the host computer.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Module Used to search by the module. The module number for the
results of calculated assays is 6 (the system control module).
Results with Used to search the results that have one of the following
associated items:
• Flags
• Interpretations
Test Type Used to search the results for a specific sample type. The
Search flyout has two test types:
• Specimen
• Control
Function buttons
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Result Details (Specimen and Control) screen element descriptions, page 624
Add a comment to a result or an exception, page 612
Elements
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was
processed.
Sample Type Displays the sample type for the test: Specimen or Control.
Module/Position Displays the module number and position of the rack on the
loading area.
Time of Completion Displays the date and time that the tests in process were
completed.
Date of Birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. This element is
displayed only for specimens.
Transmission Status Displays the status of the test transmission to the host. This
element is not displayed for calibrators.
Released By Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was
released. This element is not displayed for calibrators.
Control Lot Exp. Displays the expiration date of the control lot.
Absorbance/mV (c- Displays the response value used to calculate the result:
series)
• Millivolt (only for ICT)
• Absorbance (only for photometric assays)
RLU (i-series) Displays the response value in relative light units that is used
to calculate the result.
Normal Range Displays the normal or therapeutic range for the assay. This
element is displayed only for specimens.
Control Range Displays the control range configured for the assay. If a
control range is not configured, the control range that is
displayed is calculated based on the configured expected
mean and expected standard deviation (1 SD). This element is
displayed only for controls.
Cuvette (c-series) Displays the number of the cuvette used to process the test.
This element is not displayed for calibrators.
Reagent Lot Displays the master lot number for the reagent.
Location Displays the location associated with the patient. This element
is displayed only for specimens.
Draw Date and Time Displays the date and time that the sample was drawn. This
element is displayed only for specimens.
Archive Status Displays the archive status of the test: Archived or Not
Archived. This element is not displayed for calibrators.
Archive Date and Time Displays the date and time that the test was archived. This
element is not displayed for calibrators.
Function buttons
Previous Displays the previous item when multiple items are selected.
Next Displays the next item when multiple items are selected.
Related information...
Result Details screen, page 624
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Module Selection
Dilution Protocols / Used to select the correct number of replicates for each
Number of Replicates dilution protocol.
Function buttons
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Elements
Sample ID Displays the control lot number and level number. Bar-coded
controls include a serial number when quality controls are run
in a vial rack. Bar-coded controls include the prefix QQQ
followed by the control lot number and level when the controls
are run in a sample rack.
Reagent Selection
Dilution Protocols / Used to select the correct number of replicates for each
Number of Replicates dilution protocol.
Function buttons
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
• Reagent
• Supply
• Onboard solution
A#1* (c-series) The result was calculated by using the only reading, of all the
readings in the main or flex reading window, that has
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range.
This condition can occur when the result concentration is high
or the sample is lipemic.
A#2* (c-series) The result was calculated by using the only two readings, of
all the readings in the main or flex reading window, that have
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range.
This condition can occur when the result concentration is high
or the sample is lipemic.
CNTL* The result was calculated after the quality control failed.
The flag is displayed on subsequent results until the failed
quality control (QC) result is rerun for the same control name
and control level and the result is within acceptable limits.
When out-of-range QC results are deleted, the CNTL flag is
not removed from patient results.
NOTE: Only Westgard rules that are configured as a failure
produce a CNTL flag for a patient result.
< or > The result falls outside the dynamic or linear range.
NOTE: For c-series assays, the displayed value is the result
of an adjustment by the sample dilution factor. Additionally,
the displayed > value reflects an adjustment by the entered
correlation factor and intercept for assays that use nonlinear
calibration methods when the sample absorbance exceeds
the highest calibrator absorbance.
FLEX* (c-series) The result was calculated by using the reading data that was
measured during the flex read time.
PSHH* (c-series ICT The result may be affected by the ICT sample that was
assays) measured immediately before this sample. The sample must
be rerun to verify that no affects have occurred.
LOW or HIGH The result falls outside the defined normal range.
NOTE: The result is rounded to the reporting number of
decimals for an assay and then is compared against the
range.
* These flags are carried over from a constituent assay result to a calculated assay result.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Sample Status screen element descriptions, page 604
Results screen, Unreleased tab element descriptions, page 617
Results screen, Specimen tab element descriptions, page 618
A#1 result flag (c-series), page 1270
A#2 result flag (c-series), page 1271
FLEX result flag (c-series), page 1276
PSHH result flag (c-series), page 1276
• Control material
• ICT module (only for c-series)
A#1* (c-series) The result was calculated by using the only reading, of all the
readings in the main or flex reading window, that has
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range.
This condition can occur when the result concentration is high
or the sample is lipemic.
A#2* (c-series) The result was calculated by using the only two readings, of
all the readings in the main or flex reading window, that have
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range.
This condition can occur when the result concentration is high
or the sample is lipemic.
< or > The result falls outside the dynamic or linear range.
NOTE: For c-series assays, the displayed value is the result
of an adjustment by the sample dilution factor. Additionally,
the displayed > value reflects an adjustment by the entered
correlation factor and intercept for assays that use nonlinear
calibration methods when the sample absorbance exceeds
the highest calibrator absorbance.
FLEX* (c-series) The result was calculated by using the reading data that was
measured during the flex read time.
PSHH* (c-series ICT The result may be affected by the ICT sample that was
assays) measured immediately before this sample. The sample must
be rerun to verify that no affects have occurred.
* These flags are carried over from a constituent assay result to a calculated assay result.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Sample Status screen element descriptions, page 604
Results screen, Unreleased tab element descriptions, page 617
Results screen, Control tab element descriptions, page 620
A#1 result flag (c-series), page 1270
A#2 result flag (c-series), page 1271
FLEX result flag (c-series), page 1276
PSHH result flag (c-series), page 1276
Pending transmission The test is completed, but the test is waiting to be transmitted
to the host.
Pending collation The test is completed, but the system is waiting for one of the
following actions to occur before the system transmits to the
host:
• All tests that are associated with the SID are completed.
• All tests that are associated with the SID on a specific
processing module are completed.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c-series)
Perform this procedure to view the reaction graphs and absorbance data for the released and
unreleased specimen and control results for c-series.
1. On the menu bar, tap Results.
The Unreleased tab on the Results screen is the default.
2. To view the reaction graph or absorbance data for a released specimen or a released
control, tap the appropriate tab.
NOTE: To filter the list of results, tap Search.
3. In the list on the tab, tap one or more results (or tap Select All).
4. Tap Details.
5. On the Result Details screen, tap Graph View to display the reaction graph and absorbance
data for the first result.
6. To edit the absorbance scale of the reaction graph, type the values in the Y Axis Scale
boxes, and then tap Rescale.
NOTE: Although an updated view of the reaction graph is displayed, edits to the Y axis scale
are not saved.
7. If more than one result was selected, tap Next or Previous to display the reaction graph
and absorbance data for each result.
8. To return to the reagent and additional information on the Result Details screen, tap Details
View.
9. To return to the Results screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Print a report, page 662
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
Search for or filter data, page 664
4. Tap Transmit.
Related information...
Results screen, page 616
User interface (UI) computer corrective action procedures, page 1306
IMPORTANT: Quality control issues must be evaluated and resolved before specimens are
tested.
The system evaluates quality control (QC) results by assay for each control lot. If reagents are
configured to be disabled when a control failure occurs, and a control failure occurs for one or
more reagent cartridges, the failure prevents the use of one or more of the cartridges.
A system configuration parameter determines whether controls are run for an assay for each
reagent lot or each reagent cartridge. If quality control is run for each reagent cartridge and any
control level fails, the individual reagent cartridge is disabled. If quality control is run for each
reagent lot and the last tested control level fails, all reagent cartridges for that lot are disabled,
including any cartridges that are subsequently loaded on the system. The system enables the
reagent cartridge or the reagent lot after the failed QC result is rerun and the result is within
acceptable limits.
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Westgard rule application, page 637
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
Related information...
Quality control analysis, page 637
Westgard rule descriptions, page 638
When a failure is identified, no further evaluation occurs. A CNTL flag is applied to each patient
result associated with an assay that has a control failure. The CNTL flag is not applied to patient
results for control failures that are configured as a warning.
The following list provides descriptions of the Westgard rules:
2 SD. Both control results must fall on the same side of the
mean.
Related information...
Westgard rule application, page 637
Westgard screen element descriptions, page 308
Start time for the first The quality control shift start time is defined for each c-series
run processing module and each i-series processing module by
configuring the Shift Start Time parameter on the Modules
screen. The system creates quality control orders at the
configured time for those controls for which the Automated
and Use Module Shift Time options are enabled.
The quality control shift start time is defined for a control by
configuring the Start Time parameter in the Control
Configuration area of the Control Create/Edit screen. The
system creates quality control orders at the configured time
for the control when the Automated option is enabled.
Related information...
Westgard rule application, page 637
Configure c-series module settings , page 174
Configure i-series module settings, page 175
Related information...
Quality control analysis, page 637
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen element descriptions, page 641
Point Details screen element descriptions, page 644
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 646
Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 646
View the details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 647
Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 647
Elements
Comparison Type Displays the source of the mean and standard deviation (SD)
used to compare to the expected mean and SD.
The following comparison types are available in the drop-
down list:
• None
• Manufacturer
• Module Cumulative
• System Cumulative
Selected Data Range Displays control data for the date range selected on the
Quality Control Summary screen.
Displayed Data Range Displays the date range of the displayed points. As the graph
is navigated, the displayed data range changes to reflect the
points being viewed.
Comparison Mean Displays the mean used to compare to the expected control
mean. Information that is displayed is determined by the
comparison type selected.
Graph elements
Mean Represented by the center line of the graph and indicates the
expected control mean.
+1 SD and -1 SD Represented by the first line above and below the mean
(green area).
+2 SD and -2 SD Represented by the second line above and below the mean
(yellow area).
+3 SD and -3 SD Represented by the third line above and below the mean (red
area).
Points Control results that fall within the defined control range and
do not fail configured Westgard rules are represented by a
black dot and are graphed in the order of completion.
Control points that caused a warning condition based on the
Westgard analysis are represented by a yellow dot.
Control points that failed Westgard analysis are represented
by a red dot.
Control points beyond +/- 3 SD are shown as a horizontal line.
Excluded control points are represented by a white circle with
a black dot.
Function buttons
Related information...
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Control Lot Exp. Displays the expiration date of the control lot.
Time of Completion Displays the date and time that the control result was
generated.
Flags Displays the flags associated with the quality control result.
Reagent Lot Displays the master lot number for the reagent.
Module/Position Displays the module number and the position number in the
reagent carousel where the cartridge is loaded. Dashes are
displayed for the module and position number when the
cartridge is not loaded on the system.
Function buttons
Related information...
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 654
NOTE: The system software automatically excludes a control result that exceeds a value
that is six times the expected standard deviation (SD).
5. In the Comment box, type a reason for the inclusion or exclusion of the point.
NOTE: The comment replaces a previously entered comment.
After a point is included or excluded, the system software recalculates the cumulative mean,
SD, and sample size for the quality control (QC) data. Excluded points are not included in
the recalculation.
6. To recalculate the Westgard analysis, tap the Perform Westgard Re-evaluation check box.
NOTE: The system software does not recalculate the Westgard data if more than 5000 QC
data points are pending an adjustment.
7. To save the edits and return to the Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, tap Done.
8. To include or exclude another Levey-Jennings point, repeat steps 2, page 646 through 7,
page 647.
9. To return to the Quality Control Summary screen, tap QC Summary.
Related information...
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 654
Related information...
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 654
Related information...
Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, page 641
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 654
The system administrator can clear a control failure for an assay for a specific control, lot
number, and level.
Related information...
Quality control analysis, page 637
Quality Control Summary screen element descriptions, page 648
Control Summary Details screen, page 650
Clear Control Failure flyout element descriptions, page 653
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 654
Clear a control failure, page 656
View the quality control (QC) summary data, page 656
View the control summary details, page 657
Elements
Date Range Used to enter a date range to search or displays the control
summary information for the selected date range.
Update button Searches and displays data for the entered date range when
a new date is selected.
Level Displays the level for the control that was processed.
Actual Mean Displays the mean calculated for the level, lot, and assay for
a processing module and the specified date range.
Actual SD Displays the standard deviation calculated for the level, lot,
and assay for a processing module and the specified date
range.
Expected Mean Displays the expected mean configured for the control level.
Expected Range Displays the expected control range configured for the control
level.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
Control Summary Details screen element descriptions, page 650
Elements
Date Range Displays the default date range or the date range entered on
the Quality Control Summary screen.
Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number of the
module that processed the control.
NOTE: Module 6 displays the quality control summary data for
calculated assays.
Expected area
Manufacturer area
Mean Displays the calculated mean for the selected module and
date range.
NOTE: The statistical calculations in the Module Date Range
area are based on all released results. These calculations
N Displays the number of data points in the control file for the
selected module and date range.
Range Displays the range of values in the control file for the selected
module and date range.
Mean Displays the calculated mean for the data in the date range
for all modules of the same type in a multimodule system.
SD Displays the calculated SD for the data in the date range for
all modules of the same type in a multimodule system.
% CV Displays the calculated %CV for the data in the date range for
all modules of the same type in a multimodule system.
Range Displays the range of values in the control file in the date
range for all modules of the same type in a multimodule
system.
Range Displays the range of values in the control file for the selected
module.
Mean Displays the cumulative calculated mean for the data for all
modules of the same type in a multimodule system.
% CV Displays the cumulative calculated %CV for the data for all
modules of the same type in a multimodule system.
Range Displays the range of values in the control file for all modules
of the same type in a multimodule system.
Function buttons
Previous Displays the previous item when multiple items are selected.
Next Displays the next item when multiple items are selected.
Related information...
Control Summary Details screen, page 650
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Function buttons
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
5. In the list of QC summary data, tap a maximum of six assay control levels for the same
assay, control name, and lot number.
NOTE: To filter the list of QC summary data, tap Search.
A maximum of three Levey-Jennings graphs can be viewed on the Levey-Jennings (Graph)
screen at the same time for the same module, control name, and lot number. Use the scroll
bar to display the remaining graphs.
6. Tap Graph.
NOTE: The Graph button is unavailable if more than one assay or lot number is selected on
the Quality Control Summary screen.
7. On the Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, tap a comparison type in the Comparison Type
drop-down list:
– None: A comparison method is not used.
– Manufacturer: This method compares the expected mean and expected SD to the
manufacturer's mean and SD that are configured for the control.
NOTE: If Manufacturer is configured, the manufacturer's mean and SD are displayed
as the Comparison Mean and Comparison SD elements on the left side of the Levey-
Jennings (Graph) screen. A dashed line indicates the manufacturer's mean on the
graph.
– Module Cumulative: This method compares the expected mean and expected SD to
the cumulative mean and cumulative SD of the selected module.
NOTE: If Module Cumulative is configured, the module cumulative mean and module
cumulative SD are displayed as the Comparison Mean and Comparison SD elements
on the left side of the Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen. A dashed line indicates the
module cumulative mean on the graph.
– System Cumulative: This method compares the expected mean and expected SD to
the cumulative mean and cumulative SD of all modules in a multimodule system.
NOTE: If System Cumulative is configured, the system cumulative mean and system
cumulative SD are displayed as the Comparison Mean and Comparison SD elements
on the left side of the Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen. A dashed line indicates the
system cumulative mean on the graph.
8. To return to the Quality Control Summary screen, tap QC Summary.
NOTE: The previous selections for module, assay, control name, lot number, control level,
and date range are displayed on the Quality Control Summary screen.
9. To create a Levey-Jennings graph for another assay, repeat steps 2, page 654 through 8,
page 655.
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 646
Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 646
Perform this procedure to clear a control failure when the control material cannot be repeated to
obtain an acceptable value.
The control failure can occur as the result of a value that exceeds a control range or a
Westgard rule failure.
1. On the menu bar, tap QC.
On the Quality Control Summary screen, the quality control (QC) summary data for all
modules is displayed.
2. To display the QC summary data for one module, tap a Module button.
NOTE: Tap module 6 to display the QC summary data for calculated assays.
3. In the list of QC summary data, tap an assay control level that has a control failure.
NOTE: An assay control level that has a control failure is displayed in red text on the Quality
Control Summary screen.
4. Tap Clear Control Failure.
5. In the Comment box in the Clear Control Failure flyout, type a comment.
6. To save the comment and return to the Quality Control Summary screen, tap Done.
NOTE: After the control failure is cleared, the text of the assay control level is displayed in
black.
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
NOTE: Tap module 6 to display the QC summary data for calculated assays.
3. To enter a date range, type a value in the Date Range box and type a value in the To box.
NOTE: The default date range is composed of the last 31 days, including the current date.
4. Tap Update.
NOTE: Control results that were run between and on the entered dates are included in the
QC summary data.
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
Related information...
Quality Control Summary screen, page 648
Print flyout
Screen images, reports generated by the system, and Abbott Mail documentation can be printed
or can be saved as a portable document format (PDF) file. The system can be configured to
print or save the following reports automatically:
• Calibration details
• Result list
• Sample laboratory
• Maintenance
Reports and Abbott Mail documentation are available from related screens. The following table
provides the report availability:
To print the ... Access the ...
Abbott Mail Log Report System Logs screen
Absorbance Data Report (c- Results screen
series)
Assay Information Report • Assay Parameters screen
• Install/Uninstall Assays screen
Assay Insert Report • Abbott Mail Inbox screen
• Reagent Cartridge Details screen
Assay Installation Report • Assay Parameters screen
• Install/Uninstall Assays screen
• Abbott Mail Inbox screen
Assay Parameter Report Assay Parameters screen
Calibration Details Report Calibration Status screen
Calibration Summary Report Calibration Status screen
Calibrator Value Sheet • Calibrator Set screen
NOTE: A calibrator value sheet is available only for a calibrator lot
that was created from an imported file.
• Abbott Mail Inbox screen
Configuration Log Report System Logs screen
Control Insert Report Control Create/Edit screen
Diagnostic History Report Procedures Log screen
Exception List Report Results screen
Information Log Report System Logs screen
Inventory Log Report System Logs screen
Levey Jennings Report Levey-Jennings screen
Licenses Report Utilities screen
Maintenance History Report Procedures Log screen
Notifications Log Report System Logs screen
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Print flyout element descriptions, page 659
Report File Location window element descriptions, page 661
Print a report, page 662
Print a screen image, page 663
Print Options
Displays the print options for report selections.
Print Selection Displays the print selection options: All Items or Selected
Items.
If no items were selected on the previous screen, the default
is the All Items option. The Selected Items option is
unavailable.
If one or more items were selected on the previous screen,
the default is the Selected Items option. The All Items option
is available.
Report Selection Displays a list of the reports that are available to print. A
preview of the selected report is displayed before the report is
printed.
Fit Used to resize the PDF document to fit the window width ( )
and enable the scroll bar, or to resize the document to fit one
full page in the window ( ).
Find Used to find a word or phrase in the PDF document. The Find
Previous button and the Find Next button are used to browse
the document to find the word or phrase.
Function buttons
Related information...
Print flyout, page 658
Elements
Last Update Displays the date and time that the files in the folder were last
updated.
Function buttons
Related information...
Print flyout, page 658
Print a report
Required materials USB flash drive (Print to File option only)
Perform this procedure to print a system-generated report to a configured printer or to save the
report as a portable document format (PDF) file.
1. On a screen, tap one or more items to include in the report.
NOTE: Items are printed in the order in which they are displayed on the screen. If a specific
item is not selected, all items are printed.
2. Tap Print.
3. In the Print flyout, choose a printer or tap Print to File in the Print Location drop-down list.
4. In the Copies drop-down list, tap the number of copies to print (printer only).
5. Tap a Print Selection option.
NOTE: If one or more items were not selected, All items is the only available option.
6. In the Report Selection list, tap a report.
7. Tap Print.
8. If Print to File was selected in the Print Location drop-down list, perform the following
steps to indicate the file destination:
a. Insert a USB flash drive.
b. Tap the appropriate USB flash drive.
c. Tap the destination folder.
d. Tap OK.
e. Remove the USB flash drive.
9. To return to the screen, tap Done.
Related information...
Print flyout, page 658
User-Defined Maintenance screen, Create/Edit tab element descriptions, page 315
Reagents screen, page 533
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, page 479
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c-series), page 634
Perform this procedure to print a screen image to save graphical or troubleshooting information.
1. On the screen header, tap the Abbott A button .
2. If the system is configured to save the print screen output as a file, perform the following
steps to indicate the file destination:
a. Tap the appropriate USB flash drive.
b. Tap the destination folder.
c. To save the file to the destination folder, tap OK.
To cancel the save function, tap Cancel.
Related information...
Print flyout, page 658
Configure the print screen file output destination, page 198
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Search flyout
In the Search flyout, the operator can search for specific data by entering search criteria.
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Search for or filter data, page 664
Reagents screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 539
Orders screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 586
Sample Status screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 606
Related information...
Search flyout, page 664
Edit a user, page 162
Inactivate or activate a user, page 163
Manage user PINs, page 165
Verify vial inventory data, page 522
Reagents screen, page 533
Suspend and access a sample that has tests in process, page 575
Add a comment to an order, page 590
Add a test to a specimen order, page 600
Delete a test from a sample order, page 602
Add a comment to a result or an exception, page 612
Rerun a test or an exception for a specimen or control, page 612
Release a specimen result or a control result, page 614
Delete a sample result or an exception, page 635
Archive flyout
In the Archive flyout, the operator can archive specimen results, control results, or calibrations.
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Archive flyout element descriptions, page 666
Archive File Location window element descriptions, page 667
Archive the results, page 668
Archive the calibrations, page 669
Elements
Archive Options
Archive Selection Displays the archive options. The Archive flyout has three
options:
From Used to enter a start date. A start date is available only for
the All Items option and the Incremental option.
To Used to enter an end date. An end date is available only for
the All Items option and the Incremental option.
Archive Mode Displays the archive modes. The Archive flyout has two
archive modes:
Archive & Delete This option deletes data after all the
selected data has been archived to a
USB flash drive.
Function buttons
Related information...
Archive flyout, page 666
Elements
Last Update Displays the date and time that files in the folder were last
updated.
Function buttons
Related information...
Archive flyout, page 666
Perform this procedure to archive specimen and control results on a USB flash drive.
NOTE: The results are archived in an Excel file format and can be imported into a spreadsheet.
The archived results cannot be viewed on the Alinity ci-series.
1. Insert the USB flash drive.
2. On the menu bar, tap Results.
The Unreleased tab of the Results screen is the default.
3. To archive released samples or released controls, tap the appropriate tab.
4. In the list on the tab, tap one or more results (or tap Select All).
NOTE: To filter the list of results, tap Search.
5. Tap Archive.
6. Under Archive Options in the Archive flyout, tap an Archive Selection option:
– All items: This option archives all results within a defined date range.
To enter a date range, tap From and enter a start date, tap To and enter an end date,
or enter both a start date and an end date.
– Incremental: This option archives all results that do not have a status of Archived within
a defined date range.
To enter a date range, tap From and enter a start date, tap To and enter an end date,
or enter both a start date and an end date.
– Selected items: This option is available only if results were selected in step 4.
7. Tap an Archive Mode option:
– Only Archive: This option saves archived results to a USB flash drive.
– Archive & Delete: This option deletes results after all the selected results have been
archived to a USB flash drive.
NOTE: Results with a status of Pending Transmission or Pending Collation are not
deleted.
8. Tap Archive.
9. On the Archive File Location screen, tap the USB flash drive and folder to which to archive
the results.
10. Tap OK.
11. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap one of the following buttons:
– Tap Yes to complete the archive process.
– Tap No to close the Archive flyout.
12. Remove the USB flash drive.
Related information...
Archive flyout, page 666
Delete a quality control, page 302
Results screen, page 616
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Perform this procedure to archive active and inactive calibrations on a USB flash drive.
NOTE: The calibrations are archived in an Excel file format and can be imported into a
spreadsheet. The archived calibrations cannot be viewed on the Alinity ci-series.
1. Insert the USB flash drive.
2. On the menu bar, tap CAL.
The Current tab of the Calibration Status screen displays the calibration data for all
modules.
3. On the Calibration Status screen, tap the Historical tab.
4. On the Historical tab of the Calibration Status screen, tap one or more calibrations (or tap
Select All).
NOTE: To filter the list of calibrations, tap Search.
5. Tap Archive.
6. Under Archive Options in the Archive flyout, tap an Archive Selection option:
– All items: This option archives all calibrations within a defined date range.
To enter a date range, tap From and enter a start date, tap To and enter an end date,
or enter both a start date and an end date.
– Incremental: This option archives all calibrations that do not have a status of Archived
within a defined date range.
To enter a date range, tap From and enter a start date, tap To and enter an end date,
or enter both a start date and an end date.
– Selected items: This option is available only if calibrations were selected in step 4.
7. Tap an Archive Mode option:
– Only Archive: This option saves archived calibrations to a USB flash drive.
– Archive & Delete: This option deletes inactive calibrations after all the selected
calibrations have been archived to a USB flash drive.
NOTE: If Archive & Delete is selected, only calibrations that have a status of Inactive are
deleted. If calibrations that have a status of Active are selected, an informational message
notifies the operator that calibrations are not deleted.
8. Tap Archive.
9. On the Archive File Location screen, tap the USB flash drive and folder to which to archive
the calibrations.
10. Tap OK.
11. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap one of the following buttons:
– Tap Yes to complete the archive process.
– Tap No to close the Archive flyout.
12. Remove the USB flash drive.
Related information...
Archive flyout, page 666
Search for or filter data, page 664
Insert and remove a USB flash drive, page 671
Calibration review, page 701
3. After the procedure that uses the USB flash drive is completed, remove the USB flash drive
from the USB port.
4. Close the SCM front door.
Related information...
Operating instructions, page 427
Import a system update, page 339
Introduction
Calibration is the process used to analyze calibrators of a known concentration, to record
system response values, and to plot measured values against the known concentration.
Before performing sample processing, calibrate all assays.
Related information...
Calibration guidelines, page 674
Calibration types and methods, page 675
Calibration storage, page 699
Calibration review, page 701
Operating instructions, page 427
Create a calibration order, page 599
Calibration guidelines
After an assay is installed that requires a calibration, an active calibration must be generated. A
calibration is not required every time that an assay is run. However, a recalibration is required
with certain variables.
Related information...
Calibration procedures, page 673
Related information...
Calibration procedures, page 673
Calibration method (c-series potentiometric), page 675
Calibration types and methods (c-series photometric), page 680
Calibration types and methods (i-series), page 690
Related information...
Calibration types and methods, page 675
Electromotive force measurement (c-series potentiometric), page 675
Slope calculation (c-series potentiometric), page 676
Sample measurement (c-series potentiometric), page 678
Where:
T Time
Related information...
Calibration method (c-series potentiometric), page 675
calibrator concentrations to generate a calibration curve. When the calculation occurs, the
system software generates two graphs:
• A calibration graph that shows the relationship between the ion concentration and the
electromotive force
• An electrode response curve during calibration
Figure 147: Relationship between the ion concentration and the electromotive force
ΔEL, ΔEH Potential difference between the ICT Reference Solution and
the calibrator for each electrode
Where:
ΔEL, ΔEH Potential difference between the ICT Reference Solution and
the calibrator for each electrode
T Time
Related information...
Calibration method (c-series potentiometric), page 675
• The difference between the electromotive forces of the low calibrator and the ICT
Reference Solution
• The slope of the specific ICT electrode
Where:
T Time
ICT index
An index solution can be used to compensate for differences between ICT modules, day-to-day
instrument variations, and matrix differences between calibrators and patient samples. The index
solution is a sample with a known concentration and is used during calibration of an ICT analyte.
After calibration is completed, sample measurements are adjusted automatically.
Measured sample values are adjusted by using the following equation:
Conc' = Conc - (Comp' - Comp)
Where:
The measured value of the index solution for the specific analyte is calculated by using the
following equation:
− 𝝙𝗘𝗟 / 𝗦
𝗖𝗶 = 𝗖𝗟 × 𝟭𝟬 𝝙𝗘𝗶
NOTE: When the index concentration is set to zero, the index value is not calculated.
Related information...
Calibration method (c-series potentiometric), page 675
Related information...
Calibration types and methods, page 675
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
Adjustment calibration (c-series photometric), page 687
Related information...
Calibration types and methods (c-series photometric), page 680
Absorbance method (c-series photometric), page 681
Factor method (c-series photometric), page 681
Linear method (c-series photometric), page 682
Logit-4 method (c-series photometric), page 684
Spline method (c-series photometric), page 685
Use factor and blank method (c-series photometric), page 687
Related information...
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
Related information...
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
Where:
Abs Absorbance
Conc Concentration
The absorbance or absorbance change that is measured for the sample determines which of the
following equations are used to calculate the sample concentration.
When A ≤ Ac1, X = F1 x (A - Ablk) + blk
𝗖𝟭 − 𝗯𝗹𝗸
𝗙𝟭 = 𝗔𝗰𝟭 − 𝗔𝗯𝗹𝗸
Where:
Related information...
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
Where:
Abs Absorbance
Conc Concentration
𝗞𝗰
𝗔 = 𝟭
+ 𝗔𝗯𝗹𝗸
𝟭 +
𝗲 𝗮 + 𝗯 × 𝗹𝗻𝗫
Where:
ln Natural log
When the concentration is near zero, the logit-4 calibration curve converges asymptotically
toward the absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank as the concentration
approaches zero. A graph may not show this convergence if the scale is too large.
The approximation expression is simple and the constant is determined through an approximation
by nonlinear regression. Therefore, the curve may not consistently pass through the absorbance
(or absorbance change) data points of the calibrator.
A parameter is available to detect an error if the standard deviation of the absorbance or
absorbance change of the calibrators exceeds a specified value.
Related information...
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
Where:
Abs Absorbance
Conc Concentration
Related information...
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
Where:
Related information...
Full calibration (c-series photometric), page 681
The system software uses the new measurements to adjust the existing calibration data points
and then generates a new calibration curve.
The adjustment calibration interval is updated when either a full calibration or a designated
adjustment calibration is performed.
The c-series provides the following adjustment options:
• Blank adjustment
• 1-point adjustment
• 2-point adjustment
Related information...
Calibration types and methods (c-series photometric), page 680
Blank adjustment (c-series photometric), page 688
1-point adjustment (c-series), page 688
2-point adjustment (c-series), page 689
Create a calibration order, page 599
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (c-series photometric), page 687
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement (A2') for the
designated adjustment calibrator (A2).
2 A ratio (R) that compares the new (A2') and previous (A2)
absorbance data is calculated:
All other calibrators (A1 and A3) are adjusted by using the
calculated ratio. The adjusted absorbance values are A1' and
A3'. The reagent blank is not adjusted.
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (c-series photometric), page 687
Step Description
2 The new reagent blank absorbance value (Ablk') replaces the
previous value and the curve adjusts up or down based on the
change in the reagent blank.
A ratio (R) that compares the new (A2') and previous (A2)
absorbance data is calculated:
All other calibrators (A1 and A3) are adjusted by using the
calculated ratio. The adjusted absorbance values are A1' and
A3'.
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (c-series photometric), page 687
Related information...
Calibration types and methods, page 675
Full calibration (i-series), page 691
Adjustment calibration (i-series), page 694
Index calibration (i-series), page 698
Reference method (i-series), page 698
Related information...
Calibration types and methods (i-series), page 690
Point-to-point method (i-series), page 691
Linear regression method (i-series), page 691
4PLC methods (i-series), page 693
For example, if a sample has an RLU value between the RLU values for calibrator B and
calibrator C, the unknown sample concentration is calculated by using the following equation:
𝗖𝗼𝗻𝗰 (𝗖) − 𝗖𝗼𝗻𝗰 (𝗕)
𝗖𝗼𝗻𝗰 (𝗫) = 𝗥𝗟𝗨 (𝗖) − 𝗥𝗟𝗨 (𝗕)
× 𝗥𝗟𝗨 (𝗫) − 𝗥𝗟𝗨 (𝗕) + 𝗖𝗼𝗻𝗰 (𝗕)
Related information...
Full calibration (i-series), page 691
Slope (m) and intercept (b) are obtained from the calibration. To calculate the slope and the
intercept, the system software minimizes the sum of squares of the difference between an
observed value and a predicted value (by the regression equation) for all calibrators. The
following equations show the calculations:
𝗦 𝘅𝘅 × 𝗦 𝘆 − 𝗦 𝘅 × 𝗦 𝘅𝘆
𝗯 = 𝝙
𝗦 × 𝗦 𝘅𝘆 − 𝗦 𝘅 × 𝗦 𝘆
𝗺 = 𝝙
𝝙 = 𝗦 × 𝗦𝘅𝘅 − 𝗦𝟮𝘅
𝟭
𝗦 = 𝝨 𝟮
𝞂𝗶
𝘅𝗶
𝘀𝘅 = 𝝨
𝞂 𝟮𝗶
𝘆𝗶
𝗦𝘆 = 𝝨
𝞂 𝟮𝗶
𝘅 𝟮𝗶
𝗦𝘅𝘅 = 𝝨
𝞂 𝟮𝗶
𝘅𝗶 × 𝘆𝗶
𝗦𝘅𝘆 = 𝝨
𝞂 𝟮𝗶
Where:
Related information...
Full calibration (i-series), page 691
Four parameters (P1 through P4) control the shape of the curve. Based on the data generated,
a 4PLC curve can be sigmoidal (S-shaped) or can have a shape with no second bend.
The following list shows how the four parameters are used:
These parameters are calculated to find the P values that generate a curve with the lowest sum
of squares:
𝟭
𝗣𝟮 𝗣𝟰
𝗖𝗼𝗻𝗰 = 𝗥𝗟𝗨 − 𝗣𝟭
− 𝗣𝟯
The 4PLC data reduction methods are an x residual minimization (x-weighted) method and a y
residual minimization (y-weighted) method.
The 4PLC with x residual minimization (x-weighted) method uses the difference between
predicted and observed calibrator concentrations to generate a calibration curve. To generate a
curve with the lowest possible sum of squares, the four parameters are calculated by using the
following equation:
𝘅𝗶 − 𝘅𝗶 𝟮
𝝨 𝞂𝗶
Where:
The 4PLC with y residual minimization (y-weighted) method uses the difference between
predicted and observed calibrator signals to generate a calibration curve. To generate a curve
with the lowest possible sum of squares, the four parameters are calculated by using the
following equation:
𝘆𝗶 − 𝘆𝗶 𝟮
𝝨 = 𝞂𝗶
Where:
Related information...
Full calibration (i-series), page 691
Related information...
Calibration types and methods (i-series), page 690
Ratio technique methods (i-series), page 695
Linear transformation method (i-series), page 696
Parameter method (i-series), page 696
Curve shape methods (i-series), page 697
Create a calibration order, page 599
Where:
R1 Ratio 1
𝗖𝟮
𝗥𝟮 = 𝗠𝟮
Where:
R2 Ratio 2
The system software uses two types of ratio techniques, A and AB. The type that is used
depends on which master calibrator level is multiplied by ratio 1 and ratio 2.
Both types of ratio techniques produce estimates of RLU values. The following calculations are
used to determine the estimates:
Ratio A technique The RLU value stored in the reagent bar code for calibrator A
adjustment method is multiplied by ratio 1.
The RLU value stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators
B through F is multiplied by ratio 2.
Ratio AB technique The RLU value stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators
adjustment method A and B is multiplied by ratio 1.
The RLU value stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators
C through F is multiplied by ratio 2.
The estimates of instrument-specific RLU values are used to generate the calibration curve.
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (i-series), page 694
Where:
C Calibrator
M Master
Instrument-specific RLU values for the six calibrators in the master calibration can be estimated
by using the following equation:
Calibrator1 = Master1 x Slope + Intercept
The estimates of the instrument-specific RLU values for the six calibrators are used to generate
a calibration curve by using the appropriate calibration curve model.
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (i-series), page 694
𝗣 𝗷 − 𝗣𝗷 𝟮 𝘆𝗶 − 𝘆𝗶 𝟮
𝝨 𝞂𝗷
+ 𝝨 𝞂𝗶
Where:
Pj System-specific parameter
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (i-series), page 694
Where:
Related information...
Adjustment calibration (i-series), page 694
Related information...
Calibration types and methods (i-series), page 690
Cutoff assay method (i-series), page 698
One-point qualitative This method uses one calibrator in the index formula. Based
(index formula) on the cutoff formula, the calibrator can be either reactive or
method nonreactive for an assay.
The following example is a one-point cutoff formula where a
and b are assay-specific constants:
Cutoff = a x Calibrator RLU + b
Two-point qualitative This method uses two calibrators in the index formula. The
(index formula) calibrator concentrations are based on the cutoff formula.
method
The following example is a two-point cutoff formula where a
and b are assay-specific constants:
Cutoff = a x Calibrator 1 RLU + Calibrator 2 RLU - b
Related information...
Index calibration (i-series), page 698
Related information...
Calibration types and methods (i-series), page 690
Calibration storage
The Alinity ci-series stores active, inactive, and failed calibrations.
Related information...
Calibration procedures, page 673
Active calibration storage, page 699
Inactive calibration storage, page 700
Failed calibration storage, page 700
NOTE: On the Calibration Details screen, the statuses of active calibrations can be manually
changed to Failed.
Related information...
Calibration storage, page 699
Related information...
Calibration storage, page 699
Related information...
Calibration storage, page 699
Calibration review
An assay calibration run must pass calibration verification before the system stores the
calibration. The status of each calibration is displayed on the Current tab and the Historical tab
of the Calibration Status screen.
Related information...
Calibration procedures, page 673
System calibration verification, page 701
Calibration Status screen, page 702
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 708
View the assay calibration status, page 709
Fail a calibration, page 710
Archive the calibrations, page 669
Active The calibrator values fall within the assay specifications. The
system software calculates patient and control test results
from this calibration.
Pending QC The calibrator values fall within the assay specifications. The
system is configured to require quality control to run after a
calibration is generated, and no control sample has
completed. When one control level for the assay is
completed, a calibration status of Active is displayed.
NOTE: A completed control does not require the control result
to fall within the configured specifications.
Related information...
Calibration review, page 701
Related information...
Calibration review, page 701
Calibration Status screen element descriptions, page 702
Calibration Status Details screen, page 704
Elements
Module Displays the module on which the calibration was ordered and
processed. The module number is displayed only when the All
button is selected.
Calibration Method Displays the data reduction method defined for the assay.
The following c-series methods are displayed:
• Abs (Absorbance)
• Factor
• Linear
• Logit-4
• Spline
• Use Cal Factor Blank
Cal Date/Time Displays the completion date and time of the calibration.
Expiration Date/Time Displays the expiration date and time of the full or adjustment
calibration.
Function buttons
Select All Selects or deselects all items in a list. The button switches
between Select All and Deselect All.
Details Navigates to the Details screen for the selected items on the
current screen.
Related information...
Calibration Status screen, page 702
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 708
Related information...
Calibration Status screen, page 702
Calibration Status Details screen element descriptions, page 704
Elements
Assay Number Displays the number defined for the assay. The assay number
must be the same number that is used for the host.
Lot Expiration Displays the lot expiration date of the reagent cartridge.
Processing Module Displays the module on which the calibration was ordered and
processed.
Calibration Date/Time Displays the completion date and time of the calibration.
Calibrator Lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the
assay.
Lot Expiration Displays the lot expiration date of the calibrators used to
calibrate the assay.
Full Curve Expiration Displays the expiration date and time of the full calibration.
This element is available only for assays that have a defined
calibration interval.
Adjustment Curve Displays the expiration date and time of the adjustment
Expiration calibration. This element is available only for assays that have
a defined calibration interval.
Archive Date/Time Displays the date and time that the data was archived.
Transmission Date/ Displays the date and time that the archive record was
Time transmitted.
Displays the calibration details. Calibration information that is displayed varies based on the
assay type and the calibration method.
Cutoff Displays the calculated cutoff value used for assay data
reduction.
Cal 1 Ratio, Cal 2 Displays the ratios calculated for calibrator 1 and calibrator 2.
Ratio This information is displayed only for i-series.
Fit Conc Displays the fit curve concentration value for each calibrator
level defined in the assay parameters. Only the default units
are displayed.
Cal mV Displays the median millivolt value for each calibrator level.
This information is displayed only for c-series potentiometric
assays.
Absorbance Displays the median absorbance value for the calibrator level.
Mean RLU Displays the mean relative light units (RLUs) of the calibrator
replicates.
Reference Cal RLU Displays the reference (master calibrator) data read from the
reagent bar code label.
Fit RLU Displays the fit curve RLU data for each calibrator.
Rep 1, Rep 2, Rep 3 Displays the absorbance value, the millivolt value, or the RLU
value for replicates 1, 2, and 3.
Rep 1 RLU, Rep 2 Displays the RLU value for replicates 1, 2, and 3.
RLU, Rep 3 RLU
Function buttons
Previous Displays the previous item when multiple items are selected.
Next Displays the next item when multiple items are selected.
Related information...
Calibration Status Details screen, page 704
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 708
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Overridden Lot The system is configured to track the calibrator lot expiration
date and the operator has manually overridden an expired
calibrator lot.
Related information...
Calibration review, page 701
Calibration Status Details screen element descriptions, page 704
Reagents screen, Search flyout element descriptions, page 539
Calibration Status screen element descriptions, page 702
Related information...
Calibration review, page 701
Fail a calibration
Required instrument • Processing module: Stopped, Warming, or Idle
status
• Reagent and sample manager: Stopped or Idle
Perform this procedure to fail a calibration that has a status of Active or Pending QC and to
prevent subsequent result generation from the calibration for existing control and specimen
orders.
NOTE: The procedure cannot be performed on assays with calibration methods of Use Cal
Factor Blank (c-series) and Reference (i-series). The procedure can be performed from the
Historical tab of the Calibration Status screen.
1. On the menu bar, tap CAL.
The Current tab of the Calibration Status screen displays the calibration data for all
modules.
2. To display the data for one module, tap a Module button.
3. Tap one or more assays.
4. Tap Details.
5. On the Calibration Status Details screen, tap Fail for the selected calibration.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, tap Yes.
7. If more than one calibration was selected, tap Next to go to each calibration, and then
repeat steps 5, page 710 and 6, page 710 for each calibration.
8. To return to the Calibration Status screen, tap Done.
After a calibration is failed, if a new assay calibration is ordered and specimen and control tests
are included, and the new assay calibration fails, the specimen and control tests become
exceptions.
Related information...
Calibration review, page 701
Active calibration storage, page 699
Introduction
For optimal operator safety and accurate test results, comply with operational requirements,
precautions, and limitations. Failure to comply can affect system performance, and may cause
damage to the system or may adversely affect test results.
Related information...
General requirements, page 712
Precautions and requirements for system operation, page 713
Requirements for handling the consumables, page 714
Requirements for handling the specimens, page 716
Limitations of result interpretation, page 718
Operator responsibility, page 720
General requirements
For optimal system performance, comply with the following general requirements of the system:
• Contact an Abbott Laboratories representative to install or relocate the system.
• Do not install the system near direct sunlight, heat, drafts, and heat-generating devices.
Exposure to heat and drafts can interfere with the system's ability to maintain an acceptable
operating temperature.
• Maintain the required space on all sides of the system. This space buffer is essential for the
following conditions:
– Adequate cooling of electrical components
– Accurate temperature control of the system
– Access for maintenance
– Access to disconnect the power cord when required
• Leave on the system power at all times unless instructed otherwise for a maintenance
procedure or a troubleshooting procedure, or unless an emergency situation occurs.
• Perform maintenance procedures as recommended later in this manual.
• Do not attempt any maintenance or repairs that are not specified in documentation provided
by Abbott Laboratories.
Related information...
Operational precautions and limitations, page 711
Service, maintenance, and diagnostics, page 739
System clearances, page 403
Related information...
Operational precautions and limitations, page 711
Precautions and requirements before operation, page 713
Precautions during operation, page 713
Related information...
Precautions and requirements for system operation, page 713
Related information...
Precautions and requirements for system operation, page 713
Related information...
Operational precautions and limitations, page 711
Requirements for storage, page 714
Requirements for use, page 714
When storing reagents, calibrators, controls, and bulk solutions, comply with the following
requirements:
• Store reagents, calibrators, controls, and bulk solutions as instructed on their labels or in the
product documentation.
• Store reagents in an upright position. For more information, see the product documentation.
If reagents, calibrators, controls, or bulk solutions are received in a condition that is contrary to
the label recommendation or the product documentation, or are damaged, contact the local
representative or find country-specific contact information at abbottdiagnostics.com.
Related information...
Requirements for handling the consumables, page 714
• Do not reuse or substitute consumables. Abbott Laboratories cannot accept responsibility for
system performance and test results when consumables are reused or have been
manufactured by anyone other than Abbott Laboratories.
• Use caution to prevent contamination and operator exposure when handling the RVs,
reagent replacement caps, and sample cups.
• Consider all used RVs, reagent cartridges, reagent replacement caps, and sample cups as
potentially infectious. Follow appropriate procedures for handling the consumables.
When using reagents, calibrators, controls, and bulk solutions, comply with the following
requirements:
• Do not substitute materials. Abbott Laboratories manufactures substances and components
according to quality standards that are controlled rigidly. Substitution of materials may
adversely affect system performance, test results, safety, and equipment life.
• Do not excessively mix or shake liquids, minimizing the formation of foam and bubbles.
• Do not pipette by mouth.
• Do not smoke, eat, drink, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses in areas where
specimens, reagents, calibrators, controls, or bulk solutions are handled.
• Consider all reagents, calibrators, and controls that contain human-sourced materials as
potentially infectious.
• Use caution to prevent contamination and operator exposure when handling the reagents,
calibrators, controls, and bulk solutions.
• Wear clean gloves to prevent contamination and operator exposure when placing reagent
cartridges on the system.
• Do not invert used reagent cartridges since this action causes reagent leakage and may
compromise test results.
• Verify that reagent cartridges are within the expiration date before loading them on the
system.
• Do not use reagents, calibrators, controls, and bulk solutions beyond their expiration dates.
• Do not use reagents on the system beyond the maximum number of cumulative days. For
more information, see the product documentation.
• Verify that bulk solutions are loaded in the appropriate position to ensure that test results
are not adversely affected.
• Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, and bulk solutions within a lot or between lots.
Related information...
Requirements for handling the consumables, page 714
When preparing and storing specimens, comply with the following requirements:
• Inspect all specimens for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a clean applicator stick before
performing sample processing. Use a new applicator stick for each specimen to prevent
cross contamination.
• Verify that serum and plasma specimens do not contain fibrin, red blood cells, or other
particulate matter.
• For sample volume information, see the product documentation.
• Separate serum specimens or plasma specimens from clots, serum separators, or red blood
cells before freezing the specimens.
• Mix and centrifuge serum specimens or plasma specimens after any freeze-thaw cycle or to
remove red blood cells or other particulate matter. For information about limitations and
interfering substances, see the product documentation.
• Avoid multiple freeze-thaw cycles. After thawing a specimen, thoroughly mix it at a low
speed or gently invert it. Mixed specimens produce consistent test results.
• Remove closures from specimen tubes before loading the tubes on the reagent and sample
manager.
• After loading samples on the system, process the samples within the number of hours
specified in the product documentation to minimize evaporation effects.
Related information...
Operational precautions and limitations, page 711
Sample volume requirements, page 423
Related information...
Operational precautions and limitations, page 711
Introduction
To minimize the potential for harm to personnel and damage to the laboratory environment,
comply with the hazard and safety information.
This section contains supplemental information. Do not use the supplemental information to
supersede workplace safety requirements. Review any significant differences between the
supplemental information and the workplace safety requirements with management or a
workplace safety representative.
Related information...
Operator responsibility, page 720
Safety icons, page 721
Biological hazards, page 723
Chemical hazards, page 725
Waste handling and disposal, page 728
Spill cleanup, page 730
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
Electrical hazards, page 734
Mechanical hazards, page 735
Physical hazards, page 737
Operator responsibility
Use the system only according to its designed purpose. Operators must be trained before
operating the system. Failure to comply with safe-use instructions may cause personal injury,
harm the environment, damage the system, or adversely affect test results.
Any tool use to override interlocks must be controlled and distributed by the operator or the
operator's management.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Operational precautions and limitations, page 711
Safety icons
Safety icons are used on the system and in the system documentation to identify potentially
dangerous conditions. Become familiar with these icons to know the type of potential hazard.
Icon Description
CAUTION: Biological RISKS
Identifies an activity or an area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious
material.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Biological hazards, page 723
Electrical hazards, page 734
Biological hazards
Exposure to potentially infectious materials may occur when the following activities are
performed:
• Handling of specimens, reagents, calibrators, and controls
• Spill cleanup
• Waste handling and disposal
• System relocation
• Maintenance procedures
• Decontamination procedures
• Component replacement procedures
Comply with the precautions to help minimize the impact of this exposure.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Precautions, page 723
Required consumables, page 133
Requirements for handling the specimens, page 716
Safety icons, page 721
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
Component replacement, page 827
Precautions
Consider as potentially infectious all products that are derived from human-sourced materials
and all system surfaces and components that have come in contact with human-sourced
materials. No known test method can offer complete assurance that products derived from
human-sourced materials do not transmit infection.
It is recommended that all potentially infectious materials are handled according to the OSHA
Standard on Bloodborne Pathogens1. Use Biosafety Level 22 or appropriate biosafety
practices3,4 for materials that contain or are suspected to contain infectious agents. Precautions
include the following actions:
• When handling human-sourced materials or contaminated system components:
– Wear gloves, a lab coat, and protective eyewear.
– Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses.
• Do not pipette by mouth.
• Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated system components with a
quaternary ammonium detergent. Then mist or wipe the surface with 0.5% sodium
hypochlorite solution. Let the disinfectant remain on the surface for a minimum of 10
minutes of contact time.
• Decontaminate and dispose of all samples, reagents, and other potentially contaminated
materials in accordance with local, state, and national regulations.
Skin Wash the affected area with soap and water. Apply alcohol,
povidone iodine, chlorhexidine, or another antiseptic.
Puncture wound Let the wound bleed freely. Wash the affected area with soap
and water.
Bibliography references
Related information...
Biological hazards, page 723
Chemical hazards
Exposure to hazardous chemicals may occur when consumables are handled.
To minimize any exposure to hazardous chemicals, follow the instructions provided in the
following documentation:
• Product package inserts
• Specific product labels
• Safety Data Sheets (SDSs)
When the Alinity ci-series is installed and is used correctly, system design features further
reduce exposure levels.
System products are classified and labeled in accordance with the Globally Harmonized System
of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS) as implemented in regional regulations.
Examples of regional regulations include the U.S. OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (HCS)
and the European Regulation (EC) 1272/2008 on classification, labelling, and packaging of
substances and mixtures (CLP).
Pictograms (red-bordered diamonds), signal words (such as Warning and Danger), hazard
statements (H), and precautionary statements (P) are included on respective product labeling.
Other country-specific warnings and precautions may also be included on product labeling.
For SDSs, contact the local representative or find country-specific contact information at
abbottdiagnostics.com.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
General precautions, page 725
Sodium azide, page 726
Sensitizers, page 727
Required consumables, page 133
Safety icons, page 721
General precautions
In general, comply with the following precautions when handling chemicals:
• Consult the Safety Data Sheets for safe-use instructions and precautions.
• Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious
gloves and protective clothing and eyewear.
• Maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where
chemicals are used.
• Immediately clean spilled fluids.
Related information...
Chemical hazards, page 725
Sodium azide
Some products contain sodium azide. Comply with the following precautions when using
products or handling waste that contains sodium azide:
• Do not use any chemical or product with a pH below 6 to disinfect waste that contains
sodium azide. Hydrazoic acid, a highly toxic gas, is released when the pH is lower than 6.
Normal operation of the system uses small amounts of sodium azide with other reagent
components and does not generate hydrazoic acid at levels that are harmful to the operator.
• Thoroughly flush drains with water several times each day to prevent the formation of
potentially explosive metal azides on lead components, copper components, brass
components, or the solder in laboratory plumbing if product waste or instrument waste is
released to a drain. More information about azides in laboratory drains is available in
Current Intelligence Bulletin No.13: Explosive Azide Hazard (August 16, 1976), a publication
issued by the U.S. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). For a copy
of this bulletin, contact the local representative or go to one of the following websites:
– cdc.gov/niosh
Search for the bulletin title.
– abbottdiagnostics.com
Go to the international website or the U.S. website. Select Support/Technical Library/
Other Reference Documents.
Related information...
Chemical hazards, page 725
Sensitizers
Some products contain low levels of ingredients that are reported to be sensitizers. Sensitizers
can stimulate allergic reactions in some people. The allergic reactions may occur with the first
exposure or only after repeated exposures. Methylisothiazolones, which are used as
preservatives in some products, have been associated with the stimulation of allergic skin
reactions (allergic contact dermatitis). Certain enzymatic cleansers may stimulate allergic
reactions in the respiratory systems of people who are sensitive to the ingredients.
To reduce the potential for exposure to sensitizers, comply with the following precautions:
• Use good laboratory techniques to minimize spatters, spills, and other aerosolization of
liquids and powders, particularly when pouring or transferring materials.
• Wear impervious gloves and other personal protective equipment that is appropriate for
biomedical laboratories.
• Immediately remove gloves if they are damaged or contaminated.
• Wash hands after removing gloves and immediately before putting on a fresh pair of gloves.
• Handle containers at a comfortable height that is below chest level.
Related information...
Chemical hazards, page 725
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Liquid wastes that contain (potentially) infectious materials, page 728
Batteries, page 729
Replace bulk solutions and update the inventory, page 508
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle and update the inventory (c-series), page 514
Remove the RV waste and update the inventory (i-series), page 515
Related information...
Waste handling and disposal, page 728
Batteries
The European Battery Directive requires separate collection of spent batteries to facilitate
recycling and protect the environment.
The system contains batteries that are not intended for the operator to service or remove. Only
an Abbott Laboratories representative or a qualified individual may remove the batteries in the
system at the end of the life of the system and may dispose of them in accordance with local
regulations for separate collection of spent batteries.
Contact the local representative or find country-specific contact information at
abbottdiagnostics.com.
Related information...
Waste handling and disposal, page 728
Spill cleanup
Clean spills according to established biosafety practices and follow instructions in the Safety
Data Sheets. In general, safe work practices for spill cleanup include the following requirements:
1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves, a lab coat, and eyewear.
2. Absorb the spill with an absorbent material.
3. Wipe the spill area with a quaternary ammonium detergent.
4. Mist or wipe the spill area with 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution. Let the disinfectant
remain on the surface for a minimum of 10 minutes of contact time.
5. Dispose of all absorbent material and wipes according to local, state, and national
regulations.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
Component replacement, page 827
Unscheduled cleaning, page 772
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Preparation of sodium hypochlorite solutions, page 731
Sodium hypochlorite stability, page 732
System relocation, page 153
Biological hazards, page 723
Spill cleanup, page 730
Clean and decontaminate external components, page 773
Clean and decontaminate the bar code scanner, page 773
Clean and decontaminate the monitor, page 774
Where:
Example:
A = 0.5%
B = 5%
𝟱% − 𝟬.𝟱%
𝗫 = 𝟬.𝟱%
= 𝟵
Where:
Example:
A = 0.5%
B = 5%
V2 = 1000 mL (1 L)
𝟬.𝟱% × 𝟭𝟬𝟬𝟬 𝗺𝗟
𝗩𝟭 = 𝟱%
= 𝟭𝟬𝟬 𝗺𝗟
Mix 100 mL of manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite solution with 900 mL of water to make
1 L of sodium hypochlorite solution.
Related information...
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
If a facility has data that demonstrates a longer shelf-life is valid under the specific conditions of
solution preparation and storage in the facility, prepare solutions in advance and store them.
Related information...
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
Electrical hazards
The system does not pose uncommon electrical hazards to operators if it is installed and is
operated without alteration, and if it is connected to a power source that meets the required
specifications.
Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of the system. Only qualified
personnel may perform electrical servicing.
Elements of electrical safety include the following requirements:
• Inspect cables that connect to the system for signs of wear and damage.
• Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as the cords and
accessories that are supplied with the system, to protect against electric shock.
• Use an appropriately grounded electrical outlet of correct voltage and current-handling
capability.
• Determine and resolve the cause of a blown fuse or a tripped circuit breaker before
resuming system operation.
• Do not disconnect any electrical connections or service any electrical and internal
components while the system power is on.
• Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical and communication components.
• Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands.
• Keep the floor dry and clean under and near the system.
• Use a ground fault circuit interrupter when working in a wet environment.
• Immediately clean liquid spills. Turn off the system power and disconnect the system power
cord before cleaning major liquid spills.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 403
Safety icons, page 721
Mechanical hazards
The Alinity ci-series is an automated system that operates by computer control. As with most
automated equipment, the potential for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical
components is present when system operation occurs.
To minimize mechanical hazards, the system provides guards to protect against accidental
contact with moving components and incorporates safety features in the hardware.
The system requires the operator to accurately position all specimens, reagents, calibrators,
controls, sample cups, and tubes on the system. Be sure to correctly position sample cups,
tubes, and reagent cartridges before any operation is initiated.
Although the system is equipped with safety features to stop the lowering of probes, do not
reach into the processing center during system operation. To interrupt a run, follow the operating
instructions in this manual.
The top of the RSM transport is equipped with white light-emitting diodes (LEDs) as visual safety
indicators. The LEDs provide visibility to the RSM transport position and movement at all times.
Do not reach into the path of the RSM transport at any time. Do not run the system unless at
least one LED is illuminated. If neither LED is illuminated, contact Customer Service to resolve
the failure.
If necessary for maintenance and diagnostic procedures, interlocks can be overridden by an
Abbott Laboratories representative or trained operators only by using the procedure key. Be
aware that potential mechanical hazards and Biological RISK may be present. Be aware of
moving parts. Do not reach into the paths of moving parts.
During system operation, the operator may be exposed to the following moving components:
• Pipettors and probes
• Sample transport
• RV loader assembly
• Wash aspiration probes
• Processing center
• Processing module pumps
• Be aware that reflex actions can occur and cause injury in the event of a system
malfunction or an unexpected sequence of movements.
• Use caution when performing procedures for adjustment, maintenance, cleaning, and repair.
• Use caution when loading sample racks or sample trays.
• Use caution when loading reagent cartridges.
• Use caution when moving full waste containers.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Operating instructions, page 427
Safety icons, page 721
Physical hazards
Use safe practices to avoid injury when any exposure to potential physical hazards occurs.
Related information...
Hazards, page 719
Probes and other sharps, page 737
Heavy objects, page 737
Hot objects, page 738
Tripping hazards, page 738
Related information...
Physical hazards, page 737
Safety icons, page 721
Heavy objects
The system is a heavy instrument. Confirm that adequate help is available before relocating the
system. For information about the relocation of the system, contact an Abbott Laboratories
representative.
Obtain adequate help or use mechanical devices to move or lift heavy items.
Use the following techniques to help reduce the risk of injury when lifting objects:
• Keep the head up and the back straight. Bend at the hips and knees.
• Bring the load as near to the body as possible and keep the load directly in front of the
body.
• Tighten the abdominal muscles, push the feet down into the ground, and straighten the
knees (that is, lift with the legs, not with the back).
• Do not twist and reach to the side or twist and lift. Instead, move the feet to turn the body.
• Bend at the knees by using only the leg muscles and place the load in the appropriate
location.
• Try to perform lifts at waist height with the elbows near the body.
Related information...
Physical hazards, page 737
Safety icons, page 721
Hot objects
The lamp and the lamp housing may be hot. Before replacing the lamp, power off the c-series
processing module. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes so that the lamp and the lamp housing can
cool. Wear gloves if necessary.
Related information...
Physical hazards, page 737
Safety icons, page 721
Tripping hazards
The Alinity ci-series is equipped with a power cord for each processing module, several
computer cables, and water and waste tubing for the system control module. To avoid a tripping
hazard, ensure that the cords, cables, and tubing in high-traffic areas are routed safely.
Related information...
Physical hazards, page 737
Introduction
The appropriate service, maintenance, and diagnostics of the system are some of the most
important aspects of a complete quality assurance program. A thorough service, maintenance,
and diagnostic program:
• Minimizes downtime.
• Maintains records for inspection and accreditation.
• Maintains system performance to provide optimal test results.
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Component replacement, page 827
Troubleshooting, page 917
General requirements, page 712
Related information...
Service, maintenance, and diagnostics, page 739
Procedures screen, page 740
Procedures Log screen, page 752
Maintenance and diagnostic procedure statuses, page 757
Maintenance procedure descriptions, page 758
Unscheduled cleaning, page 772
Diagnostic procedure descriptions, page 775
Procedures screen
On the Procedures screen, the operator can view the following information:
• Scheduled maintenance procedures to perform by category
• Available diagnostic procedures to perform by category
• In-process maintenance procedures or in-process diagnostic procedures
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Procedures screen element descriptions, page 741
Version Details for Procedure flyout element descriptions, page 743
Elements
Last Performed Displays the date and time that the procedure was last
performed.
Operator ID Displays the operator ID that is logged onto the system when
the procedure was performed.
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Quarterly
• Semiyearly
• Yearly
• As Needed
Function buttons
In Process tab
The In Process tab displays the maintenance or diagnostic procedure that is in process for a
selected module.
Elements
Time Started Displays the date and time that the procedure was started.
Function buttons
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Status to Perform Displays the instrument status of the processing module that
Procedure is necessary to perform the selected procedure.
Operator Access Level Displays the operator access level that is necessary to
perform the selected procedure.
Procedure Key Setting Displays the procedure key setting that is necessary to
perform the selected procedure.
Completion Date Displays the date and time that the selected procedure was
last performed. If the procedure has not been performed, the
element is blank.
Completion Status Displays the last status of the selected procedure. If the
procedure has not been performed, the element is blank.
Function buttons
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Maintenance and diagnostic procedure statuses, page 757
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Elements
User Input Displays the buttons and fields to continue the procedure or
provide user input.
Function buttons
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Procedure key, page 50
• CAUTION: Moving Parts. This activity or area may expose you to moving parts.
• CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
Be aware of moving parts. Do not reach into the processing center during system operation.
1. To access each procedure lock, perform the following steps:
– Open the front electronics door of the processing module.
– Open the SCM front door.
2. Insert the procedure key into the procedure lock, and then turn the key to the On (white dot)
setting.
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Procedure key, page 50
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Maintenance procedure descriptions, page 758
Diagnostic procedure descriptions, page 775
Return to a maintenance procedure or a diagnostic procedure in process, page 752
Related information...
Procedures screen, page 740
Perform a maintenance procedure or a diagnostic procedure, page 750
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Procedures Log screen, Maintenance tab element descriptions, page 753
Procedures Log screen, Diagnostics tab element descriptions, page 754
Details for Log flyout element descriptions, page 755
Add a comment to a maintenance procedure or a diagnostic procedure, page 756
Approve a maintenance log, page 757
Maintenance tab
The Maintenance tab displays the maintenance logs. The following list explains the descriptive
elements of the maintenance logs:
• A gray box indicates that the procedure has a status of Scheduled, Pending, Canceled, Not
Performed, or Failed. If the procedure is performed multiple times on the same day, the
status of the last performed procedure is displayed.
Tap the box to display the Details for Log flyout.
• A blue box indicates that the procedure has been performed and has a status of Completed.
Tap the box to display the Details for Log flyout.
• An asterisk (*) within the box indicates that a comment has been entered for the procedure
in the Details for Log flyout.
• A number within the box indicates that the procedure was performed multiple times on the
same day.
• No box indicates that the procedure was not performed or scheduled for that day.
Elements
Approval Date/Time Displays the date and time that the log was approved. The
element is blank if the log has not been approved.
Activity Month Displays the month and year for the log displayed.
Function buttons
Approve Used to approve the maintenance log for the month displayed.
Related information...
Procedures Log screen, page 752
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Diagnostics tab
The Diagnostics tab displays the diagnostic logs. The following list explains the descriptive
elements of the diagnostic logs:
• A gray box indicates procedures that did not complete successfully. If the procedure is
performed multiple times on the same day, the status of the last performed procedure is
displayed.
Tap the box to display the Details for Log flyout.
• A blue box indicates that the procedure has been performed and has a status of Completed.
Tap the box to display the Details for Log flyout.
• An asterisk (*) within the box indicates that a comment has been entered for the procedure
in the Details for Log flyout.
• A number within the box indicates that the procedure was performed multiple times on the
same day.
• No box indicates that the procedure was not performed or scheduled for that day.
Elements
Activity Month Displays the month and year for the log displayed.
Function buttons
Related information...
Procedures Log screen, page 752
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Completion Date Displays the date and time that the procedure is completed.
For maintenance logs, the element is blank if the procedure
has a status of Scheduled, Pending, or Not Performed.
Function buttons
Previous Displays the previously viewed details for the log. The button
is displayed only when the procedure is performed multiple
times on the same day.
Next Displays the next details for the log. The button is displayed
only when the procedure is performed multiple times on the
same day.
Related information...
Procedures Log screen, page 752
Related information...
Procedures Log screen, page 752
Related information...
Procedures Log screen, page 752
Not performed The maintenance procedure was not performed on the date
due.
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Version Details for Procedure flyout element descriptions, page 743
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Maintenance suggestions, page 758
Processing module maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
Processing module maintenance procedures (i-series), page 768
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) maintenance procedures, page 771
Perform a maintenance procedure or a diagnostic procedure, page 750
Maintenance suggestions
The appropriate maintenance of the system is important. Abbott Laboratories provides
suggestions for efficient strategies to perform maintenance procedures and reduce downtime.
When scheduling and performing maintenance procedures:
• Schedule maintenance procedures for times when the workflow is slow.
• Verify that adequate supplies are loaded, or are available to load, on the system before
initiating a maintenance procedure.
• Perform procedures within a maintenance category on different shifts or days. To avoid
scheduling these procedures for the same day, perform some of them early to stagger the
schedule.
NOTE: All maintenance procedures must be completed on or before the due date.
Related information...
Maintenance procedure descriptions, page 758
Related information...
Maintenance procedure descriptions, page 758
Daily maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
Weekly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 760
Monthly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 760
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
As-needed maintenance procedures (c-series), page 765
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
5501 Daily Maintenance (c-series), page 759
Related information...
Daily maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Maintenance solutions (c-series), page 139
Solutions used in daily operations (c-series), page 513
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
5601 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent A (c-series), page 760
Related information...
Weekly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 760
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
Related information...
Monthly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 760
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
5801 Sample Syringe Maintenance (c-series), page 761
5802 Wash Solution Syringe Maintenance (c-series), page 762
5803 Reagent Syringe Maintenance (c-series), page 763
5804 Change 1 mL Syringes (c-series), page 763
5805 Check and Change ICT Check Valves (c-series), page 764
5806 Change Lamp (c-series), page 764
5807 Check and Clean High-Concentration Waste Sensor (c-series), page 765
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Quarterly maintenance procedures (c-series), page 761
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (c-series), page 759
5901 Clean Wash Cups (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 765
5905 Internal Decontamination (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 766
5910 Wash Cuvettes (c-series), page 767
5925 Manual RSM Loading Area and Positioners Cleaning (c-series), page 767
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedures (c-series), page 765
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedures (c-series), page 765
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedures (c-series), page 765
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Estimated time 4 minutes (This time does not include the 10 minutes of
contact time that is required for 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution.)
Required materials • 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution
• Quaternary ammonium detergent
• Lint-free tissue
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedures (c-series), page 765
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Maintenance procedure descriptions, page 758
Daily maintenance procedures (i-series), page 768
Weekly maintenance procedures (i-series), page 769
As-needed maintenance procedures (i-series), page 770
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (i-series), page 768
2500 Daily Maintenance (i-series), page 768
Related information...
Daily maintenance procedures (i-series), page 768
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (i-series), page 768
2620 Manual Pipettor Probe Cleaning (i-series), page 769
2625 Manual Wash Zone Probe Cleaning (i-series), page 769
2630 Manual Wash Cup Cleaning (i-series), page 770
Related information...
Weekly maintenance procedures (i-series), page 769
Related information...
Weekly maintenance procedures (i-series), page 769
Related information...
Weekly maintenance procedures (i-series), page 769
Related information...
Processing module maintenance procedures (i-series), page 768
2900 Internal Decontamination (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 770
2925 Manual RSM Loading Area and Positioner Cleaning (i-series), page 771
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedures (i-series), page 770
Estimated time 4 minutes (This time does not include the 10 minutes of
contact time that is required for 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution.)
Required materials • 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution
• Quaternary ammonium detergent
• Lint-free tissue
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedures (i-series), page 770
Related information...
Maintenance procedure descriptions, page 758
As-needed maintenance procedure (RSM), page 772
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) maintenance procedures, page 771
2920 Manual RSM Transport Cleaning, page 772
Estimated time 4 minutes (This time does not include the 10 minutes of
contact time that is required for 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution.)
Required materials • 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution (This option is only for
the RSM transport arm.)
• Quaternary ammonium detergent (This option is only for
the RSM transport arm.)
• Isopropyl alcohol (This option is only for the RSM bar
code reader mirror.)
• Microfiber cloth (This option is only for the RSM bar code
reader mirror.)
• Lint-free tissue
Related information...
As-needed maintenance procedure (RSM), page 772
Unscheduled cleaning
Some system components may need to be cleaned or decontaminated because of normal use
from daily system operations or because of spills.
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Clean and decontaminate external components, page 773
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
Related information...
Unscheduled cleaning, page 772
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Wipe the surface area and scan window of the bar code scanner with a quaternary
ammonium detergent.
2. Mist or wipe the surface area and the scan window with 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution.
Let the disinfectant remain on the surface for a minimum of 10 minutes of contact time.
3. Dispose of all absorbent material and wipes according to local, state, and national
regulations.
Related information...
Unscheduled cleaning, page 772
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Power off the monitor. Do not wipe the screen while the monitor is turned on.
2. Wipe the screen with a quaternary ammonium detergent.
3. Mist or wipe the screen with 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution. Let the disinfectant remain
on the screen for a minimum of 10 minutes of contact time.
4. When the screen is dry, power on the monitor.
5. Dispose of all absorbent material and wipes according to local, state, and national
regulations.
Related information...
Unscheduled cleaning, page 772
Requirements for decontamination, page 731
Print a topic from the operations manual, page 43
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostics, page 740
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) diagnostic procedures, page 823
Perform a maintenance procedure or a diagnostic procedure, page 750
Related information...
Diagnostic procedure descriptions, page 775
Optics diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 776
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Temperature diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 784
Sample manager diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 785
Reagent manager diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 785
Module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 786
Reaction mechanism diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 789
ICT diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 791
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
4001 Optics Trigger Sensor Check (c-series), page 776
4002 Absorbance Reads (c-series), page 776
4003 Optics Total Test and ICT Data (c-series) (CSC Logon), page 777
4004 Beam Height Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 777
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 776
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 776
4003 Optics Total Test and ICT Data (c-series) (CSC Logon)
Perform this Optics diagnostic procedure to test the variability in the optical readings and to
provide data for the optical and ICT channels.
If the logon for CSC is used, the operator can perform the following procedures:
• Quick Test
• Dark Current
• Blocked and Unblocked Reads
• Auto Gain
• AD Read
• AD Range
If the logon for FSE is used, the operator can perform all tests that are available for the CSC
logon and the following procedures:
• Drift Test
• Combined Blocked and Unblocked Reads and Drift Test
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 776
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 776
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
4101 Crash Sensor Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 778
4102 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779
4103 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779
4104 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779
4105 Sample Probe and Rack Alignment Test (c-series) (CSC Logon), page 780
4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
4105 Sample Probe and Rack Alignment Test (c-series) (CSC Logon)
Perform this Pipettors diagnostic procedure to visualize the sample probe position at the sample
aspiration location.
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 778
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
4202 Wash Cup Test (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 781
4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782
4206 Flush Bulk Solutions (c-series), page 782
4207 Move Cuvette Washer (c-series), page 783
4208 Probe and Mixer Wash (c-series), page 783
4209 Internal Probe Wash Pump Test (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 783
NOTE: Adjustment of the wash cup flow volume can only be performed on the sample wash cup.
• #1 Phillips screwdriver
• Slotted screwdriver
• 100 mL beaker
• Absorbent towels
• Adhesive tape
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 781
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
4301 Temperature Status (c-series), page 784
Related information...
Temperature diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 784
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
1631 Sample Positioner Test (c-series), page 785
Related information...
Sample manager diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 785
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
4701 Reagent Carousel Home (c-series), page 786
4703 Reagent Supply Center Test (c-series), page 786
Related information...
Reagent manager diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 785
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reagent manager diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 785
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
4801 Module Initialization (c-series), page 787
4802 Robotics Test Tool (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 787
4803 Voltage Test (c-series), page 788
4804 Save or Restore DAQ Data (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 788
Related information...
Module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 786
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
• Phillips screwdriver
• Sample racks*
• Saline*
• Sample cup or tube*
Related information...
Module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 786
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 786
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
• Save the robotics alignment data from the data acquisition (DAQ) board to the central
processing unit (CPU) board.
• Load the robotics data from the CPU board to the DAQ board.
• Clear the DAQ board memory.
• View the step table data for each robotic position. Enter the data from the Toshiba step
table attachment that is provided with each instrument.
Related information...
Module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 786
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
5001 Mixer Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 789
5002 Mixer Vibration Test (c-series), page 790
5003 Clean Cuvettes - Manually (c-series), page 790
5004 Reaction Carousel Home and Move (c-series), page 791
5005 Exchange Water in Bath (c-series), page 791
Related information...
Reaction mechanism diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 789
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reaction mechanism diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 789
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reaction mechanism diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 789
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reaction mechanism diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 789
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reaction mechanism diagnostic procedures (c-series) , page 789
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 775
5101 Flush ICT Reference Solution Cup (c-series), page 792
5102 Flush ICT Module (c-series), page 792
5103 ICT Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon), page 792
Related information...
ICT diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 791
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
ICT diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 791
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
ICT diagnostic procedures (c-series), page 791
Related information...
Diagnostic procedure descriptions, page 775
Optics diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Temperature diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 816
RV loader diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 816
Process path diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 817
Sample manager diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 819
Reagent manager diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 820
Module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 821
Utilities diagnostic procedures (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 822
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1000 Optics Background (i-series), page 793
1005 Shutter Test (i-series), page 794
1045 Optics Verification (i-series) (FSE Logon), page 794
For the procedure to pass, raw counts must be between 3 relative light units (RLUs) and
500 RLUs. In addition, specifications of the software background quality checks must not
generate an error.
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Optics diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1100 Pipettor Motors Test (i-series), page 795
1105 Pipettor Syringe and Pump Test (i-series), page 796
1111 Sample Pipettor Check and Calibration (i-series), page 796
1112 R1 Pipettor Check and Calibration (i-series), page 797
1113 R2 Pipettor Check and Calibration (i-series), page 797
1120 Sample Pipettor Syringe Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 798
1121 R1 Pipettor Syringe Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 799
1122 R2 Pipettor Syringe Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 800
1130 Sample Pipettor Pump Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 800
1131 R1 Pipettor Pump Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 801
1132 R2 Pipettor Pump Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 802
1160 Liquid Level Sense Test, page 803
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
If the logon for FSE is used, a prealignment option is available. Perform this option to set the
sample probe position to the wash cup. The probe is approximately aligned to allow an initial
system flush.
Estimated time • 6 minutes for pipettor calibration
• 4 minutes for probe straightness
• 4 minutes for wash cup prealignment
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
If the logon for FSE is used, a prealignment option is available. Perform this option to set the R1
probe position to the wash cup. The probe is approximately aligned to allow an initial system
flush.
Estimated time • 6 minutes for pipettor calibration
• 4 minutes for probe straightness
• 4 minutes for wash cup prealignment
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
If the logon for FSE is used, a prealignment option is available. Perform this option to set the R2
probe position to the wash cup. The probe is approximately aligned to allow an initial system
flush.
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
If the logon for CSC or FSE is used, a gravimetric option is available. Perform this option to
measure gravimetrically the precision and accuracy of the dispense. For this option, 1000 µL of
wash buffer is dispensed into 15 preweighed RVs.
After the weight of the RV is subtracted, each result must be from 950 µL (950 mg) through
1050 µL (1050 mg).
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Required materials Materials can vary based on the option that is selected:
• Diagnostics Kit, LN 01R5940
• Sample rack
• Sample cup
• Tap water or saline
Related information...
Pipettor diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 795
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1200 Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804
1202 Wash Cup Valves Test (i-series), page 805
1203 Long-Term Shutdown (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 805
1204 Waste Valve and Pump Test (i-series) (FSE Logon), page 806
1206 Pre-Trigger and Trigger Valves and Pumps Test (i-series), page 806
1208 Wash Zone Valves, Pumps, and Motors Test (i-series), page 807
1210 Pre-Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 807
1211 Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 808
1221 Wash Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809
1222 Wash Zone 2 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809
1231 Wash Zone 1 Residual Volume (i-series), page 810
1232 Wash Zone 2 Residual Volume (i-series), page 811
1241 Particle Capture Wash Zone 1 (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 812
1242 Particle Capture Wash Zone 2 (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 812
1250 Vacuum Diagnostics (i-series) (FSE Logon), page 813
1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash Monitoring (i-series), page 813
1262 Wash Zone 2 Wash Monitoring (i-series), page 814
1270 Bulk Solutions Motors and Sensors Test (i-series), page 815
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Compare each RV that was pipetted by the system to the reference RV to determine if the
correct volume was dispensed.
If the logon for CSC or FSE is used, a gravimetric option is available. Perform this option to
measure gravimetrically the precision and accuracy of the dispense. For this option, 400 µL of
wash buffer is dispensed into 15 preweighed RVs.
After the weight of the RV is subtracted, each result must be from 360 µL (360 mg) through
440 µL (440 mg) and the percent coefficient of variation (%CV) must be less than or equal to
2%.
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
The Calibration and Test option is used to perform the following tasks:
• The R1 pipettor dispenses wash buffer at the following volumes into 15 reaction vessels
(RVs):
– 500 µL of wash buffer into five RVs for probe 1
– 1000 µL of wash buffer into five RVs for probe 2
– 1000 µL of wash buffer into five RVs for probe 3
• Wash zone 1 aspirated liquid from the RVs and the wash monitoring system is calibrated.
• If the calibration passes, the wash monitoring test is performed to verify the calibration.
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
The Calibration and Test option is used to perform the following tasks:
• The R1 pipettor dispenses wash buffer at the following volumes into 15 reaction vessels
(RVs):
– 500 µL of wash buffer into five RVs for probe 1
– 1000 µL of wash buffer into five RVs for probe 2
– 1000 µL of wash buffer into five RVs for probe 3
• Wash zone 2 aspirated liquid from the RVs and the wash monitoring system is calibrated.
• If the calibration passes, the wash monitoring test is performed to verify the calibration.
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Fluidics-wash diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 804
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1300 Temperature Status (i-series), page 816
If the logon for CSC or FSE is used, the ambient temperature status is tested and is displayed.
Related information...
Temperature diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 816
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1400 RV Loader and Sensors Test (i-series), page 816
Related information...
RV loader diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 816
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1505 Diverter Test (i-series), page 817
1510 Vortexer Test (i-series), page 818
1515 Process Path Motors Test (i-series), page 818
1520 RV Load and Unload Test (i-series), page 819
Related information...
Process path diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 817
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Process path diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 817
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Process path diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 817
Related information...
Process path diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 817
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1630 Sample Positioner Test (i-series), page 819
Related information...
Sample manager diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 819
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1703 Reagent Supply Center Test (i-series), page 820
1715 Reagent Carousel and Reagent Transport Calibration (i-series), page 820
Related information...
Reagent manager diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 820
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reagent manager diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 820
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1830 Buffer Run (i-series), page 821
1890 Processing Module Initialization (i-series), page 822
Estimated time Variable time based on the number of tests that are ordered.
The minimum completion time is 30 minutes.
Required materials • Diagnostics Kit, LN 01R5940 (two cartridges)
• Tap water or saline
• Sample racks
• Sample cups or tubes
Related information...
Module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 821
Related information...
Module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 821
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Processing module diagnostic procedures (i-series), page 793
1910 Gravimetric Calculations (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 822
Estimated time Variable time based on the number of calculations that are
performed
Related information...
Utilities diagnostic procedures (i-series) (CSC Logon), page 822
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Diagnostic procedure descriptions, page 775
1600 RSM Transport Calibration, page 823
1610 Reagent and Sample Manager Test, page 824
1620 RSM Bar Code Reader Test, page 824
1635 RSM Transport Test, page 825
1690 Reagent and Sample Manager Initialization, page 825
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) diagnostic procedures, page 823
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) diagnostic procedures, page 823
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Estimated time Variable time based on the number of bar codes that are
scanned
Required materials • Racks
• Bar-coded tubes
• Reagent cartridge
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) diagnostic procedures, page 823
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) diagnostic procedures, page 823
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) diagnostic procedures, page 823
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Component replacement
Some system components may need to be replaced because of normal wear from daily system
operation.
The laboratory has a responsibility to maintain an adequate supply of replacement parts. List
numbers are provided in the procedures only for guidance and are subject to change.
When replacing components, comply with the following general safety precautions:
• Dispose of replaced components and materials that are used during component
replacement (for example, absorbent towels or lint-free tissues) according to the laboratory
waste disposal procedures of the facility.
• When drips or leaks occur, clean up the liquid and decontaminate the surface if necessary.
Related information...
Service, maintenance, and diagnostics, page 739
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Supply and pump center component replacement (c-series), page 864
Processing center component replacement (i-series), page 892
Supply center component replacement (i-series), page 904
Optional component replacement, page 912
Biological hazards, page 723
Spill cleanup, page 730
Legend:
1. Sample probe (S)
2. Mixer 2
3. ICT module
4. Lamp
5. Mixer 1
6. Cuvette dry tip
7. Cuvette segment
8. Reagent probe (R1)
9. ICT probe
10. Reagent probe (R2)
Related information...
Component replacement, page 827
Replace the sample probe (c-series), page 829
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the sample probe.
3. To move the sample pipettor to the rear of the processing module, initiate Pipettors
diagnostic procedure 4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780.
4. To remove the sample pipettor cover, gently squeeze the squeeze points to release the
locking tabs and lift the cover.
5. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip.
6. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw.
7. Loosen, but do not remove, the probe screw by hand until the probe releases from the
sample pipettor.
8. Loosen, but do not remove, the screw that secures the sample probe grounding wire.
9. Detach the grounding wire.
10. Gently disconnect the tubing from the top of the probe.
Replacement
3. Remove the probe screw from the old sample probe and insert the screw into the new
sample probe. Tighten the screw by hand to secure the probe.
4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the new sample probe grounding wire and tighten the screw.
NOTE: Ensure that the connector for the new sample probe grounding wire is positioned
under the ring-shaped connector.
6. Remove the absorbent towel under the probe tip.
7. To return the sample pipettor to the home position, complete Pipettors diagnostic procedure
4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780.
8. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
While performing the flush, inspect the sample probe for drips and inspect the sample probe
tubing and connections for leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.
9. Gently replace the pipettor cover. Ensure that the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the
pipettor cover.
10. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor shaft until the cover snaps into
position.
The pipettor cover must be seated completely to ensure correct liquid level sense operation.
Verification
1. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4102 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page
779.
2. Close the rear processing center cover.
3. Turn the procedure key to the Off setting and remove the key from the processing module
procedure lock.
4. Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample
results.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover:
– To replace the R1 probe, lift the front processing center cover.
– To replace the R2 probe, lift the rear processing center cover.
3. To move the reagent pipettor to the reagent aspiration position, initiate Pipettors diagnostic
procedure 4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780.
4. To remove the reagent pipettor cover, squeeze the squeeze points to release the locking
tabs and lift the cover.
5. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip.
6. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw.
7. Loosen, but do not remove, the probe screw by hand until the probe releases from the
reagent pipettor.
8. Loosen, but do not remove, the screw that secures the reagent probe grounding wire.
9. Detach the grounding wire.
10. Gently disconnect the tubing from the top of the probe.
Replacement
3. Remove the probe screw from the old reagent probe and insert the screw into the new
reagent probe. Tighten the screw by hand to secure the probe.
4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the new reagent probe grounding wire and tighten the screw.
NOTE: Ensure that the connector for the new reagent probe grounding wire is positioned
under the ring-shaped connector.
6. Remove the absorbent towel under the probe tip.
7. To return the reagent pipettor to the home position, complete Pipettors diagnostic procedure
4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780.
8. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
While performing the flush, inspect the reagent probe for drips and inspect the reagent
probe tubing and connections for leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.
9. Gently replace the pipettor cover:
– Insert the rear of the pipettor cover into the pipettor and press backward to fully seat
the tabs.
– Align the tabs at the front end of the pipettor cover and press down until the tabs snap
into position.
– Ensure that the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor cover.
10. Stabilize the pipettor so that it does not drop and damage the probe. Press down on the
middle of the pipettor cover to confirm that it is seated completely.
The pipettor cover must be seated completely to ensure correct liquid level sense operation.
Verification
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the sample probe.
3. To remove the sample pipettor cover, gently squeeze the squeeze points to release the
locking tabs and lift the cover.
4. Unscrew the tubing from the probe tubing connector. Ensure that the black O-ring inside the
tubing connector remains in position.
5. Gently disconnect the tubing from the top of the probe. Use the absorbent towel to absorb
any water from the end of the probe tubing.
Replacement
1. Attach the end of the new tubing to the top of the sample probe.
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing needs to fit firmly on the sample probe
but must not be pushed past the bend of the probe so that the tubing does not become too
loose.
2. Verify that the black O-ring is inside the probe tubing connector.
3. Screw the opposite end of the tubing into the tubing connector.
4. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
While performing the flush, inspect the sample probe for drips and inspect the sample probe
tubing and connections for leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.
5. Gently replace the pipettor cover. Ensure that the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the
pipettor cover.
6. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor shaft until the cover snaps into
position.
The pipettor cover must be seated completely to ensure correct liquid level sense operation.
7. Close the rear processing center cover.
8. Turn the procedure key to the Off setting and remove the key from the processing module
procedure lock.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover:
– To replace the R1 probe tubing, lift the front processing center cover.
– To replace the R2 probe tubing, lift the rear processing center cover.
3. To move the reagent pipettor to the reagent aspiration position, initiate Pipettors diagnostic
procedure 4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780.
4. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip.
5. To remove the reagent pipettor cover, squeeze the squeeze points to release the locking
tabs and lift the cover.
6. Observe the position of the tubing in the routing guides.
7. Gently disconnect the tubing from the top of the probe.
8. Gently disconnect the metal connector from the reagent pipettor tubing. Ensure that the
protective sleeve remains on the reagent pipettor tubing.
Replacement
1. Attach the end of the new tubing with the metal connector to the reagent pipettor tubing.
Verify that the metal connector is inserted into the reagent pipettor tubing and the protective
sleeve.
2. Position the tubing in the routing guides.
3. Attach the other end of new tubing to the reagent probe.
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing needs to fit firmly on the reagent probe
but must not be pushed past the bend of the probe so that the tubing does not become too
loose.
4. Remove the absorbent towel under the probe tip.
5. To return the reagent pipettor to the home position, complete Pipettors diagnostic procedure
4106 Component Move (c-series), page 780.
6. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
While performing the flush, inspect the reagent probe for drips and inspect the reagent
probe tubing and connections for leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.
7. Gently replace the pipettor cover:
– Insert the rear of the pipettor cover into the pipettor and press backward to fully seat
the tabs.
– Align the tabs at the front end of the pipettor cover and press down until the tabs snap
into position.
– Ensure that the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor cover.
8. Stabilize the pipettor so that it does not drop and damage the probe. Press down on the
middle of the pipettor cover to confirm that it is seated completely.
The pipettor cover must be seated completely to ensure correct liquid level sense operation.
9. Close the appropriate processing center cover:
– For the R1 probe tubing, close the front processing center cover.
– For the R2 probe tubing, close the rear processing center cover.
10. Turn the procedure key to the Off setting and remove the key from the processing module
procedure lock.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Estimated time 15 minutes (This time does not include the 30-minute lamp
warm-up period that is required after replacement.)
Required materials • Phillips screwdriver
• Slotted screwdriver
• 3 mm hex wrench
• Gloves
• Lint-free tissue (optional)
• Ethanol (optional)
To document the lamp change in the maintenance log, perform Quarterly maintenance
procedure 5806 Change Lamp (c-series), page 764.
CAUTION: Possibility of electric shock. This activity or area may expose you to
electrical shock.
CAUTION: Hot Surface. This activity or area may expose you to hot surfaces.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Power off the processing module by using the main power breaker that is located at the rear
of the module.
NOTE: Do not remove the lamp or the lamp plate when the processing module is powered
on.
2. After turning off the power, wait a minimum of 5 minutes so that the lamp and the lamp
housing can cool.
3. Lift the rear processing center cover.
4. Remove the two screw covers from the rear access panel.
5. Perform one of the following steps to loosen the screws to remove the rear access panel:
– Use the 3 mm hex wrench to loosen the captive hex screws.
– Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive screws.
Replacement
IMPORTANT: Wear gloves to perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand on
the glass surface of the lamp shortens the lamp life. If the glass surface needs to be cleaned,
use lint-free tissue and ethanol.
1. To install the lamp on the lamp plate, align the pins on the lamp plate with the holes on the
new lamp. Ensure that the lamp filament is perpendicular to the lamp plate.
2. With the lamp seated completely on the pins, use the slotted screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the lamp plate.
3. To insert the lamp assembly into the lamp housing, press the assembly against the leaf
spring, and then lower the assembly into the housing. Ensure that the lamp assembly is
seated completely in the lamp housing.
4. Verify that the lamp cables exit the lamp housing through the slot behind the lamp and that
the cables are not pinched by the lamp plate.
5. Press down on the lamp plate and tighten the thumbscrew to secure the plate to the lamp
housing.
6. On the terminal block, lift the Phillips screws and insert the cables under the screws.
7. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws and to secure the two lamp
cables to the terminal block.
8. Replace the transparent cover on the terminal block.
9. Replace the lamp cables in the plastic clamp.
10. Replace the lamp cover and tighten the slotted screw.
11. Install the rear access panel.
12. Perform one of the following steps to secure the rear access panel:
– Use the 3 mm hex wrench to tighten the captive hex screws.
– Use the slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive screws.
13. Replace the two screw covers.
14. Close the rear processing center cover.
15. Power on the processing module.
NOTE: To ensure the appropriate initialization of the processing module, the system control
module power must be turned on before the processing module power is turned on.
16. Let the lamp warm up for 30 minutes before performing assay processing.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the reaction carousel.
3. Identify the location of the first cuvette segment to replace in the reaction carousel.
4. To rotate the reaction carousel so that the appropriate cuvette segment is located at the
rear of the processing module, perform Reaction Mechanism diagnostic procedure 5004
Reaction Carousel Home and Move (c-series), page 791.
5. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw on the top of the cuvette segment to
remove the segment from the reaction carousel.
6. Dispose of the used cuvette segment.
7. Repeat steps 4, page 850 through 6, page 850 until all the cuvette segments to replace are
removed.
Replacement
IMPORTANT: Wear gloves to perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
can cause imprecise optical readings.
1. Remove the new cuvette segment from the shipping container and place the segment on a
lint-free, absorbent towel.
2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the inside and outside of all the cuvettes in
the cuvette segment.
3. Fill a clean, residue-free container with enough purified water to completely submerge the
cuvette segment.
4. Rinse the cuvette segment in the purified water to remove the Detergent A. Drain any
excess purified water from the cuvettes.
5. Dry the top of the cuvette segment, especially the slotted edges, to remove any remaining
purified water.
6. Position the cuvette segment on the reaction carousel alignment pins.
NOTE: To ensure optimal performance throughout the life span of the c-series processing
module, the cuvettes need to be replaced after 12 years of use.
7. Tighten the slotted screw by hand on the cuvette segment.
8. Gently tighten the slotted screw with a slotted screwdriver.
9. Repeat steps 1, page 851 through 8, page 852 until all the cuvette segments to replace are
cleaned and are installed.
10. Close the rear processing center cover.
11. Turn the procedure key to the Off setting and remove the key from the processing module
procedure lock.
Verification
Perform Reaction Mechanism diagnostic procedure 5004 Reaction Carousel Home and Move (c-
series), page 791.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
IMPORTANT: Wear gloves to perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
interferes with the appropriate drying function of the cuvette dry tip.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the front processing center cover.
3. Loosen the black knurled knob at the left side of the cuvette washer until the cuvette
washer assembly can be lifted from the mounting bracket.
4. Lift the cuvette washer assembly and rotate it so that the white cuvette dry tip can be
accessed easily.
NOTE: The cuvette washer nozzles are attached to the nozzle mounting plate. The screws
that secure the cuvette washer nozzles to the mounting plate do not need to be removed.
5. To remove the cuvette dry tip, pull the tip off the metal nozzle.
6. Dispose of the used cuvette dry tip.
Replacement
1. Gently install the new cuvette dry tip. Carefully and appropriately orient the cuvette dry tip.
NOTE: The cuvette dry tip and the cuvette are both rectangular in shape. Install the cuvette
dry tip so that it fits into the cuvette.
2. Position the bottom of the cuvette dry tip 61 mm ± 0.5 mm from the underside of the cuvette
washer assembly.
3. Position the cuvette washer assembly on the alignment pins, and then tighten the black
knurled knob.
4. To return the cuvette washer assembly and the reaction carousel to the home position,
perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4207 Move Cuvette Washer (c-series), page
783.
5. Verify the rectangular orientation and alignment of the cuvette dry tip with the cuvette.
NOTE: If the cuvette dry tip needs to be adjusted, wear gloves. Residual oil from an
ungloved hand interferes with the appropriate drying function of the cuvette dry tip.
6. On the Perform Procedure screen, tap Down to move the cuvette washer assembly
downward.
7. Verify that the cuvette dry tip is correctly aligned and that it moves smoothly into the
cuvettes.
8. To move the cuvette washer assembly upward, tap Up.
9. To end the procedure, tap End Procedure.
10. To complete the procedure, tap Done on the Perform Procedure screen.
11. Close the front processing center cover.
12. Turn the procedure key to the Off setting and remove the key from the processing module
procedure lock.
Verification
1. Perform As-Needed maintenance procedure 5910 Wash Cuvettes (c-series), page 767.
2. Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample
results.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover:
– To replace mixer 1, lift the front processing center cover.
– To replace mixer 2, lift the rear processing center cover.
3. To unplug the mixer cable, pinch the white connector.
4. Loosen the thumbscrew on the top of the mixer assembly.
5. Remove the mixer.
Replacement
1. Align the new mixer so that the flat side faces away from the mixer arm.
2. Align the positioning pins on the top of the mixer with the holes on the mixer arm. Tighten
the thumbscrew until the top of the mixer is flush with the mixer arm.
3. Attach the mixer cable connector to the white connector on the mixer assembly.
NOTE: The mixer cable connector is keyed and can be inserted only one way.
Verification
1. Perform Reaction Mechanism diagnostic procedure 5002 Mixer Vibration Test (c-series),
page 790.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
Removal
5. Use the bar code scanner to scan the two-dimensional (2D) bar code on the Alinity c label
of the new ICT module box.
Under Supply Details in the ICT Module flyout, the system automatically updates the ICT
module with the serial number and expiration date of the new module.
To enter manually the lot number and the expiration date, perform the following steps:
a. Tap Update for the ICT module.
b. Under Supply Details in the ICT Module flyout, enter the serial number and the
expiration date.
NOTE: Entry of the expiration date is optional. If the expiration date is not provided,
expiration tracking for the module is disabled.
c. Tap Replace.
6. When a confirmation message is displayed, perform one of the following steps:
– Tap Yes to continue and confirm that calibrations for all ICT assays are inactivated.
Instructions to replace the ICT module are displayed.
– Tap No to continue without saving the changes. Tap Done to return to the Supplies
screen.
7. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the ICT unit.
8. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews that secure the black plate on the top of the unit.
9. Remove the black plate.
10. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip.
11. Loosen the thumbscrew on the side of the ICT holder until the ICT module can be lifted
upward.
12. To disconnect the black electrical connector from the side of the module, pull the connector
straight out of the module.
13. Verify that the black electrical connector is disconnected completely from the ICT module.
14. Lift the ICT module until the connectors on the side of the ICT module clear the ICT holder.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the ICT probe, do not lift the ICT module and the probe
all the way out of the ICT holder.
15. Gently unscrew the ICT module to disconnect it from the top connector.
16. Lift the ICT module and the ICT probe straight upward and out of the ICT holder.
17. Unscrew the ICT probe holder from the ICT module.
18. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The yellow O-rings must be present.
IMPORTANT: If the c-series processing module is run without the yellow O-rings in the
appropriate position, sample results may be adversely affected.
19. If the ICT module will be replaced, dispose of the used module.
If the ICT module will not be replaced, set aside the module for use with the new ICT probe.
Replacement
1. To replace the ICT module, remove the new ICT module from the box.
2. Disconnect and discard the plastic tubing that is attached to both ends of the ICT module.
3. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The yellow O-rings must be present.
IMPORTANT: If the system is run without the yellow O-rings in the appropriate position,
sample results may be adversely affected.
4. Align the ICT module so that the gap between the side connectors is on top of the module
and the module label is facing upward and is legible.
5. Place the ICT probe into the ICT probe holder.
6. Attach the ICT probe holder and ICT probe to the bottom of the ICT module. Do not
overtighten the ICT probe holder.
IMPORTANT: The O-rings may twist and obstruct the flow through the ICT module if the ICT
probe holder connection is overtightened.
7. Insert the ICT module with the ICT probe into the ICT probe holder until the connectors on
the side of the module are located above the top of the holder.
8. Rotate the ICT module to reattach the module to the top port and to the connector. Do not
overtighten the ICT module.
9. Lower the ICT module until the module is seated completely and the module connectors are
aligned with the slot in the ICT holder.
10. Gently reconnect the black electrical connector to the ICT module connectors. Ensure that
the ICT module is plugged completely into the connector.
11. Press down on the ICT module and simultaneously tighten the side thumbscrew until the
module is secure. Do not overtighten the thumbscrew to prevent damage to the ICT module.
12. To flush the ICT module, perform one of the following steps:
– If the ICT module was replaced, tap Flush ICT in the ICT Module flyout.
– If the ICT probe was replaced, perform ICT diagnostic procedure 5102 Flush ICT
Module (c-series), page 792.
13. During the flush, perform the following steps:
– Inspect the tubing from the ICT module for bubbles.
– Inspect the ICT probe to ensure that it does not drip.
NOTE: If bubbles or drips are observed, see Processing module observed problems (c-
series), page 1264.
14. Replace the black plate and tighten the two captive thumbscrews.
15. If the ICT module was replaced, tap Done in the ICT Module flyout.
16. Close the rear processing center cover.
Verification
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (c-series), page 827
Supplies screen element descriptions (c-series), page 501
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Legend:
1. Sample syringe
2. Reagent syringes
3. Wash solution syringes
4. Wash solution pump syringes (1 mL) and check valves
5. ICT Reference Solution pump syringes (1 mL) and check valves
6. ICT aspiration pump syringes (1 mL) and check valve
Related information...
Component replacement, page 827
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c-series), page 865
Replace the check valves (c-series), page 868
Replace the wash solution syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c-series), page 871
Replace the reagent syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c-series), page 878
Replace the sample syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c-series) , page 885
To replace all 1 mL syringes and to document the procedure in the maintenance log, perform
Quarterly maintenance procedure 5804 Change 1 mL Syringes (c-series), page 763.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
6. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to absorb any liquid.
7. Unscrew the syringe assembly from the check valve.
Replacement
– For the wash solution pump, perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4206 Flush
Bulk Solutions (c-series), page 782.
6. Inspect the syringe tubing and connections for drips and leaks during the flush. If drips or
leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
7. If the procedure key was turned on, turn the key to the Off setting and remove the key from
the processing module procedure lock.
8. Close the bulk solution door.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Supply and pump center component replacement (c-series), page 864
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
To replace the ICT check valves and to document the procedure in the maintenance log,
perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5805 Check and Change ICT Check Valves (c-series),
page 764.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
Replacement
1. Install the new check valve onto the syringe and tighten the valve by hand.
2. Reattach the tubing to the side and top ports on the check valve and tighten the tubing by
hand.
3. Install the syringe. Ensure that the plunger flange and the bottom of the syringe barrel are
aligned in the syringe holder.
4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area.
5. Reinstall the clear plunger shield and secure it with the black knobs. Tighten the black
knobs by hand.
6. Perform the following diagnostic procedures to remove any air that may be present:
– For the ICT Reference Solution pump and the ICT aspiration pump, perform ICT
diagnostic procedure 5102 Flush ICT Module (c-series), page 792.
– For the wash solution pump, perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4206 Flush
Bulk Solutions (c-series), page 782.
7. Inspect the syringe tubing and check valve connections for drips and leaks during the flush.
If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
8. If the procedure key was turned on, turn the key to the Off setting and remove the key from
the processing module procedure lock.
9. Close the bulk solution door.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Supply and pump center component replacement (c-series), page 864
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Replace the wash solution syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c-series)
To replace the wash solution syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, perform the following
procedures:
• Removal, page 873
– Remove the wash solution syringe, page 873
– Remove the seal tips and the O-ring, page 874
• Replacement, page 876
– Install the seal tips and the O-ring, page 876
– Install the wash solution syringe, page 877
• Verification, page 878
To replace the O-rings and seal tips for both wash solution syringes and to document the
procedure in the maintenance log, perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5802 Wash
Solution Syringe Maintenance (c-series), page 762.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Open the bulk solution door and locate the wash solution pump.
2. Unscrew the two black knobs to remove the clear plastic plunger shield.
3. Pull the three 1 mL syringes forward to remove them from the white syringe holder. Do not
disconnect the tubing from the syringes.
4. Place the three 1 mL syringes to the left side of the white syringe holder.
5. Use the Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two Phillips screws to remove the white syringe
holder.
6. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw that secures the clear syringe block.
NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be removed completely.
7. Pull the clear syringe block forward to remove it from the syringe drive.
8. Place absorbent towels under the clear syringe block to absorb any liquid when the tubing is
disconnected.
9. Disconnect the tubing labeled 2 and labeled 3 from the top and front of the clear syringe
block.
NOTE: Ensure that the black O-rings remain in the clear syringe block after the tubing is
disconnected.
10. Identify the wash solution syringe for which the O-ring and seal tips will be replaced.
1. Use the 10 mm wrench to loosen the nut that secures the syringe plunger to the bottom of
the clear syringe block.
2. Turn the nut by hand until the syringe plunger can be removed from the clear syringe block.
The plunger assembly includes the following parts in order:
a. O-ring
b. Seal tip 2
c. Spacer
d. Seal tip 1
e. Spring
f. Nut
g. Plunger with the plunger flange
The O-ring can remain in the syringe when the plunger assembly is removed.
3. Remove and discard the following items:
– O-ring
– Seal tip 2
– Seal tip 1
NOTE: Do not discard the spacer. Set aside the spacer and the remainder of the plunger
assembly parts.
Do not remove the spring from the nut.
4. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab. Dry the plunger completely with an
absorbent towel if liquid is present.
Replacement
1. Install seal tip 1 on the plunger so that the seal tip sits above the spring with the open side
away from the spring.
2. Install the spacer so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1.
3. Install seal tip 2 on top of the spacer with the open side toward the spacer.
4. Install the O-ring so that it fits into the groove of seal tip 2. Do not push the O-ring out of
alignment. The O-ring must sit flat against the inside of the clear syringe block.
5. Press lightly to push all the components together.
6. Install the plunger assembly into the clear syringe block.
7. Tighten by hand the nut that holds the plunger assembly in the clear syringe block until the
nut is tight.
NOTE: The nut must be flush with the clear syringe block. If the nut binds when tightening it,
do not apply excessive force. Back out the nut one turn. Then, push in the nut to apply
pressure against the spring and continue to tighten the nut.
8. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut, but do not overtighten it.
1. Ensure that the black O-rings remain in the clear syringe block.
2. Reattach the knurled connection for the tubing labeled 2 to the top left opening of the clear
syringe block.
3. Reattach the knurled connection for the tubing labeled 3 to the top right opening of the clear
syringe block.
4. Reattach the knurled connection for the tubing labeled 2 from the 1 mL syringe to the front
left opening of the clear syringe block.
5. Reattach the knurled connection for the tubing labeled 3 from the 1 mL syringe to the front
right opening of the clear syringe block.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Supply and pump center component replacement (c-series), page 864
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Replace the reagent syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c-series)
To replace the reagent syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, perform the following procedures:
• Removal, page 880
– Remove the reagent syringe, page 880
To replace the O-rings and seal tips for both the R1 and R2 reagent syringes and to document
the procedure in the maintenance log, perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5803 Reagent
Syringe Maintenance (c-series), page 763.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Open the bulk solution door and locate the syringe cover for the sample and reagent
syringes.
2. Remove the sample and reagent syringe tubing from the clamps on the syringe cover.
3. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two Phillips screws enough to pull the cover away
from the syringes.
4. Identify the reagent syringe for which the O-rings and seal tips will be replaced.
5. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw that secures the syringe block. Do
not attempt to remove the syringe block.
6. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw that holds the syringe bracket over
the syringe plunger. Do not remove the screw or the syringe bracket.
7. Pull the reagent syringe away from the syringe drive and the syringe bracket.
8. Place an absorbent towel under the reagent syringe to absorb any liquid.
9. Unscrew the knurled connections at the top and side of the syringe block to disconnect the
tubing.
NOTE: Ensure that the black O-rings remain in the syringe block after the tubing is
disconnected.
1. Use the 15 mm wrench to loosen the nut that secures the syringe plunger to the bottom of
the syringe block.
2. Turn the nut by hand until the syringe plunger can be removed from the syringe block.
The plunger assembly includes the following parts in order:
a. O-ring
b. Seal tip 2
c. Spacer
d. Seal tip 1
e. Spring
f. Nut
g. Plunger with the plunger flange
The O-ring can remain in the syringe when the plunger assembly is removed.
3. Remove and discard the following items:
– O-ring
– Seal tip 2
– Seal tip 1
NOTE: Do not discard the spacer. Set aside the spacer and the remainder of the plunger
assembly parts.
Do not remove the spring from the nut.
4. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab. Dry the plunger completely with an
absorbent towel if liquid is present.
Replacement
1. Install seal tip 1 on the plunger so that the seal tip sits above the spring with the open side
away from the spring.
2. Install the spacer so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1.
3. Install seal tip 2 on top of the spacer with the open side toward the spacer.
4. Install the O-ring so that it fits into the groove of seal tip 2. Do not push the O-ring out of
alignment. The O-ring must sit flat against the inside of the syringe block.
5. Press lightly to push all the components together.
6. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block.
7. Tighten by hand the nut that holds the plunger assembly in the syringe block until the nut is
tight.
NOTE: The nut must be flush with the syringe block. If the nut binds when tightening it, do
not apply excessive force. Back out the nut one turn. Then, push in the nut to apply
pressure against the spring and continue to tighten the nut.
8. Use the 15 mm wrench to further tighten the nut, but do not overtighten it.
6. Place the syringe block on the alignment pin and tighten the slotted screw by hand until the
screw is tight.
7. Further tighten the slotted screw with the slotted screwdriver.
8. Use the slotted screwdriver to tighten the slotted screw that holds the syringe bracket to the
syringe drive.
9. Replace the syringe cover and tighten the two Phillips screws with the Phillips screwdriver.
10. Replace the sample and reagent syringe tubing in the clamps on the syringe cover.
11. To remove any air that may be present, perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205
Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
12. Inspect the syringe tubing and connections for drips and leaks during the flush. If drips or
leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
13. Close the bulk solution door.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Supply and pump center component replacement (c-series), page 864
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Replace the sample syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c-series)
To replace the sample syringe O-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, perform the following procedures:
• Removal, page 887
– Remove the sample syringe, page 887
– Remove the seal tips and the O-ring, page 888
• Replacement, page 890
– Install the seal tips and the O-ring, page 890
– Install the sample syringe, page 891
• Verification, page 892
– Run quality control samples, page 892
• 10 mm wrench
• Absorbent towels
• Cotton swabs
To replace the O-ring and seal tips for the sample syringe and to document the procedure in the
maintenance log, perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5801 Sample Syringe Maintenance
(c-series), page 761.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Open the bulk solution door and locate the syringe cover for the sample and reagent
syringes.
2. Remove the sample and reagent syringe tubing from the clamps on the syringe cover.
3. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two Phillips screws enough to pull the cover away
from the syringes.
4. Identify the sample syringe.
5. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw that secures the syringe block. Do
not attempt to remove the syringe block.
6. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw that holds the syringe bracket over
the syringe plunger. Do not remove the screw or the syringe bracket.
7. Pull the sample syringe away from the syringe drive and the syringe bracket.
8. Place an absorbent towel under the sample syringe to absorb any liquid.
9. Unscrew the knurled connections at the top and side of the syringe block to disconnect the
tubing.
NOTE: Ensure that the black O-rings remain in the syringe block after the tubing is
disconnected.
1. Use the 10 mm wrench to loosen the nut that secures the syringe plunger to the bottom of
the syringe block.
2. Turn the nut by hand until the syringe plunger can be removed from the syringe block.
The plunger assembly includes the following parts in order:
a. O-ring
b. Seal tip 2
c. Spacer
d. Seal tip 1
e. Spring
f. Nut
g. Plunger with the plunger flange
The O-ring can remain in the syringe when the plunger assembly is removed.
3. Remove and discard the following items:
– O-ring
– Seal tip 2
– Seal tip 1
NOTE: Do not discard the spacer. Set aside the spacer and the remainder of the plunger
assembly parts.
Do not remove the spring from the nut.
4. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab. Dry the plunger completely with an
absorbent towel if liquid is present.
Replacement
1. Install seal tip 1 on the plunger so that the seal tip sits above the spring with the open side
away from the spring.
2. Install the spacer so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1.
3. Install seal tip 2 on top of the spacer with the open side toward the spacer.
4. Install the O-ring so that it fits into the groove of seal tip 2. Do not push the O-ring out of
alignment. The O-ring must sit flat against the inside of the syringe block.
5. Press lightly to push all the components together.
6. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block.
7. Tighten by hand the nut that holds the plunger assembly in the syringe block until the nut is
tight.
NOTE: The nut must be flush with the syringe block. If the nut binds when tightening it, do
not apply excessive force. Back out the nut one turn. Then, push in the nut to apply
pressure against the spring and continue to tighten the nut.
8. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut, but do not overtighten it.
6. Place the syringe block on the alignment pin and tighten the slotted screw by hand until the
screw is tight.
7. Further tighten the slotted screw with the slotted screwdriver.
8. Use the slotted screwdriver to tighten the slotted screw that holds the syringe bracket to the
syringe drive.
9. Replace the syringe cover and tighten the two Phillips screws with the Phillips screwdriver.
10. Replace the sample and reagent syringe tubing in the clamps on the syringe cover.
11. To remove any air that may be present, perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205
Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
12. Inspect the syringe tubing and connections for drips and leaks during the flush. If drips or
leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
13. Close the bulk solution door.
Verification
Perform quality control testing to verify the system performance before reporting sample results.
Related information...
Supply and pump center component replacement (c-series), page 864
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Legend:
1. Wash zone 2 probes (WZ2)
2. Sample pipettor probe (S)
3. Wash zone 1 probes (WZ1)
4. Liquid waste arm probe
5. Reagent pipettor probe (R1)
6. Reagent pipettor probe (R2)
Related information...
Component replacement, page 827
Replace a sample or reagent pipettor probe (i-series), page 894
Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897
Replace the liquid waste arm probe (i-series), page 900
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. This activity or area may expose you to moving parts.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the pipettor probe.
3. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tubing connection.
4. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the probe tubing from the probe.
5. Rotate the probe retainer counterclockwise until it clears the probe.
6. Lift the probe and remove it from the boom arm.
Replacement
Verification
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (i-series), page 892
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. This activity or area may expose you to moving parts.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the wash zone probes.
3. Locate the wash zone probe to replace on the appropriate wash zone.
4. To disconnect the electrical connector from the WZ ASP cable, press the connector tab and
pull apart the electrical connector and the connector tab.
5. Unscrew the thumbscrew that secures the probe block assembly to the wash zone elevator
assembly.
6. Lift the probe block assembly to access the wash zone probe tubing.
7. To disconnect the wash zone probe tubing from the wash zone probes, gently pull the tubing
and slide it off each probe.
8. Invert the probe block assembly so that the wash zone probes are facing upward.
9. Unscrew the two thumbscrews that secure the wash zone monitor housing (black) to the
probe housing (blue). Do not disconnect the two assemblies.
10. With the wash zone monitor housing and the probe housing still connected, invert the probe
block assembly so that the wash zone probes are facing downward.
11. Disconnect the wash zone monitor housing from the probe housing.
12. Remove the wash zone probe.
Replacement
1. Slide the wash zone probe into the probe housing (blue).
2. Align the L-shaped cutout of the wash zone monitor housing (black) with the L-shaped
cutout of the probe housing. Guide the wash zone probes into the probe channel in the
wash zone monitor housing.
3. With the wash zone monitor housing and the probe housing connected, invert the probe
block assembly so that the wash zone probes are facing upward.
4. Tighten the two thumbscrews that secure the wash zone monitor housing to the probe
housing.
5. Push the wash zone probe tubing onto the wash zone probe until the tubing passes the ridge
on the probe.
NOTE: Position the tubing halfway between the bend and the ridge of the probe.
6. To install the probe block assembly on the wash zone elevator assembly, align the holes on
the probe block assembly with the pins on the wash zone elevator assembly.
7. Tighten the thumbscrew that secures the probe block assembly to the wash zone elevator
assembly.
8. To reconnect the electrical connector to the WZ ASP cable, align the notch on the electrical
connector with the connector tab.
Verification
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (i-series), page 892
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. This activity or area may expose you to moving parts.
Removal
1. Insert the procedure key into the processing module procedure lock and turn the key to the
On setting.
2. Lift the front processing center cover to access the liquid waste arm probe.
3. Remove the liquid waste arm probe tubing from the tubing clips on the liquid waste arm.
4. Lift the probe and remove it from the front of the liquid waste arm.
5. To disconnect the liquid waste arm probe tubing from the probe, gently pull the tubing and
slide it off the probe.
Replacement
1. Push the liquid waste arm probe tubing onto the liquid waste arm probe until the tubing
passes the ridge on the probe.
NOTE: Position the tubing halfway between the bend and the ridge of the probe.
2. Slide the probe into the front of the liquid waste arm until the probe is seated completely.
3. Insert the liquid waste arm probe tubing into the tubing clips on the liquid waste arm.
Verification
1. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page
804, Flush and Prime Manifolds, Wash Zone 1 option.
While performing the prime, observe the liquid waste arm probe tubing and confirm that
liquid is dispensed through the tubing.
2. Close the front processing center cover.
3. Turn the procedure key to the Off setting and remove the key from the processing module
procedure lock.
Related information...
Processing center component replacement (i-series), page 892
Use a procedure key to perform a procedure, page 747
Legend:
1. Concentrated Wash Buffer level sensor
2. Pre-Trigger Solution level sensor
3. Trigger Solution level sensor
Legend:
1. Diluted wash buffer level sensor
Related information...
Component replacement, page 827
Replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash Buffer
(i-series), page 906
Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series), page 909
Replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash
Buffer (i-series)
To replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash
Buffer, perform the following procedures:
• Removal, page 907
– Remove the bulk solution level sensor, page 907
• Replacement, page 908
– Install the bulk solution level sensor, page 908
• Verification, page 909
– Verify the functionality of the bulk solution level sensors, page 909
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Open the bulk solution door and pull out the reservoir tray.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the bulk solution level sensors. Avoid applying stress on
the wiring and connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the appropriate bulk solution level sensor.
3. Use an absorbent towel to absorb any spills.
4. Unscrew the two tubing fittings from the bulk solution level sensor.
5. Unscrew the bulk solution level sensor cap.
6. Remove the bulk solution level sensor from the reservoir.
Replacement
While performing the flush, inspect the tubing and connections of the bulk solution level
sensor for drips and leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
8. Slide the reservoir bottle tray into the bulk solution reservoir area and close the bulk solution
door.
Verification
Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1270 Bulk Solutions Motors and Sensors Test (i-
series), page 815, Read All Sensors option.
Related information...
Supply center component replacement (i-series), page 904
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
Removal
1. Remove the rear fluidics panel and pull out the pump drawer.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the diluted wash buffer level sensor. Avoid applying
stress on the wiring and connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the diluted wash buffer level sensor.
3. Use absorbent tissue to absorb any spills.
4. Insert the lock ring release tool between the tube fitting and the diluted wash buffer level
sensor.
5. Press the lock ring release tool toward the diluted wash buffer level sensor and pull the
tubing straight out of the level sensor.
6. Repeat steps 4, page 910 and 5, page 910 to remove the remaining tubing.
7. Unscrew the diluted wash buffer level sensor cap.
8. Remove the diluted wash buffer level sensor from the reservoir.
Replacement
1. Place the diluted wash buffer level sensor into the container.
2. Tighten the diluted wash buffer level sensor cap.
3. Connect the tubing from the buffer waste valve (located at the top of the dilution assembly
tray) to the input connector (labeled with an arrow that points toward the connector) on the
diluted wash buffer level sensor.
4. Align the tubing connector with the fitting and press the connector straight into the fitting.
5. Connect the tubing from the manifold in the pump drawer to the output connector (labeled
with an arrow that points away from the connector) on the diluted wash buffer level sensor.
6. Align the tubing connector with the fitting and press the connector straight into the fitting.
7. Slightly pull the connector to confirm that it is connected completely.
8. Connect the electrical connector of the diluted wash buffer level sensor.
9. Start the processing module.
10. To remove any air that may be present, perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200
Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804, Flush Wash Buffer option.
While performing the flush, inspect the tubing and connections of the diluted wash buffer
level sensor for drips and leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.
11. Slide the pump drawer into the rear fluidics area and replace the rear fluidics panel.
Verification
Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1270 Bulk Solutions Motors and Sensors Test (i-
series), page 815, Read All Sensors option.
Related information...
Supply center component replacement (i-series), page 904
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
Related information...
Component replacement, page 827
Replace the external waste pump (i-series), page 912
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
Removal
Replacement
1. Move the voltage switch on the external waste pump assembly to the correct position (115 V
or 230 V) according to the voltage requirements of the country.
2. Attach the power cord.
3. Connect the inlet lines.
4. Connect the outlet waste line.
5. Power on the external waste pump.
6. Press and hold the manual operation switch until the pump turns on.
7. Release the manual operation switch to leave the pump in Automatic mode.
Verification
Perform the appropriate Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure consecutive times to verify that the
external waste pump turns on and transports the waste fluid to the drain:
• 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782
• 1200 Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804, Flush Wash Buffer, All option
Related information...
Optional component replacement, page 912
NOTES
Introduction
Problems with the Alinity ci-series are characterized by symptoms. Troubleshooting tools,
references, and suggested techniques help to trace the symptom to one or more root causes.
After determining the root cause, perform the corrective actions to resolve the problem.
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
Alert Center flyout, page 927
System Logs screen, page 930
Message codes, page 941
Observed problems, page 1263
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 1290
Service, maintenance, and diagnostics, page 739
Approach to troubleshooting
To identify and resolve operational problems, become thoroughly familiar with normal system
operation. Effective troubleshooting requires a logical, step-by-step approach to resolve
problems. This approach focuses on the following activities:
• Observation, recognition, and categorization of symptoms
• Identification of the probable cause
• Systematic elimination of each potential problem (from the most likely problem to the least
likely problem)
The following troubleshooting model describes a five-step approach to define symptoms, identify
problems, and implement solutions. To troubleshoot the system, include considerations that are
appropriate to the laboratory environment.
1. Observe and recognize symptoms.
To analyze and resolve a problem, investigate what is incorrect and observe what is correct.
Symptoms help to identify the problem area and to eliminate areas that operate correctly.
Examples of symptoms include:
– Message codes.
– Observed problems such as a noise, a fluid leak, a monitor that flickers, or a trend in
controls.
2. Categorize symptoms.
To eliminate symptoms automatically as probable causes, classify symptoms by categories.
Categories of symptoms include:
– System
– Reagents
– Operator
– Environmental
3. Isolate the root cause and create a plan of action.
Based on the probable causes that are identified, devise a plan that first addresses the most
likely cause and then progresses to the least likely cause.
Address one probable cause at a time to isolate the resolution, and then apply the resolution
to a specific problem. Diagnostic resources and tools include:
– Message codes and messages.
– System logs.
– Control information.
– Maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
– This manual or the Help. Specific reference topics include the following sections in this
manual:
• Troubleshooting
• Service, maintenance, and diagnostics
• Performance characteristics and specifications
• Principles of operation
– The product documentation such as reagent and consumable information.
4. Resolve the problem.
Carefully perform the required steps to resolve the problem. Problems can be resolved by
the following actions:
– Make adjustments, such as tighten connections.
– Perform a calibration.
– Replace or repair system components.
– Run new controls.
5. Verify that the resolution worked.
Verify that symptoms do not occur:
– Perform the appropriate verification procedure.
– Confirm control values if appropriate.
If symptoms continue to occur, perform the steps to resolve the next most likely problem. Repeat
this process until the problem is resolved.
Related information...
Troubleshooting, page 917
System troubleshooting variables (c-series), page 919
System troubleshooting variables (i-series), page 921
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c-series), page 923
Reagent troubleshooting variables (i-series), page 924
Operator troubleshooting variables, page 925
Environmental troubleshooting variables, page 926
Fluidics subsystems
Fluidics subsystems are hardware components that control the precision and accuracy of liquid
level sensing, aspiration, and dispense. In addition, these components distribute the fluids used
to wash the probes:
Examples • Pipettors and probes
• Pressure monitors
• Syringes and valves
• Tubing
• Processing module circuit boards
• Pumps
• ICT unit
Optical subsystem
The optical subsystem has hardware components that control concise and accurate optical
readings:
Examples • Lamp
• Heat absorbing filter
• Lenses
• Cuvettes
• Water bath
• Optics
Hardware
The hardware has mechanical components that move consumables and samples through the
system and distribute power and electrical signals:
Examples • Reagent carousel
• Reaction carousel
• Sensors
• RSM bar code reader
Software
The software has computer instructions that interpret the system and assay information,
calculate results, and provide the interface to control the system hardware:
Consumables
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
Fluidics subsystems
Fluidics subsystems are hardware components that control the precision and accuracy of liquid
level sensing, aspiration, and dispense. In addition, these components distribute the fluids used
to wash the probes:
Examples • Pipettors and probes
• Liquid level sense (LLS) antennae
• Syringes and valves
• Pumps
Optical subsystem
The optical subsystem has hardware components that control concise and accurate optical
readings:
Examples • Optics
• Shutter
• Read magnet
Hardware
The hardware has mechanical components that move consumables and samples through the
system and distribute power and electrical signals:
Examples • Reagent carousel
• Sensors
• RV loader
• RSM bar code reader
Software
The software has computer instructions that interpret the system and assay information,
calculate results, and provide the interface to control the system hardware:
Consumables
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
Reagent kits
Reagent kits contain consumables that detect and measure the specific analyte presence or
concentration in samples:
Examples • Reagents
• Sample diluents
• Pretreatments
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes that are used to create the
calibration against which samples are measured:
Controls
Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that are used for performance
monitoring within a clinical range:
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
Reagent cartridges
Reagent cartridges contain consumables that detect and measure the specific analyte presence
or concentration in samples:
Examples • Antibody-coated microparticles
• Conjugate
• Assay-specific diluent
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes that are used to create the
calibration against which samples are measured:
Controls
Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that are used for performance
monitoring within a clinical range:
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
Physical requirements
Physical requirements identify the environmental conditions that are needed for optimal system
performance:
Examples • Room temperature and humidity
• Location and instrument clearances
• Water quality
Electrical requirements
Electrical requirements identify the power requirements that are needed for optimal system
performance and optical readings:
Host interface components enable communication between the host interface and the Alinity ci-
series:
Related information...
Approach to troubleshooting, page 918
The operator can clear all messages in the Alert Center flyout.
Related information...
Troubleshooting, page 917
Alert Center flyout element descriptions, page 927
View the probable cause and corrective action for a message, page 928
View additional messages that are associated with a message, page 928
Delete a message from the Alert Center, page 929
Elements
Function buttons
? Message Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
Alert Center flyout, page 927
Related information...
Alert Center flyout, page 927
Related information...
Alert Center flyout, page 927
Related information...
Alert Center flyout, page 927
Related information...
Troubleshooting, page 917
System Logs screen, All Messages tab element descriptions, page 930
System Logs screen, Notifications/Alerts tab element descriptions, page 932
System Logs screen, Informational tab element descriptions, page 933
System Logs screen, Inventory tab element descriptions, page 934
System Logs screen, User Access tab element descriptions, page 935
System Logs screen, Configuration tab element descriptions, page 936
System Logs screen, Host tab element descriptions, page 937
System Logs screen, Abbott Mail tab element descriptions, page 938
Message Details For flyout element descriptions, page 939
Descriptions of message types, page 940
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Message Type Displays the type of message code generated. The All
Messages tab has four message types:
• Alert
• Critical
• Informational
• Notification
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Message Type Displays the type of message code generated. The Inventory
tab has four message types:
• Alert
• Critical
• Informational
• Notification
Supply Name Displays the name of the supply item associated with the
message code.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged onto the system when
the message code was generated.
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Message Type Displays the type of message code generated. The User
Access tab has four message types:
• Alert
• Critical
• Informational
• Notification
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
• Informational
• Notification
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged onto the system when
the message code was generated.
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Message Type Displays the type of message code generated. The Host tab
has four message types:
• Alert
• Critical
• Informational
• Notification
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Message Type Displays the type of message code generated. The Abbott
Mail tab has four message types:
• Alert
• Critical
• Informational
• Notification
Mail Category Displays the type of Abbott Mail item associated with the
message code. The Abbott Mail tab has four mail categories:
• Assay File
• Assay Insert
• System Update
• Calibrator Data
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged onto the system when
the message code was generated.
Function buttons
Message Help Displays Help from the operations manual for the selected
message code.
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Descriptions of screen elements, page 127
Elements
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the message code was
generated.
Message Type Displays the type of message code generated. The Message
Details For flyout has four message types:
• Alert
• Critical
• Informational
• Notification
Function buttons
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Related information...
System Logs screen, page 930
Message codes
Message codes are divided into 10 sections that reflect the major categories in which errors may
occur. Probable causes and associated corrective actions are provided for each message code.
If the corrective actions for a message code do not resolve the problem, contact the local
representative or find country-specific contact information at abbottdiagnostics.com.
NOTE: Corrective actions may involve hazardous activity. Use caution to minimize operator
exposure and to prevent personal injury or system damage. Examples of hazardous activities
include:
• The replacement of system probes.
• The use of reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens.
• The removal of physical obstructions.
• The removal of system waste.
Related information...
Troubleshooting, page 917
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Support system message codes (6000-6999), page 1201
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
0106, page 945
0108, page 946
0109, page 946
0110, page 946
0117, page 946
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Water is present on the slotted edges of a cuvette Dry the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
segment.
The cuvette tab is broken. Replace the cuvette segments (c-series), page 848.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
The water in the water bath is not circulating because Change the water bath. Perform Reaction Mechanisms
the system was idle for an extended period of time. diagnostic procedure 5005 Exchange Water in Bath (c-
series), page 791.
The water bath is filling after an extended period of idle Verify that the temperature returns to specifications.
time. Perform Temperature diagnostic procedure 4301
Temperature Status (c-series), page 784.
The room temperature is outside specifications. Modify the room temperature to be within specifications.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Communication error. Review the message log for messages that occurred at
the same time as this message. Perform the corrective
action.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
The reagent access cover sensor failed. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
The calibrator or control was configured incorrectly or Verify that the calibrators or controls are configured on
has not been configured. the system. Perform Manually create a new calibrator
lot, page 260 or Manually create a new quality control
lot, page 295.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
1 = Subject
2 = List number
Probable cause Corrective action
A new Abbott Mail item was received. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
The incoming purified water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming purified water pressure to be
within specifications.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
A processing module cover was opened when a Tap OK on the screen. No corrective action is required.
diagnostic procedure was in process.
The processing module cover sensor failed. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
0 = Assay name
1 = Assay number
2 = Assay version
3 = Reagent lot
Probable cause Corrective action
The required assay file version is not installed on the Install the required assay file. Perform Install assay files,
system. page 272.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
0 = Control name
1 = Control lot
Probable cause Corrective action
The control lot number that was scanned has expired. Load a new control lot number. Perform Prepare and
load vials into vial racks for onboard storage, page 549.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
4 = Changed to
Probable cause Corrective action
The Westgard rule configuration was updated. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
General message codes (0001-0999), page 941
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
1000, page 992
1001, page 992
1002, page 992
1003, page 993
1004, page 993
1006, page 993
1037, page 993
1038, page 995
1039, page 996
1040, page 997
1041, page 998
1042, page 999
1043, page 1000
1044, page 1001
1045, page 1002
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c-series), page 852.
Debris is present in the water bath incubator. Perform Reaction Mechanisms diagnostic procedure
5005 Exchange Water in Bath (c-series), page 791.
The R2 pipettor is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
Bubbles is present in the water bath incubator because Decrease the incoming purified water pressure to be
of the pressure of the incoming water. within specifications.
Bubbles is present in the water bath incubator because Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
of a high gas content of the incoming water. failure.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c-series), page 852.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c-series), page 852.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Sample interferences (such as hemolysis or lipemia) Visually inspect the sample for possible interference
occurred. because of hemolysis, icterus, or turbidity, and then
perform one of the following actions:
• Redraw and rerun the sample if an interference is
observed.
• Rerun the sample if no interference is observed.
NOTE: View the sample interference indices to
determine increased interference levels, or view the
reaction graph to confirm abnormal absorbance
readings during the Blank read time (compare the
error to a normal result). Perform View the reaction
graph and absorbance data for a result (c-series),
page 634.
A high anticoagulant to plasma ratio is present (such as Redraw the sample into a anticoagulant tube that is
the sample tube is not filled adequately). adequately filled or use a serum sample. For more
information, see the assay documentation.
If an error occurs for calibration samples:
The wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was Place new calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes
loaded incorrectly. to ensure they are placed in the correct positions.
Repeat the calibration.
The calibrators are not performing as expected. Open a new calibrator.
The reagent is not performing as expected. Load a new reagent cartridge.
If an error occurs for all samples:
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
A sample handling error occurred. • Follow the sample handling instructions in the
assay-specific documentation.
• Rerun the sample.
• Source a different sample.
If an error occurs for more than one sample:
The Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution tubing 1. Empty the reservoirs. Rinse the reservoirs and
assemblies are switched. floats with purified water, and then remove excess
water.
2. Replace the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger
Solution bottles. Perform Replace bulk solutions
and update the inventory, page 508.
3. Perform the Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure
1200 Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the Pre-Trigger Solution
or Trigger Solution bottle so the level sensor is fully
seated in the reservoir.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or Trigger Solution volume is Replace the Pre-Trigger Solution or Trigger Solution and
too low. update the inventory.
Hardware failure: Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger pump failed. failure.
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger valve failed.
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger tubing connections are
loose.
• The temp-optics control board has a poor
connection or has failed.
• The optics failed.
• The shutter failed.
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger manifold failed.
• The Pre-Trigger vortexer failed.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
A sample handling error occurred. • Follow the sample handling instructions in the
assay-specific documentation.
• Rerun the sample.
• Source a different sample.
If an error occurs for more than one sample:
The Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution tubing 1. Empty the reservoirs. Rinse the reservoirs and
assemblies are switched. floats with purified water, and then remove excess
water.
2. Replace the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger
Solution bottles. Perform Replace bulk solutions
and update the inventory, page 508.
The level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the Pre-Trigger Solution
or Trigger Solution bottle so the level sensor is fully
seated in the reservoir.
2. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200
Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or Trigger Solution volume is Replace the Pre-Trigger Solution or Trigger Solution and
too low. update the inventory.
Hardware failure: Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger pump failed. failure.
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger valve failed.
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger tubing connections are
loose.
• The temp-optics control board has a poor
connection or has failed.
• The optics failed.
• The shutter failed.
• The Pre-Trigger or Trigger manifold failed.
• The Pre-Trigger vortexer failed.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
3 = Mail category
Probable cause Corrective action
The operator attempted to accept an assay file that is a Status message. To accept the lower version of the
lower version than another installed assay file. Only the assay file, perform one of the following corrective
highest version of available assay files can be accepted. actions:
• Uninstall the higher version of the assay file.
NOTE: When an assay file is uninstalled,
calibrations for the assay file and any assay
configuration including controls are deleted.
• Delete the assay file.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The lamp was not seated correctly when it was Repeat the lamp replacement procedure. Perform
replaced. Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
• Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the
lamp plate and in the housing.
• Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws
in terminal block.
The lamp is not performing as expected. Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c-series), page 852.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c-series), page 852.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
5 = Control level
6 = Module
Probable cause Corrective action
A control received a Westgard rule failure flag. 1. Review the QC results for the specified control.
2. See Controls out of range (c-series), page 1272 of
the sample results observed problems for the
corrective action. See Controls out of range (i-
series), page 1277 of the sample results observed
problems for the corrective action.
3. Rerun the same control level or levels after the
corrective action is performed.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
2 = Assay name
3 = Assay version
Probable cause Corrective action
The assay is not installed on the system. Install the assay on the system and configure the control
lot before the order is processed. Perform Install assay
files, page 272 and Manually create a new quality
control lot, page 295.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
A calibration failed when an order was in process. 1. Calibrate the assay for the reagent cartridge.
Perform Prepare and load vials into vial racks for
immediate use, page 572 and Load racks on the
reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 526.
2. Rerun the test. Perform Rerun a test or an
exception for a specimen or control, page 612.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
3 = Assay version
Probable cause Corrective action
The retest rule was deleted. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The calibrators are not performing as expected. 1. Open new calibrator bottles or vials.
2. Repeat the calibration.
The reagent is not performing as expected. 1. Load a new reagent cartridge. Perform Load
cartridges on the reagent and sample manager
(RSM), page 527
2. Repeat the calibration.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Empty the bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), page 1297
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Empty the bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), page 1297
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Empty the bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), page 1297
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
1 = Assay number
Probable cause Corrective action
The combined sample and reagent volume is less than If the assay uses a photometric read point of less than
80 μL at a defined read time. 19, for any defined read time, verify that the combined
sample and reagent volume defined for the sample or
diluted sample, the R1 reagent, or the R1 water is
greater than or equal to 80 μL.
The assay has been configured with no calibrator set 1. Select or configure a calibrator set for the assay.
when one was previously defined.
2. Recalibrate the assay.
An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify that the assay configuration settings are
configured correctly. See Edit calibration settings of
assay parameters (c-series photometric), page 235.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The reaction mode is incorrectly defined. Select the appropriate reaction mode.
The dispense system is not performing correctly. Verify that the dispense components are functioning
correctly.
The lamp is not performing as expected. Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
The reagent is not performing as expected. Load a new reagent cartridge.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The dispense system is not performing correctly. Verify that the dispense components are functioning
correctly.
The lamp is not performing as expected. Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
The calibrator is not performing as expected. Load a new calibrator.
The reagent is not performing as expected. Load a new reagent cartridge.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The calibrators were on the system for an extended Load new calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes.
period of time.
The dispense system is not performing correctly. Verify that the dispense components are functioning
correctly.
The lamp is not performing as expected. Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
The calibrator is not performing as expected. Load a new calibrator.
The reagent is not performing as expected. Load a new reagent cartridge.
The expected cal factor or expected cal factor tolerance If a re-evaluation of the expected cal factor is needed
percent values need to be re-evaluated. for the laboratory, perform the following steps:
1. Collect cal factor values from multiple calibration
curves, or review calibration curve details reports
for recent historical curves. (A thorough study
requires multiple cartridges and multiple reagent
lots.) During this collection period, ensure the
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The ICT module O-rings are missing or are not seated Ensure the O-rings are present and are seated correctly.
correctly. If necessary, perform Replace the ICT module or the ICT
probe (c-series), page 859.
The ICT probe is not connected correctly. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT
module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT
aspiration pump.
The ICT Reference Solution tubing is not connected Tighten the tubing connections at the top and at the side
correctly. of each check valve in the ICT Reference Solution
pump.
The ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT
Reference Solution pump and in the ICT aspiration
pump.
The ICT check valves are not functioning. Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5805 Check
and Change ICT Check Valves (c-series), page 764.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or the ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
Reference Solution pump are not seated correctly.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or the ICT Perform 5804 Change 1 mL Syringes (c-series), page
Reference Solution pump are leaking. 763.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The dispense system is not performing correctly. Verify that the dispense components are functioning
correctly.
The lamp is not performing as expected. Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
The calibrator is not performing as expected. Load a new calibrator.
The reagent is not performing as expected. Load a new reagent cartridge.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
0 = Assay name
1 = Assay number
Probable cause Corrective action
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purity of the purified water is within
specifications.
The calibrator is not performing as expected if the blank Load a new calibrator.
calibrator is defined to use a zero concentration
calibrator rather than water.
The reagent is not performing as expected. Load a new reagent cartridge.
The lamp was not seated correctly when it was Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
replaced. Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
• Ensure that the lamp is seated correctly against the
lamp plate and in the housing.
• Ensure that the lamp cables are secured by the
screws in terminal block.
The lamp is not performing as expected. Replace the lamp or the lamp plate (c-series), page 844.
Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5806 Change
Lamp (c-series), page 764.
The cuvettes are dirty. Perform Reaction Mechanisms diagnostic procedure
5003 Clean Cuvettes - Manually (c-series), page 790.
The cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip (c-series), page 852.
Debris is present in the water bath incubator. Perform Reaction Mechanisms diagnostic procedure
5005 Exchange Water in Bath (c-series), page 791.
Bubbles are present in the water bath incubator because Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
of a high gas content of the incoming water. failure.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The dispense system is not performing correctly. Verify that the dispense components are functioning
correctly.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
The ICT module O-rings are missing or are not seated Ensure the O-rings are present and are seated correctly.
correctly. If necessary, perform Replace the ICT module or the ICT
probe (c-series), page 859.
The ICT probe is not connected correctly. Tighten the probe to the ICT module by hand. Perform
Replace the ICT module or the ICT probe (c-series),
page 859.
The ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT
module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT
aspiration pump.
The ICT Reference Solution tubing is not connected Tighten the connections at the top and at the side of
correctly. each check valve in the ICT Reference Solution pump.
The ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT
Reference Solution pump and in the ICT aspiration
pump.
The ICT check valves are not functioning. Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5805 Check
and Change ICT Check Valves (c-series), page 764.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or the ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
Reference Solution pump are not seated correctly.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or the ICT Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5804 Change
Reference Solution pump are leaking. 1 mL Syringes (c-series), page 763.
The ICT module is not performing as expected. Replace the ICT module or the ICT probe (c-series),
page 859.
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Assay-specific message codes (1000-1999), page 988
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
2050, page 1049
2057, page 1049
2058, page 1049
2059, page 1050
2060, page 1050
2062, page 1050
2075, page 1050
2076, page 1051
2077, page 1051
2081, page 1051
2082, page 1052
2083, page 1052
2084, page 1052
2085, page 1052
2087, page 1053
2089, page 1053
2090, page 1053
2091, page 1053
2092, page 1054
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
0 = Bulk solution
Probable cause Corrective action
The bulk solution bottle inventory is empty, has reached Replace bulk solutions and update the inventory, page
the onboard stability expiration date, or is expired. 508.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
2 = Procedure version
Probable cause Corrective action
The operator attempted to uninstall a procedure while Uninstall the procedure after the procedure is
the procedure is in process. completed.
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Maintenance and diagnostic message codes (2000-2999), page 1047
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
3002, page 1072
3003, page 1072
3004, page 1072
3005, page 1073
3006, page 1073
3007, page 1074
3008, page 1074
3009, page 1075
3010, page 1075
3011, page 1075
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4103 R1 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4103 R1 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4103 R1 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4103 R1 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4103 R1 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4103 R1 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purified water purity is within
specifications.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4104 R2 Pipettor
Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes (c-series), page 832.
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purified water purity is within
specifications.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The sample pipettor probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4102 Sample
Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779.
The sample pipettor probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c-series), page 829.
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purified water purity is within
specifications.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
A sample probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4102 Sample
Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779.
A sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c-series), page 829.
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purified water purity is within
specifications. See Processing module water and liquid
waste specifications and requirements (c-series), page
407.
• The liquid level sense board threshold voltage is Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
out of range. failure.
• The liquid level sense cable is defective.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
A sample probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4102 Sample
Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779.
A sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c-series), page 829.
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purified water purity is within
specifications. See Processing module water and liquid
waste specifications and requirements (c-series), page
407.
• The liquid level sense board threshold voltage is Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
out of range. failure.
• The liquid level sense cable is defective.
• The liquid level sense board is defective.
• A connector on the SCM board is loose.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
A sample probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4102 Sample
Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779.
A sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c-series), page 829.
The sample probe tubing connections are loose or Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing.
leaking.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
A sample probe is out of alignment. Perform Pipettors diagnostic procedure 4102 Sample
Pipettor Calibration (c-series), page 779.
A sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe (c-series), page 829.
The water quality is below specifications. Verify that the purified water purity is within
specifications. See Processing module water and liquid
waste specifications and requirements (c-series), page
407.
• The liquid level sense board threshold voltage is Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
out of range. failure.
• The liquid level sense cable is defective.
• The liquid level sense board is defective.
• A connector on the SCM board is loose.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
3 = Pipettor
Probable cause Corrective action
Communication error. Cycle power to the processing module and the reagent
and sample manager (RSM), page 432.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace a sample or reagent pipettor probe (i-series),
page 894.
The reagent cartridge level is low or empty. Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager
(RSM), page 527.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The reagent probe is damaged. Replace a sample or reagent pipettor probe (i-series),
page 894.
The reagent cartridge level is low or empty. Load cartridges on the reagent and sample manager
(RSM), page 527.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The knurled screws that secure the wash zone assembly 1. Tighten the four knurled screws that secure the
to the process path are loose. wash zone elevator assembly to the process path.
2. Tighten the two knurled screws that secure the
wash zone assembly to the wash zone elevator
assembly.
A wash zone probe is out of alignment. Remove the wash zone probe. Realign the wash zone
probe in the wash zone probe housing. Perform Replace
the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash monitoring system is not calibrated. Perform the Calibration and Test option of Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash
Monitoring (i-series), page 813 or 1262 Wash Zone 2
Wash Monitoring (i-series), page 814.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
0 = Wash zone
1 = Position
3 = LLS valve
4 = Expected value
Probable cause Corrective action
The wash zone tubing connections are loose or leaking. Reconnect the wash zone tubing to the affected probe
for the indicated wash zone.
A wash zone probe is obstructed. Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash monitoring system is not calibrated. Perform the Calibration and Test option of Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash
Monitoring (i-series), page 813 or 1262 Wash Zone 2
Wash Monitoring (i-series), page 814.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
0 = Wash zone
1 = Probe
Probable cause Corrective action
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
The knurled screws that secure the wash zone assembly 1. Tighten the four knurled screws that secure the
to the process path are loose. wash zone elevator assembly to the process path.
2. Tighten the two knurled screws that secure the
wash zone assembly to the wash zone elevator
assembly.
A wash zone probe is out of alignment. Remove the wash zone probe. Realign the wash zone
probe in the wash zone probe housing. Perform Replace
the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash monitoring system is not calibrated. Perform the Calibration and Test option of Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Maintenance is being performed on the purified water Do not operate the system while the purified water
system. system is undergoing cleaning or maintenance.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Maintenance is being performed on the purified water Do not operate the system while the purified water
system. system is undergoing cleaning or maintenance.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Maintenance is being performed on the purified water Do not operate the system while the purified water
system. system is undergoing cleaning or maintenance.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Level sense and fluidics message codes (3000-3999), page 1068
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
4000, page 1124
4011, page 1124
4012, page 1124
4013, page 1124
4014, page 1125
4015, page 1125
4016, page 1125
4017, page 1125
4018, page 1126
4019, page 1126
4301, page 1126
4308, page 1126
4309, page 1127
4310, page 1127
4311, page 1127
4312, page 1128
4313, page 1128
4314, page 1128
4315, page 1129
4400, page 1129
4401, page 1129
4402, page 1130
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Optics and bar code reader message codes (4000-4999), page 1123
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
5006, page 1138
5007, page 1138
5008, page 1139
5009, page 1139
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
The pressure of the incoming purified water is too low. Increase the incoming purified water pressure to be
within specifications. See Processing module water and
liquid waste specifications and requirements (c-series),
page 407.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
0 = Diverter
Probable cause Corrective action
The diverter failed. Start the processing module and the reagent and sample
manager (RSM), page 447. Perform Process Path
diagnostic procedure 1505 Diverter Test (i-series), page
817.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
The water source supply is obstructed. 1. Verify that the tubing from the water source is not
crimped or obstructed.
2. Perform 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page
782.
The pressure of the incoming purified water is too low. Increase the incoming purified water pressure to be
within specifications. See Processing module water and
liquid waste specifications and requirements (c-series),
page 407.
Air bubbles are present in the water supply tubing. 1. Verify the tubing connections.
2. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205
Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
The water source supply is obstructed. 1. Verify that the tubing from the water source is not
crimped or obstructed.
2. Perform 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series), page
782.
The pressure of the incoming purified water is too low. Increase the incoming purified water pressure to be
within specifications. See Processing module water and
liquid waste specifications and requirements (c-series),
page 407.
Air bubbles are present in the water supply tubing. 1. Verify the tubing connections.
2. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 4205
Flush Water Lines (c-series), page 782.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
The RV pickers on the RV orienter wheel are broken. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
An RV is jammed in the linear queue. 1. If accessible, clear the RV jam in the linear queue.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and the
reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 432.
An RV pick and place assembly error occurred. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
The RSM transport is out of alignment. Perform Reagent and Sample Manager (RSM)
diagnostic procedure 1600 RSM Transport Calibration,
page 823.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
The onboard vial rack or reagent cartridge is damaged. Load a different onboard vial rack or reagent cartridge.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
A physical interference is blocking the movement of the Locate and remove any physical obstruction.
sample pipettor.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
Related information...
Robotics and sensor message codes (5000-5999), page 1132
• Water supply
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
7010, page 1202
7011, page 1203
7012, page 1203
7013, page 1203
7014, page 1204
7015, page 1204
7016, page 1204
7017, page 1205
7018, page 1205
7020, page 1205
7021, page 1205
7022, page 1206
7023, page 1206
7024, page 1206
7025, page 1207
7026, page 1207
7027, page 1207
7028, page 1207
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Temperature message codes (7000-7999), page 1202
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
8000, page 1209
8001, page 1209
8002, page 1210
8003, page 1210
8004, page 1210
8005, page 1210
8006, page 1211
8007, page 1211
8008, page 1211
8009, page 1211
8010, page 1211
8011, page 1212
8012, page 1212
8013, page 1212
8015, page 1212
8016, page 1213
8017, page 1213
8018, page 1213
8020, page 1214
8021, page 1214
8022, page 1215
8023, page 1215
8024, page 1215
8026, page 1216
8027, page 1216
8028, page 1217
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
0 = Operator ID
Probable cause Corrective action
The operator enabled the host connection. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
1 = Dilution
2 = Assay name
3 = Assay number
Probable cause Corrective action
The host order for the SID contains a dilution that is not Verify that the host order uses a valid dilution.
available.
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
1 = Mail category
2 = Subject
3 = Number
4 = Revision
5 = Error
Probable cause Corrective action
A problem occurred with an Abbott Mail item that was Contact Customer Service. Provide information about
downloaded. the operation that was attempted when the error
occurred.
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
1 = Assay name
2 = Assay number
Probable cause Corrective action
The host order contained both a manual dilution factor Edit the host order to contain either a manual dilution
and an automatic dilution factor. The order can only factor or an automatic dilution factor.
contain one dilution factor type.
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
0 = Assay number
1 = Dilution
2 = SID
Probable cause Corrective action
The host cannot locate the order for cancellation. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Software error. Contact Customer Service. Provide information about
the operation that was attempted when the error
occurred.
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Computer hardware peripheral message codes (8000-8999), page 1208
Related information...
Message codes, page 941
9000, page 1227
9001, page 1227
9002, page 1228
9003, page 1228
9005, page 1228
9008, page 1228
9009, page 1229
9010, page 1229
9011, page 1229
9303, page 1230
9304, page 1230
9305, page 1230
9306, page 1230
9307, page 1231
9308, page 1231
9309, page 1231
9310, page 1231
9311, page 1232
9314, page 1232
9315, page 1232
9316, page 1232
9324, page 1233
9325, page 1233
9329, page 1233
9330, page 1233
9337, page 1234
9339, page 1234
9340, page 1234
9341, page 1235
9346, page 1235
9348, page 1235
9349, page 1235
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
1 = Log name
Probable cause Corrective action
The requested log file cannot be retrieved by AbbottLink. Perform the procedure to restart AbbottLink.
Time-out occurred during log file retrieval to AbbottLink. Contact Customer Service. Provide information about
the operation that was attempted when the error
occurred.
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
0 = Device
Probable cause Corrective action
The operator cannot perform an operation on the device Start the processing module and the reagent and sample
that was indicated because of a conflict with another manager (RSM), page 447.
device.
The operator selected the Stop button while the Start the processing module and the reagent and sample
instrument status of a processing module is Running or manager (RSM), page 447.
Processing.
Previous hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Software error. Contact Customer Service. Provide information about
the operation that was attempted when the error
occurred.
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Related information...
Software message codes (9000-9999), page 1224
Observed problems
Observed problems provide information about problems that may occur on the system and
provide corrective actions that help to resolve the problems.
If the corrective actions for an observed problem do not resolve the problem, contact the local
representative or find country-specific contact information at abbottdiagnostics.com.
NOTE: Corrective actions may involve hazardous activity. Use caution to minimize operator
exposure and to prevent personal injury or system damage. Examples of hazardous activities
include:
• The replacement of system probes.
• The use of reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens.
• The removal of physical obstructions.
• The removal of system waste.
Related information...
Troubleshooting, page 917
Processing module observed problems , page 1263
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Processing module observed problems (i-series), page 1268
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
User interface (UI) computer observed problems, page 1287
Printer observed problems, page 1288
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
A procedure failed and a procedure item remained in the reagent carousel, page 1263
Related information...
Processing module observed problems , page 1263
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c-series), page 1264
Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c-series), page 1265
Bubbles in sample or reagent probe tubing (c-series), page 1265
Bubbles in the sample or reagent syringes (c-series), page 1266
ICT probe leaks (c-series), page 1266
Lamp is not on (c-series), page 1266
Liquid at the top of the cuvettes after washing (c-series), page 1266
Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise (c-series), page 1267
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c-series), page 1267
Sample or reagent probe is damaged or clogged (c-series), page 1267
Sample or reagent probe tubing leaks (c-series), page 1267
Sample or reagent syringe leaks (c-series), page 1268
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
The ICT module O-rings are not seated correctly. Reseat the ICT module O-rings.
The ICT probe is not connected correctly. Tighten the probe to the ICT module by hand.
The ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT
module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT
aspiration pump.
The ICT probe is damaged. Replace the ICT probe. Perform Replace the ICT module
or the ICT probe (c-series), page 859.
The ICT check valves are not functioning. Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5805 Check
and Change ICT Check Valves (c-series), page 764.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
Reference Solution pump are not seated correctly.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5804 Change
ICT Reference Solution pump are leaking. 1 mL Syringes (c-series), page 763.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (c-series), page 1264
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
Wash zone 1 or wash zone 2 wash monitoring test failure (i-series), page 1268
Wash zone 1 or wash zone 2 wash monitoring calibration failure (i-series), page 1269
• The knurled screws that secure the wash zone 1. Tighten the four knurled screws that secure the
assembly to the process path are loose. wash zone elevator assembly to the process path.
• A wash zone probe is out of alignment. Remove the wash zone probe. Realign the wash zone
probe in the wash zone probe housing. Perform Replace
the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
• The wash zone tubing connections are loose or Reconnect the wash zone tubing to the affected probe
leaking. for the indicated wash zone.
• A wash zone probe is obstructed. Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
• The wash monitoring system is not calibrated. Perform the Calibration and Test option of Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash
Monitoring (i-series), page 813 or 1262 Wash Zone 2
Wash Monitoring (i-series), page 814.
• Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
For dispense failures:
• Bubbles are present in the wash buffer tubing. Perform the Flush and Prime Manifolds option of
Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and
Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
• The diluted wash buffer level sensor is cracked. Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
page 909.
• The wash monitoring system is not calibrated. Perform the Calibration and Test option of Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash
Monitoring (i-series), page 813 or 1262 Wash Zone 2
Wash Monitoring (i-series), page 814.
• Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (i-series), page 1268
Related information...
Processing module observed problems (i-series), page 1268
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
A#1 result flag (c-series), page 1270
A#2 result flag (c-series), page 1271
All ICT results have similar values: Na = 140, K = 4.0, Cl = 100 mmol/L (c-series), page 1272
Controls out of range (c-series), page 1272
Depressed concentration: ICT results entire run (c-series), page 1273
Depressed concentration: ICT results single assay (c-series), page 1273
Depressed concentration: K+ results single assay (c-series), page 1273
Depressed concentration: Photometric results entire run (c-series), page 1274
Depressed concentration: Photometric results single assay (c-series), page 1274
Elevated concentration: ICT results entire run (c-series), page 1275
Elevated concentration: ICT results single assay (c-series), page 1275
Elevated concentration: Photometric results single assay (c-series), page 1275
FLEX result flag (c-series), page 1276
PSHH result flag (c-series), page 1276
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
All ICT results have similar values: Na = 140, K = 4.0, Cl = 100 mmol/L (c-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The ICT module O-rings are not seated correctly. Reseat the ICT module O-rings.
The ICT probe is not connected correctly. Tighten the probe to the ICT module by hand.
The ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Tighten the tubing connections.
The ICT probe is damaged. Replace the ICT probe. Perform Replace the ICT module
or the ICT probe (c-series), page 859.
The ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT
aspiration pump.
The ICT check valves are not functioning. Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5805 Check
and Change ICT Check Valves (c-series), page 764.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
Reference Solution pump are not seated correctly.
The 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Perform Quarterly maintenance procedure 5804 Change
ICT Reference Solution pump are leaking. 1 mL Syringes (c-series), page 763.
Hardware failure. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (c-series), page 1270
Descriptions of specimen result flags, page 630
Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 632
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
Controls out of range (i-series), page 1277
Depressed concentration: Entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series), page 1277
Depressed concentration: Entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i-series), page 1278
Depressed concentration: Single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series), page 1279
Depressed concentration: Single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i-series), page 1280
Elevated concentration: Entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i-series), page 1282
Elevated concentration: Entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series), page 1282
Elevated concentration: Single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i-series), page 1283
Elevated concentration: Single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series), page 1284
Erratic assay results (i-series), page 1285
The sample volume in the sample cup or tube was Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. Refer to the
inadequate. assay-specific reagent package insert for required
volumes.
The wrong quality control lot was used. Use the correct quality control lot for the established
quality control ranges.
Establish new quality control ranges as required.
Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform all required maintenance.
The calibration is not optimal. Recalibrate the assay.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Depressed concentration: Entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The wash zone assembly is leaking. Hardware failure.
The pipettor or wash zone assembly tubing connections Tighten the pipettor or wash zone assembly tubing
are loose. connections.
The diluted wash buffer level sensor assembly is Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
cracked or leaking. page 909.
Bubbles are present in the wash buffer tubing. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostics procedure 1200
Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The wash zone probes are not seated correctly in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Perform Replace the
wash zone motor assembly. wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page
897.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Depressed concentration: Entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The wash zone assembly is leaking. Hardware failure.
The pipettor or wash zone assembly tubing connections Tighten the pipettor or wash zone assembly tubing
are loose. connections.
The diluted wash buffer level sensor assembly is Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
cracked or leaking. page 909.
Bubbles are present in the wash buffer tubing. Perform the Flush Wash Buffer option of the Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and Prime
Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The wash zone probes are not seated correctly in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Perform Replace the
probe block assembly. wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page
897.
The wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1221 Wash
inadequate. Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809 or
1222 Wash Zone 2 Precision and Accuracy (i-series),
page 809.
The vortexer failed. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Depressed concentration: Single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The reagent was stored incorrectly. Load a new reagent.
The reagent was not mixed correctly when it was Upon receipt, gently invert the unopened reagent kit by
received. rotating it over and back for a full 180 degrees, five
times with the green label stripe facing up and then five
times with the green label stripe facing down. This
process ensures that the liquid covers all sides of the
bottles within the cartridges. During reagent shipment,
microparticles can settle on the reagent cartridge
septum.
The reagent is contaminated. Load a new reagent.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or the Trigger Solution sensor Replace the appropriate level sensor as required.
is cracked. Perform Replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger
Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash Buffer
(i-series), page 906.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or the Trigger Solution Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1210 Pre-
dispense is inadequate. Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 807 or
1211 Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page
808.
The wash zone assembly is leaking. Hardware failure.
The diluted wash buffer level sensor assembly is Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
cracked or leaking. page 909.
Bubbles are present in the wash buffer tubing. Perform the Flush Wash Buffer option of the Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and Prime
Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The wash zone probes are not seated correctly in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Perform Replace the
probe block assembly. wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1221 Wash
inadequate. Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809 or
1222 Wash Zone 2 Precision and Accuracy (i-series),
page 809.
The sample probe is obstructed. Perform the Flush Wash Buffer option of the Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and Prime
Fluidics (i-series), page 804. Verify that the pipettors
dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in
the tubing.
Replace the sample probe. Perform Replace a sample or
reagent pipettor probe (i-series), page 894.
The sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe. Perform Replace a sample or
reagent pipettor probe (i-series), page 894.
The sample probe is not positioned correctly. Perform the Calibration option of the Pipettor diagnostic
procedure 1111 Sample Pipettor Check and Calibration
(i-series), page 796.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Depressed concentration: Single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
Bubbles or foam are present on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample by using a
sample. clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Elevated concentration: Entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The wash zone assembly is leaking. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
The diluted wash buffer level sensor is cracked. Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
page 909.
Bubbles are present in the wash buffer tubing. Perform the Flush Wash Buffer option of the Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and Prime
Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The wash zone probes are not seated correctly in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Perform Replace the
probe block assembly. wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1221 Wash
inadequate. Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809 or
1222 Wash Zone 2 Precision and Accuracy (i-series),
page 809.
The vortexer failed. Contact Customer Service to resolve any hardware
failure.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Elevated concentration: Entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The wash zone assembly is leaking. Hardware failure.
The pipettor or wash zone assembly tubing connections Tighten the pipettor or wash zone assembly tubing
are loose. connections.
The diluted wash buffer level sensor is cracked. Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
page 909.
Bubbles are present in the wash buffer tubing. Perform the Flush Wash Buffer option of the Fluidics-
Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush and Prime
Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The wash zone probes are not seated correctly in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Perform Replace the
probe block assembly. wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1221 Wash
inadequate. Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809 or
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Elevated concentration: Single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The reagent was stored incorrectly. Load a new reagent.
The reagent was not mixed correctly when it was Upon receipt, gently invert the unopened reagent kit by
received. rotating it over and back for a full 180 degrees, five
times with the green label stripe facing up and then five
times with the green label stripe facing down. This
process ensures that the liquid covers all sides of the
bottles within the cartridges. During reagent shipment,
microparticles can settle on the reagent cartridge
septum.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or the Trigger Solution sensor Replace the appropriate level sensor as required.
is cracked. Perform Replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger
Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash Buffer
(i-series), page 906.
Bubbles are present in the tubing. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush
and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or the Trigger Solution Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1210 Pre-
dispense is inadequate. Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 807 or
1211 Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page
808.
The wash zone assembly is leaking. Hardware failure.
The diluted wash buffer level sensor is cracked. Replace the diluted wash buffer level sensor (i-series),
page 909.
The wash zone probes are not seated correctly in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Perform Replace the
probe block assembly. wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Replace the wash zone probes (i-series), page 897.
The wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1221 Wash
inadequate. Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series), page 809 or
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Elevated concentration: Single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i-series)
Probable cause Corrective action
The reagent was stored incorrectly. Load a new reagent.
The reagent was not mixed correctly when it was Upon receipt, gently invert the unopened reagent kit by
received. rotating it over and back for a full 180 degrees, five
times with the green label stripe facing up and then five
times with the green label stripe facing down. This
process ensures that the liquid covers all sides of the
bottles within the cartridges. During reagent shipment,
microparticles can settle on the reagent cartridge
septum.
Refer to the assay documentation for additional assay-
specific mixing instructions.
The Pre-Trigger Solution or the Trigger Solution sensor Replace the appropriate level sensor as required.
is cracked. Perform Replace the level sensor for Pre-Trigger
Solution, Trigger Solution, or Concentrated Wash Buffer
(i-series), page 906.
Bubbles are present in the tubing. Perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200 Flush
and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804.
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Related information...
Sample results observed problems (i-series), page 1276
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
Assay files on the USB flash drive are missing, page 1288
User interface does not respond, page 1288
Related information...
User interface (UI) computer observed problems, page 1287
Related information...
User interface (UI) computer observed problems, page 1287
Related information...
Observed problems, page 1263
Printer is not displayed in the print location drop-down list, page 1289
Print screen output is configured for the default printer but the print screen is saved to a file, page
1289
When reports are viewed as a PDF, a warning is displayed: "At least one signature has a problem",
page 1289
Related information...
Printer observed problems, page 1288
Print screen output is configured for the default printer but the print screen is saved to a file
Probable cause Corrective action
A default printer is not configured. Add a printer, page 180.
Related information...
Printer observed problems, page 1288
When reports are viewed as a PDF, a warning is displayed: "At least one signature has a
problem"
Probable cause Corrective action
The software used to view a portable document format View the description of the warning in the software. If
(PDF) file cannot identify the digital signature. the PDF file has not been modified since the digital
A file created on an Abbott instrument has a digital signature was applied, no further action is required.
signature. The digital signature allows an operator who
views the file to know if the file has been modified since
it was created.
Related information...
Printer observed problems, page 1288
Related information...
Troubleshooting, page 917
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) corrective action procedure, page 1304
User interface (UI) computer corrective action procedures, page 1306
Related information...
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 1290
Manually unload a cartridge or rack from the reagent carousel, page 1290
Empty the bulk solution reservoirs (c-series), page 1293
Empty the bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), page 1297
Empty the diluted wash buffer reservoir (i-series), page 1301
Enable or disable the ICT module (c-series), page 1304
Disable a reagent cartridge, page 559
Enable a reagent cartridge, page 560
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
CAUTION: Probe Stick Hazard. This activity or area may expose you to probes.
1. Turn off all power to the processing module by moving the main power breaker at the rear
of the module to the off position.
2. Lift the front processing center cover to access the reagent supply center.
Figure 163: Manual removal of the reagent carousel cartridge (c-series)
3. Insert a #1 Phillips screwdriver into the small hole on the reagent positioner.
4. Firmly press down the screwdriver until the reagent positioner latch releases and moves
slightly to the left of the reagent positioner.
5. Gently push on the reagent positioner base to open the reagent positioner.
NOTE: Do not push on the reagent positioner pocket.
6. If the cartridge or rack is not secured in the reagent carousel, gently remove the cartridge or
rack from the reagent carousel through the opening in the reagent positioner.
7. If the cartridge or rack is secured in the reagent carousel and cannot be removed from the
reagent carousel, perform the following steps:
a. With a hand on the cartridge or rack, insert the cartridge removal tool into the reagent
carousel and press the reagent position spring latch toward the center of the reagent
carousel to release the cartridge or rack.
IMPORTANT: Before pressing the reagent position spring latch, secure the cartridge or
rack in the reagent position. If the cartridge or rack is not secured in the reagent
position, the cartridge or rack can fall into the reagent carousel, causing the contents of
the cartridge or rack to spill.
b. Remove the cartridge or rack.
8. Close the front processing center cover.
9. Power on the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM).
10. Start the processing module.
11. Load the cartridge or rack on the RSM.
NOTE: The cartridge or rack must be loaded on the system to reconcile the software
inventory.
12. Initiate sample processing for the RSM.
Related information...
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Open the bulk solution door and pull out the reservoir tray.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the bulk solution level sensors. Avoid applying stress on
the wiring and connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the appropriate bulk solution level sensor.
While performing the flush, inspect the tubing and connections of the bulk solution level
sensor for drips and leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
19. Slide the reservoir bottle tray into the bulk solution reservoir area and close the bulk solution
door.
Related information...
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Open the bulk solution door and pull out the reservoir tray.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the bulk solution level sensors. Avoid applying stress on
the wiring and connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the appropriate bulk solution level sensor.
While performing the flush, inspect the tubing and connections of the bulk solution level
sensor for drips and leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure.
19. Slide the reservoir bottle tray into the bulk solution reservoir area and close the bulk solution
door.
Related information...
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
Replace bulk solutions and update the inventory, page 508
1401, page 1036
1402, page 1037
1403, page 1037
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
1. Remove the rear fluidics panel and pull out the pump drawer.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the diluted wash buffer level sensor. Avoid applying
stress on the wiring and connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the diluted wash buffer level sensor.
22. To remove any air that may be present, perform Fluidics-Wash diagnostic procedure 1200
Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series), page 804, Flush Wash Buffer option.
While performing the flush, inspect the tubing and connections of the diluted wash buffer
level sensor for drips and leaks. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.
23. Slide the pump drawer into the rear fluidics area and replace the rear fluidics panel.
Related information...
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
Related information...
Processing module corrective action procedures, page 1290
Related information...
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 1290
Remove racks from the sample positioners, page 1305
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity or area exposes you to a chemical hazard.
3. Gently push the sample positioner pocket to the front of the processing module until the
pocket touches the end of the lane and the pocket latch is pressed in.
4. Remove the rack.
5. Repeat steps 2, page 1305 through 4, page 1306 for the outer sample positioner.
6. Start the RSM to home the sample positioner pockets.
Related information...
Reagent and sample manager (RSM) corrective action procedure, page 1304
Start the processing module and the reagent and sample manager (RSM), page 447
Related information...
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 1290
Verify the HL7 communication, page 1307
Verify the ASTM communication, page 1308
Enable or disable the host connection, page 474
Cancel pending transmissions, page 474
Transmit a result or an exception to the host, page 635
Related information...
User interface (UI) computer corrective action procedures, page 1306
Configure host settings, page 211
Configure HL7 communication settings, page 214
Related information...
User interface (UI) computer corrective action procedures, page 1306
Configure host settings, page 211
NOTES
Introduction
Verification procedures are performed to verify Alinity ci-series assay claims. These procedures
are used only to verify that a method operates according to the manufacturer's claims. The
procedures are not intended to establish or validate the analytical performance of the method.
Not all procedures are required for each assay. For the manufacturer's claims that are specific
to the assay, see the assay documentation.
Related information...
Limit of blank, limit of detection, and limit of quantitation, page 1312
Precision, page 1329
Perform a calibration verification, page 1337
Verify the linearity, page 1341
Measuring interval, page 1345
Verify an automated dilution, page 1346
Method comparison, page 1351
Verify the reference range (expected values), page 1365
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Verify a limit of blank (LoB) claim, page 1312
Verify a limit of detection (LoD) claim, page 1315
Limit of quantitation (LoQ), page 1318
NOTE: To yield the minimum requirement of 20 replicates, test the samples for 5 days. Based on
the available resources and time, the study design can be modified by increasing the number of
replicates or the number of samples such that a minimum of 20 measurable results are
generated across all samples and days.
Perform this procedure to verify a limit of blank (LoB) claim based on the definition from Clinical
and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP17-A2, which uses proportions of false
positives that are less than 5%.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Test each sample in duplicate one time each day for 5 days.
2. Count the number of replicates that are greater than the LoB claim.
NOTE: For LoB data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
For a sample size of 20 measurements, the LoB claim is verified if three or fewer replicates are
greater than the claim.
Related information...
Limit of blank, limit of detection, and limit of quantitation, page 1312
Limit of blank (LoB) worksheet (c-series), page 1313
Limit of blank (LoB) worksheet (i-series), page 1314
Verify a limit of detection (LoD) claim, page 1315
Data
Reference values
LoB claim measurand concentration:
For LoB data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Results
Number of values > Manufacturer's LoB claim:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of blank (LoB) claim, page 1312
Data
Reference values
LoB claim measurand concentration:
For LoB data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Results
Number of values > Manufacturer's LoB claim:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of blank (LoB) claim, page 1312
NOTE: To yield the minimum requirement of 20 replicates, test the samples for 5 days. Based on
the available resources and time, the study design can be modified by increasing the number of
replicates or the number of samples such that a minimum of 20 measurable results are
generated across all samples and days.
Perform this procedure to verify the LoD claim based on the definition from Clinical and
Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP17-A2, which uses proportions of false
positives that are less than 5%.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Test each sample in duplicate one time each day for 5 days.
2. Count the number of replicates that are less than the LoB claim.
NOTE: For LoB data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
For a sample size of 20 measurements, the LoD claim is verified if three or fewer replicates are
less than the LoB claim.
Related information...
Limit of blank, limit of detection, and limit of quantitation, page 1312
Limit of detection (LoD) worksheet (c-series), page 1316
Limit of detection (LoD) worksheet (i-series), page 1317
Verify a limit of blank (LoB) claim, page 1312
Data
Reference values
LoB claim measurand concentration:
LoD claim measurand concentration:
For LoB and LoD data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Results
Number of values < Manufacturer's LoB claim:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of detection (LoD) claim, page 1315
Data
Reference values
LoB claim measurand concentration:
LoD claim measurand concentration:
For LoB and LoD data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Results
Number of values < Manufacturer's LoB claim:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of detection (LoD) claim, page 1315
To determine the definition and specifications that are used to establish the LoQ for assays on
the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
Related information...
Limit of blank, limit of detection, and limit of quantitation, page 1312
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the total allowable error method, page 1319
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the precision and bias method, page 1323
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the total allowable error method
The following prerequisites are the minimum experimental design requirements:
• Reagent lot
• Instrument system
• 3 days
• Two samples with known values at the limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim measurand
concentration
NOTE: Concentration values can be obtained from external assignment (for example, a
reference standard) or can be determined by testing with a reference method. Samples can
be spiked or can be diluted to obtain the correct concentration.
NOTE: Ensure that the sample volume is adequate to test each sample a minimum of 10
times.
• Two replicates per sample per day
• Twenty replicates across all samples and days
NOTE: To yield the minimum requirement of 20 replicates, test the samples for 5 days. Based on
the available resources and time, the study design can be modified by increasing the number of
replicates or the number of samples such that a minimum of 20 measurable results are
generated across all samples and days.
Perform this procedure to verify the LoQ claim when the claim is defined as the lowest amount
of analyte in a sample that can be quantitatively determined based on the total allowable error or
based on independent precision and bias specifications. This procedure is based on
recommendations from Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP17-A2.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Test each sample in duplicate one time each day for 5 days.
2. Obtain the total allowable error (TEa) goal for the assay from the assay documentation.
3. Calculate the tolerance interval around the target concentration for the sample by using one
of the following equations:
– If TEa is represented as a percentage:
Tolerance interval = A - [A x (B ÷ 100)] to A + [A x (B ÷ 100)]
Where:
B TEa
For example, if the target concentration is 5 ng/mL and the TEa is 20%, the tolerance
interval is 4 ng/mL to 6 ng/mL:
5 - [5 x (20 ÷ 100)] = 4 to 5 + [5 x (20 ÷ 100)] = 6
– If TEa is represented as an absolute number:
Tolerance interval = A - B to A + B
Where:
B TEa
For example, if the target concentration is 8 mg/dL and the TEa is 0.5 mg/dL, the
tolerance interval is 7.5 mg/dL to 8.5 mg/dL:
8 - 0.5 = 7.5 to 8 + 0.5 = 8.5
4. Compare each replicate to the tolerance interval and count the number of measurements
that fall outside the interval.
NOTE: For LoQ data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
For a sample size of 20 measurements, the LoQ claim is verified if three or fewer replicates fall
outside the tolerance interval.
Related information...
Limit of quantitation (LoQ), page 1318
Limit of quantitation (LoQ): Total allowable error method worksheet (c-series), page 1320
Limit of quantitation (LoQ): Total allowable error method worksheet (i-series), page 1322
Data
Reference values
LoQ claim measurand concentration:
Total allowable error (TEa) claim:
For LoQ and TEa data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Calculations
TEa represented as a percentage:
Tolerance interval = LoQ - [LoQ x (TEa ÷ 100)] to LoQ + [LoQ x (TEa ÷ 100)]
Lower limit:
− × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Upper limit:
+ × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Results
Tolerance interval:
Number of values that fall outside the tolerance interval:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the total allowable error method, page 1319
Data
Reference values
LoQ claim measurand concentration:
Total allowable error (TEa) claim:
For LoQ and TEa data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Calculations
TEa represented as a percentage:
Tolerance interval = LoQ - [LoQ x (TEa ÷ 100)] to LoQ + [LoQ x (TEa ÷ 100)]
Lower limit:
− × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Upper limit:
+ × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the total allowable error method, page 1319
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the precision and bias method
The following prerequisites are the minimum experimental design requirements:
• Reagent lot
• Instrument system
• 3 days
• Two samples with known values at the limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim measurand
concentration
NOTE: Concentration values can be obtained from external assignment (for example, a
reference standard) or can be determined by testing with a reference method. Samples can
be spiked or can be diluted to obtain the correct concentration.
NOTE: Ensure that the sample volume is adequate to test each sample a minimum of 10
times.
• Two replicates per sample per day
• Twenty replicates across all samples and days
NOTE: To yield the minimum requirement of 20 replicates, test the samples for 5 days. Based on
the available resources and time, the study design can be modified by increasing the number of
replicates or the number of samples such that a minimum of 20 measurable results are
generated across all samples and days.
Perform this procedure to verify the LoQ claim when the claim is defined as the lowest amount
of analyte in a sample that can be quantitatively determined based on independent precision and
bias specifications. This procedure is based on recommendations from Clinical and Laboratory
Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP17-A2.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Test each sample in duplicate one time each day for 5 days.
2. Calculate the total allowable error (TEa) goal for the assay:
TEa = Precision x 2 + Bias
NOTE: Obtain the maximum allowable precision and bias values for assays from the assay
documentation.
3. Calculate the tolerance interval around the target concentration for the sample by using one
of the following equations:
– If TEa is represented as a percentage:
Tolerance interval = A - [A x (B ÷ 100)] to A + [A x (B ÷ 100)]
Where:
B TEa
For example, if the target concentration is 5 ng/mL and the TEa is 20%, the tolerance
interval is 4 ng/mL to 6 ng/mL:
5 - [5 x (20 ÷ 100)] = 4 to 5 + [5 x (20 ÷ 100)] = 6
– If TEa is represented as an absolute number:
Tolerance interval = A - B to A + B
Where:
B TEa
For example, if the target concentration is 8 mg/dL and the TEa is 0.5 mg/dL, the
tolerance interval is 7.5 mg/dL to 8.5 mg/dL:
8 - 0.5 = 7.5 to 8 + 0.5 = 8.5
4. Compare each replicate to the tolerance interval and count the number of measurements
that fall outside the interval.
NOTE: For LoQ data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
For a sample size of 20 measurements, the LoQ claim is verified if three or fewer replicates fall
outside the tolerance interval.
Related information...
Limit of quantitation (LoQ), page 1318
Limit of quantitation (LoQ): Precision and bias method worksheet (c-series), page 1325
Limit of quantitation (LoQ): Precision and bias method worksheet (i-series), page 1326
Data
Reference values
LoQ claim measurand concentration:
Precision claim:
Bias claim:
For LoQ, precision, and bias data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Calculations
Upper limit:
+ × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Results
TEa:
Tolerance interval:
Number of values that fall outside the tolerance interval:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the precision and bias method, page 1323
Data
Reference values
LoQ claim measurand concentration:
Precision claim:
Bias claim:
For LoQ, precision, and bias data for assays on the system, see the assay documentation.
Calculations
TEa = Precision x 2 + Bias
× 𝟤 + =
TEa represented as a percentage:
Tolerance interval = LoQ - [LoQ x (TEa ÷ 100)] to LoQ + [LoQ x (TEa ÷ 100)]
Lower limit:
− × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Upper limit:
+ × 𝟣𝟢𝟢
=
Results
TEa:
Tolerance interval:
Number of values that fall outside the tolerance interval:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify a limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim based on the precision and bias method, page 1323
Related information...
Limit of quantitation (LoQ), page 1318
Verify the precision, page 1329
Precision
Precision indicates how well an assay or a system provides the same result when a given
sample is tested repeatedly and over time. Specifically, within-run (repeatability) and within-
laboratory (total) precision are used to evaluate the performance of the assay or system. Within-
run precision provides a best-case estimate of the expected performance since the opportunity
for conditions to change during the course of the run is minimal. Within-laboratory precision is a
more realistic assessment of the performance because it incorporates performance over time.
The procedure to determine the precision is developed from Clinical and Laboratory Standards
Institute (CLSI) document EP15-A2. The procedure provides a recommended study design and
statistical analysis plan to verify that the manufacturer's claims for within-laboratory precision
can be met. Because the study design does not provide an adequate statistical basis to reject
the claims, the procedure is used only to verify that a method operates according to the
manufacturer's claims. The procedure is not intended to establish or validate the analytical
performance of the method. When a laboratory has successfully completed the study, the
laboratory has verified that the method operates according to the manufacturer's claims for
within-laboratory precision.
For precision data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Verify the precision, page 1329
Evaluate the precision data, page 1330
Calculate a precision verification value, page 1332
Precision worksheet (c-series), page 1333
Precision worksheet (i-series), page 1335
Perform this procedure to verify the precision for an assay on the Alinity ci-series.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Test each sample in triplicate one time each day for 5 days.
2. Test quality control (QC) samples in each day's run.
Related information...
Precision, page 1329
Evaluate the precision data, page 1330
Calculate a precision verification value, page 1332
Limit of quantitation (LoQ) claim: Precision method, page 1328
Perform this procedure to evaluate the data that is generated from the following procedures:
• Verify the precision.
• Calculate a precision verification value.
NOTE: Use a separate worksheet for each sample concentration level. The statistical
calculations in this procedure and on the associated worksheet are from Clinical and Laboratory
Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP15-A2. These calculations are valid only according to the
conditions that are specified. As an alternative to performing the calculations manually, a
laboratory can use a software package that is designed to perform the calculations.
1. For each run, enter three replicate values (Xd1, Xd2, and Xd3) on lines 1 through 3 of the
worksheet.
d = The number that corresponds to the run day
2. Calculate the mean (𝖷d) of the three replicates and enter the value on line 4.
3. For each replicate, subtract the mean value from the replicate value:
a. Enter (Xd1 - 𝖷d) on line 5.
b. Enter (Xd2 - 𝖷d) on line 7.
c. Enter (Xd3 - 𝖷d) on line 9.
4. Square the values that were obtained in step 3:
a. Enter (Xd1 - 𝖷d)2 on line 6.
b. Enter (Xd2 - 𝖷d)2 on line 8.
– If the calculated value is greater than the claim value, calculate a precision verification
value to determine whether the difference is statistically significant.
Related information...
Precision, page 1329
Verify the precision, page 1329
Calculate a precision verification value, page 1332
Precision worksheet (c-series), page 1333
Precision worksheet (i-series), page 1335
When the calculated within-laboratory standard deviation exceeds the manufacturer's claim,
perform this procedure to determine whether the difference is statistically significant.
1. Calculate the effective degrees of freedom (T):
– For a procedure that requires 5 days and tests three replicates per day, use the
following equation:
𝟤
𝟤𝗌 𝟤𝗋 + ( 𝟥𝗌 𝟤𝖻 )
𝖳 =
𝟢.𝟦𝗌 𝟦𝗋 + 𝟤.𝟤𝟧 ( 𝗌 𝟤 ) 𝟤
𝖻
– For a procedure that requires 7 days and tests three replicates per day, use the
following equation:
𝟤𝗌 𝟤𝗋 + ( 𝟥𝗌 𝟤𝖻 ) 𝟤
𝖳 =
𝟢.𝟤𝟪𝟨𝗌 𝟦𝗋 + 𝟣.𝟧 ( 𝗌 𝟤 ) 𝟤
𝖻
Where:
V Verification value
– For a precision verification that requires 7 days and uses three replicates and two
concentration levels per day, use the following equation:
σ 𝗅 × 𝟧.𝟣𝟣
𝖵 = 𝖳
Where:
V Verification value
3. Compare the estimated within-laboratory standard deviation (sl) from line 18 of the precision
worksheet to the verification value:
– If sl is less than or equal to the verification value, the precision data is consistent with
the claim and is verified.
– If sl is greater than the verification value and the evaluated precision data was
generated with a precision verification procedure that requires 5 days, perform two
additional data runs. Recalculate all statistics by repeating the procedure to evaluate
the precision data.
– If sl is greater than the verification value and the evaluated precision data was
generated with a precision verification procedure that requires 7 days, troubleshoot to
identify the cause of the imprecision. When the imprecision is resolved, repeat the
procedure to verify the precision.
Related information...
Precision, page 1329
Verify the precision, page 1329
Evaluate the precision data, page 1330
Precision worksheet (c-series), page 1333
Precision worksheet (i-series), page 1335
Line Run 1 Run 2 Run 3 Run 4 Run 5 Optional run Optional run
(d=1) (d=2) (d=3) (d=4) (d=5) 6 (d=6) 7 (d=7)
Operator
1 Replicate 1 (Xd1)
2 Replicate 2 (Xd2)
3 Replicate 3 (Xd3)
4 Mean of run (𝖷d)
5 (Xd1 - 𝖷d)
6 (Xd1 - 𝖷d)2
7 (Xd2 - 𝖷d)
8 (Xd2 - 𝖷d)2
9 (Xd3 - 𝖷d)
10 (Xd3 - 𝖷d)2
11 Total of lines 6, 8, and 10
12 SD2run av
13 Grand mean (=
𝗑)
14 =
(𝖷 - 𝗑 )
d
15 (𝖷d - =
𝗑 )2
16 sr = √SD2run av
17 sb2
18 𝟤
𝗌𝗅 = 𝟥
× 𝗌 𝟤𝗋 + 𝗌 𝟤𝖻
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Precision, page 1329
Evaluate the precision data, page 1330
Calculate a precision verification value, page 1332
Line Run 1 Run 2 Run 3 Run 4 Run 5 Optional run Optional run
(d=1) (d=2) (d=3) (d=4) (d=5) 6 (d=6) 7 (d=7)
Operator
1 Replicate 1 (Xd1)
2 Replicate 2 (Xd2)
3 Replicate 3 (Xd3)
4 Mean of run (𝖷d)
5 (Xd1 - 𝖷d)
6 (Xd1 - 𝖷d)2
7 (Xd2 - 𝖷d)
8 (Xd2 - 𝖷d)2
9 (Xd3 - 𝖷d)
10 (Xd3 - 𝖷d)2
11 Total of lines 6, 8, and 10
12 SD2run av
13 Grand mean (=
𝗑)
14 =
(𝖷 - 𝗑 )
d
Line Run 1 Run 2 Run 3 Run 4 Run 5 Optional run Optional run
(d=1) (d=2) (d=3) (d=4) (d=5) 6 (d=6) 7 (d=7)
15 (𝖷d - =
𝗑 )2
16 sr = √SD2run av
17 sb2
18 𝟤
𝗌𝗅 = 𝟥
× 𝗌 𝟤𝗋 + 𝗌 𝟤𝖻
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Precision, page 1329
Evaluate the precision data, page 1330
Calculate a precision verification value, page 1332
Perform this procedure to confirm that the Alinity ci-series accurately measures samples within
the tolerance limits that are established.
This evaluation is based on the U.S. Clinical Laboratory Improvement Act (CLIA), 42 CFR 493.2;
and the laboratory quality management protocol of the College of American Pathologists (CAP),
Calibration Verification/Linearity Surveys--User's Guide 2009.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
For example, if the target concentration is 10 mg/dL and the TEa is 20%, the tolerance limit
around the target concentration is 10%. The lower tolerance limit is 9 mg/dL and the upper
tolerance limit is 11 mg/dL.
4. For each sample, calculate the percent difference (%D) for each measurement (Xi) with
respect to the target concentration (µ):
𝖷𝗂 − μ
%𝖣 = μ
× 𝟣𝟢𝟢
NOTE: The target concentration (µ) is the concentration of the reference method against
which the assay is calibrated or the value-assigned concentration.
5. Plot the %D versus the target concentration for each sample.
6. Plot the low and high tolerance limits versus the target concentration for each sample.
The calibration verification evaluation is verified if the %D for each sample is within the tolerance
limits.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Calibration verification worksheet (c-series), page 1338
Calibration verification worksheet (i-series), page 1339
Data
Calculations
For each sample, calculate the percent difference (%D) for each measurement (Xi) with respect to the target
concentration (μ):
𝖷𝗂 − μ
%𝖣 = μ
× 𝟣𝟢𝟢
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Perform a calibration verification, page 1337
Data
Calculations
For each sample, calculate the percent difference (%D) for each measurement (Xi) with respect to the target
concentration (μ):
𝖷𝗂 − μ
%𝖣 = μ
× 𝟣𝟢𝟢
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Perform a calibration verification, page 1337
NOTE: Commercial linearity material can be used instead of the low and high sample pools.
A linearity study consists of testing a dilution series of known concentrations. Then, the
difference between the measured concentration and the expected or known concentration is
determined and is evaluated against defined specifications. Visual evaluation can be performed
by plotting the measured concentration against the expected or known concentration.
Perform this procedure to verify that the linearity of the assay is within the manufacturer's
claims. The procedure is a simplified version of the study in Clinical and Laboratory Standards
Institute (CLSI) document EP6-A.
NOTE: For linearity data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay documentation.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
C1 Concentration of level 1
C5 Concentration of level 5
c. Plot the replicate mean for each sample level on the Y-axis and plot the corresponding
expected concentrations on the X-axis.
d. Observe the graph for evidence of nonlinearity.
e. Calculate the percent difference (%D) between the expected concentration (EC) and
the replicate mean (RM) for each sample level:
%D = 100 x (RM - EC) ÷ EC
The assay linearity is verified if the percent difference for each sample level is within the
manufacturer's linearity claim limits in the assay documentation.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Linearity worksheet (c-series), page 1342
Linearity worksheet (i-series), page 1343
Data
Data evaluation
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify the linearity, page 1341
Data
Data evaluation
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify the linearity, page 1341
Measuring interval
Study results for linearity, precision, limit of quantitation (LoQ), and method comparison are used
to establish a measuring interval for an assay.
The Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) Harmonized Terminology Database
defines the following terms:
Linear range "The range over which the testing systems results are
acceptably linear; that is, where nonlinear error is less than
the error criterion."
Measuring interval "Set of values of quantities of the same kind that can be
measured by a given measuring instrument or measuring
system with specified instrumental measurement uncertainty,
under defined conditions ([Joint Committee for Guides in
Metrology] 200:2012)."
Linear range, LoQ, and bias are performance characteristics. The measuring interval is derived
from these performance characteristics. To establish the measuring interval, a manufacturer
performs a linearity study so that samples encompass the entire measuring interval of the assay.
Samples that are assessed in precision and method comparison studies also encompass the
measuring interval of the assay.
Ultimately, the measuring interval is the range of concentration levels for which the assay has
been demonstrated to have acceptable linearity, precision, and bias. The extremes of the
measuring interval are limited by the LoQ on the lower end and by the upper linear limit on the
upper end.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Perform this procedure to verify that dilutions performed by the Alinity ci-series are within
acceptance limits. A high-concentration sample at the upper limit of the measuring interval is
tested with the assay's undiluted sample protocol and with the automated dilution protocol.
Multiple replicate measurements are performed. The mean of the automated dilution protocol
results is compared to the expected diluted mean of the undiluted sample protocol results. The
difference between the means is determined and is evaluated against the acceptance criteria.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
NOTE: Ten replicate measurements are performed with both the undiluted sample protocol and
the automated dilution protocol. This number of replicates is adequate for most assays with a
repeatability percent coefficient of variation (%CV) of less than 8% and a bias requirement of
greater than or equal to 10%.
1. Obtain a high-concentration sample at the upper limit of the measuring interval.
2. If necessary, dilute the sample to ensure that the concentration is within the measuring
interval of the assay.
This sample is the prepared sample.
3. Calibrate the assay.
4. Perform 10 replicate measurements of the prepared sample with the undiluted sample
protocol.
Ensure that the sample volume is adequate to test the sample for 10 replicates.
5. Perform 10 replicate measurements of the prepared sample with the automated dilution
protocol.
Ensure that the sample volume is adequate to test the sample for 10 replicates.
6. To evaluate the data, perform the following steps:
a. Calculate the mean of the prepared sample replicates tested with the undiluted sample
protocol (US).
b. Calculate the mean of the prepared sample replicates tested with the automated
dilution protocol (DS).
c. Calculate the expected dilution concentration of the prepared sample tested with the
undiluted sample protocol (ES):
ES = US x Automated dilution factor
d. Calculate the difference (D) between the ES and the mean of the diluted sample
replicates (DS):
D = DS - ES
e. Calculate the percent difference (%D):
%D = 100 x (DS - ES) ÷ ES
The automated dilution protocol is verified if the calculated %D is within the limits of the
acceptable percent bias.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Automated dilution verification worksheet (c-series), page 1347
Automated dilution verification worksheet (i-series), page 1348
Replicate Concentration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Replicate Concentration
10
Replicate Concentration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data evaluation
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify an automated dilution, page 1346
Replicate Concentration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data evaluation
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify an automated dilution, page 1346
Method comparison
Method comparison is defined in one of the following ways:
For specifications that are used for method comparison for the assays on the Alinity ci-series,
see the assay documentation.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Perform a quantitative method comparison, page 1351
Perform a qualitative method comparison, page 1358
NOTE: When possible, use biological specimens that are stored according to the specimen
storage claims. However, if specimens with concentrations in the upper limit of the measuring
interval are rare, testing samples can be prepared by supplementing low-concentration samples
with analyte from high-concentration samples.
Method comparison is a study conducted to determine the bias of a candidate assay to a
comparator assay. Two types of biases are determined: proportional bias and constant bias.
Proportional bias refers to the relative concentration change. Constant bias refers to the fixed
concentration change. Specimens from the intended population of the assay are sourced and
their concentrations are measured. Candidate assay measurements are compared to comparator
assay measurements across the assay measuring interval. Proportional bias, constant bias, and
strength of association are calculated. By definition, this study compares the candidate assay
quantification to the comparator assay quantification of the same analyte and the same quantity
of samples in the same matrix.
Perform this procedure to determine the quantitation bias of an Alinity ci-series assay (the
candidate assay) to a comparator assay. This study is based on Clinical and Laboratory
Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP09-A3.
NOTE: For method comparison data for assays on the Alinity ci-series, see the assay
documentation.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
1. Calibrate the assay on the Alinity ci-series and on the comparator assay instrument system.
2. Perform quality control testing on both assays to verify the calibration.
3. Test the 40 specimens in single replicates according to the corresponding assay
documentation.
NOTE: If the assay method requires each specimen to be tested in duplicate and the test
results to be averaged, the average test result constitutes one replicate. Sample preparation
and testing can be performed on multiple days. Each day, prepare and test the same
sample with both methods.
4. For each specimen, record the following results:
– Candidate assay result
– Comparator assay result
– Difference between the candidate assay result and the comparator assay result
(Comparator assay result - Candidate assay result)
5. To evaluate the data, perform the following steps:
a. Plot the data so that the candidate assay result is on the Y-axis and the comparator
assay result is on the X-axis.
b. Visually determine if the data displays a linear relationship.
c. For any result that is noticeably outside the line, retest the specimen with both assays.
If the result is confirmed, evaluate the specimen for possible cross-reactivity by either
method and remove the specimen from the study.
d. Calculate the following metrics by using regression analysis:
• Correlation coefficient: The closeness of results by both methods for each
specimen
• Slope: The proportional bias or concentration increase by the investigational
method for every unit increase by the comparator method
• Intercept: The systemic bias or constant bias at any concentration within the
measuring interval
NOTE: The most common regression methodology is least squares regression, which
requires that the error in the candidate assay is distributed normally and that no error is
present in the comparator assay. These criteria are not typically met because both
methods have errors. When the data shows increasing variability, weighted least
squares regression can be used to determine a more precise estimate of the bias (that
is, a smaller width of the 95% confidence interval). If no confidence interval is wanted,
both methodologies estimate the bias with the same trueness.
Passing-Bablok regression methodology does not use assumptions about the
distribution of errors. This nonparametric methodology is widely used in method
comparison studies. Deming regression methodology considers the variance of x and y,
and requires knowledge and input of the variability of both methods. A statistician may
be needed when the Passing-Bablok and Deming regression methodologies are used to
estimate biases. Generally, when the data is evenly distributed and has a relatively
constant variance, the least squares regression methodology yields biases that are
similar to the other methodologies.
e. Calculate the percent bias (%Bias) at each medical decision concentration (mdc):
Ymdc = Intercept + Slope • Xmdc
Biasmdc = Ymdc - Xmdc
%Biasmdc = Biasmdc ÷ Xmdc • 100
f. Plot the data in a scatterplot so that the average of the candidate assay result and
comparator assay result for each specimen is on the X-axis and the difference between
the candidate assay result and the average result is on the Y-axis.
Compare the method comparison results to the reference results provided in the candidate
assay documentation.
If specific data is unavailable, the method comparison study is acceptable for most assays if the
following criteria are met:
• The correlation coefficient value is greater than 0.90.
• The slope value is between 0.90 and 1.10.
• The intercept value is near zero.
• The percent bias value at each medical decision concentration is less than 10%.
Related information...
Method comparison, page 1351
Method comparison: Quantitative worksheet (c-series), page 1353
Method comparison: Quantitative worksheet (i-series), page 1356
Data
Summary statistics
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Perform a quantitative method comparison, page 1351
Data
Summary statistics
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Perform a quantitative method comparison, page 1351
1. Calibrate the assay on the Alinity ci-series and on the comparator assay instrument system.
2. Perform quality control testing on both assays to verify the calibration.
3. Test the 40 positive samples and 40 negative samples in single replicates according to the
corresponding assay documentation.
NOTE: Sample preparation and testing can be performed on multiple days. Each day,
prepare and test the same sample with both methods.
4. For each sample, record the candidate assay result and the comparator assay result.
5. Count the number of positive results and negative results for each method, and then
summarize the results in a two-by-two table.
Where:
Compare the PPA, NPA, and OPA results to the reference values in the candidate assay
documentation. The PPA and NPA results need to be compared to the laboratory's own criteria.
The PPA and NPA results can be compared to the candidate documentation only if the
laboratory uses the same comparator method.
Related information...
Method comparison, page 1351
Method comparison: Qualitative worksheet (c-series), page 1359
Method comparison: Qualitative worksheet (i-series), page 1362
Data
Data evaluation
Count the number of positive results and negative results, and then summarize the results in a two-by-two table.
Comparator Comparator
Positive Negative
Candidate a b
Positive
Candidate c d
Negative
Calculations
Calculate the following percent agreements:
Positive percent agreement (PPA) = 100 x [a ÷ (a + c)] =
Negative percent agreement (NPA) = 100 x [d ÷ (b + d)] =
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Perform a qualitative method comparison, page 1358
Data
Data evaluation
Count the number of positive results and negative results, and then summarize the results in a two-by-two table.
Comparator Comparator
Positive Negative
Candidate a b
Positive
Candidate c d
Negative
Calculations
Calculate the following percent agreements:
Positive percent agreement (PPA) = 100 x [a ÷ (a + c)] =
Negative percent agreement (NPA) = 100 x [d ÷ (b + d)] =
Total percent agreement (TPA) = 100 x [(a + d) ÷ (a + b + c + d)] =
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Perform a qualitative method comparison, page 1358
Perform this procedure to verify the reference range, based on the definition from Clinical and
Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) document EP28-A3, when the reference range represents
95% of the expected values from a specific group of subjects. Do not use the procedure to
establish the reference range of a method.
The laboratory needs to establish its own reference range of a method if substantial differences
in the geographic location or demographic variables are present between the manufacturer's
reference range population and the laboratory's population. These factors can cause differences
in reference values.
CAUTION: Biological RISKS. This activity or area may expose you to potentially
infectious material.
Related information...
Verification of assay claims, page 1311
Data
Reference values
Reference range (expected values):
For reference range information for assays on the system, see the Expected Values section of the assay
documentation.
Results
Number of values that are outside the reference range:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify the reference range (expected values), page 1365
Data
Reference values
Reference range (expected values):
For reference range information for assays on the system, see the Expected Values section of the assay
documentation.
Results
Number of values that are outside the reference range:
Comments:
Technologist: Date:
Reviewed by: Date:
Related information...
Verify the reference range (expected values), page 1365
Introduction
List numbers are unique identifiers that are used to order products. The list numbers are
provided only for guidance and are subject to change. For the most current list numbers, contact
an Abbott Laboratories representative.
Related information...
Consumable list numbers, page 1370
Consumable list numbers (c-series), page 1371
Consumable list numbers (i-series), page 1372
Accessory list numbers, page 1373
Accessory list numbers (c-series), page 1374
Accessory list numbers (i-series), page 1377
Related information...
List numbers, page 1369
Related information...
List numbers, page 1369
Related information...
List numbers, page 1369
Related information...
List numbers, page 1369
An Abbott Laboratories representative orders the accessory kits for customers. To order
individual items, contact an Abbott Laboratories representative.
Related information...
List numbers, page 1369
Related information...
List numbers, page 1369
Glossary
accessories Items that are used repeatedly, such as trays and racks.
Acid Wash (c-series) An acidic wash solution that is used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis. A dilution of the Acid Wash solution is used to wash
the probes.
Alinity ci-series A multimodule system that includes a clinical chemistry module and an immunoassay
module, each performing all sample-processing activities, and a system control
module to provide a single user-friendly interface.
Alinity c processing A chemistry analyzer that performs sample processing. The Alinity c processing
module module allows random and continuous access as well as priority and automated retest
processing by using photometric and potentiometric detection technologies. The Alinity
c processing module uses photometric detection technology to measure sample
absorbance for the quantification of analyte concentration, uses potentiometric
detection technology to measure the electrical potential in a sample, and uses an
integrated chip technology (ICT) module to measure potentiometric assays
(electrolytes).
Alinity i processing A fully automated immunoassay analyzer that performs sample processing. The Alinity
module i processing module allows random and continuous access as well as priority and
automated retest processing by using chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay
(CMIA) detection technology. CMIA detection technology is used to determine the
presence of antigens, antibodies, and analytes in samples.
aliquot tube A conical tube (75 mm to 100 mm in height) that contains an aliquot of sample. Aliquot
tubes may be used with sample cups. If only a tube is used, the sample gauge can be
used to verify that the sample volume in the tube is adequate.
Alkaline Wash (c-series) An alkaline wash solution that is used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis.
bar code label A unique identifier that contains black bars that represent the sample information.
blank adjustment (c-series) A calibration type that uses the absorbance data of the reagent blank to
adjust the calibration curve.
bulk solutions Liquid solutions that are provided in large quantities for use during assay processing.
CLSI Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute. A nonprofit organization that provides a
communication forum for the development, promotion, and use of standards for the
worldwide medical science community.
consumables Replenishable items that are needed for sample processing on the Alinity ci-series.
Examples of consumables include bulk and onboard solutions, calibrators, controls,
reagents, and sample cups.
c-series The name used to refer to all Alinity chemistry processing modules in general.
curve shape method (i-series) An adjustment method that uses the relative light unit (RLU) values that are
stored in a reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the four-
parameter logistic curve fit or four-parameter logistic calibration (4PLC) parameters of
a master calibration.
cuvette washer (c-series) A device with eight nozzles that washes and dries the cuvettes before and
after each use.
diagnostic procedure A procedure that can be used to confirm the status of assemblies and mechanisms to
help identify and resolve operational problems.
FlexRate method (Alinity c) A method used to determine the concentration of samples for an enzymatic
assay that exceeds the linear range. Data points in the flex read time are used for
high-activity and high-concentration samples. Results calculated by using these data
points are identified by the FLEX result flag.
full calibration (c-series) The measurement of a reagent blank and all specified data points. The
absorbance value for each point is plotted against the known concentration and the
system software generates a new calibration curve. Unknown samples are then
evaluated against the calibration curve.
full calibration (i-series) The measurement of six points specified for a quantitative assay plotted
against known concentrations. The system software uses calibration data to generate
a calibration curve that is specific to a processing module.
host An auxiliary computer system or a laboratory information system (LIS) that can
communicate with the Alinity ci-series.
ICT (c-series) Integrated chip technology. The method used to simultaneously measure
sodium, potassium, and chloride. ICT methodology uses solid-state, ion-selective
electrodes that are contained in one chip (ICT module), which reduces the
maintenance that is necessary to perform electrolyte measurements.
ICT aspiration pump (c-series) A syringe-drive pump that uses the syringe on the right side of the pump to
deliver samples or ICT Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. After
measurement is completed, the ICT aspiration pump uses the syringe on the left side
of the pump to aspirate waste from the ICT high-concentration waste area to the high-
concentration waste tubing.
ICT module (c-series) An integrated chip that is a component of the ICT unit and contains the
sodium (Na+), potassium (K+), chloride (Cl-), and reference electrodes.
ICT Reference (c-series) A midconcentration standard solution that is aspirated and analyzed by the
Solution ICT module before and after each sample. The solution provides a reference potential
that is used in result calculation.
ICT unit (c-series) A device that has an ICT probe and an ICT module. The ICT unit is used to
perform the indirect potentiometric analysis of sodium (Na+), potassium (K+), and
chloride (Cl-). The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The ICT module simultaneously
measures Na+, K+, and Cl- by using integrated chip technology.
i-series The name used to refer to all Alinity immunoassay processing modules in general.
lamp (c-series) An optical device that provides the light source for photometric assay
measurement. The processing module uses a tungsten-halogen lamp.
load diverter (i-series) A mechanism that directs reaction vessels on the process path from the load
lane to the incubation lane during assay processing.
menu bar The area at the left side of the system software screens that provides navigation
elements that are used to display screens, flyouts, and menus.
message A user interface element that provides information about conditions or errors of
system operation.
System menu A command on the System menu that represents an available screen. When a
command System menu command is selected, the associated screen is displayed.
NOTES
NOTES
Index
1204 Waste Valve and Pump Test (i-series) (FSE
1 mL syringes (c-series) Logon)
replacing the, 865 diagnostic description, 806
1-point adjustment (c-series) 1206 Pre-Trigger and Trigger Valves and Pumps Test
description of, 688 (i-series)
1000 Optics Background (i-series) diagnostic description, 806
diagnostic description, 793 1208 Wash Zone Valves, Pumps, and Motors Test (i-
1005 Shutter Test (i-series) series)
diagnostic description, 794 diagnostic description, 807
1045 Optics Verification (i-series) (FSE Logon) 1210 Pre-Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series)
diagnostic description, 794 diagnostic description, 807
1100 Pipettor Motors Test (i-series) 1211 Trigger Precision and Accuracy (i-series)
diagnostic description, 795 diagnostic description, 808
1105 Pipettor Syringe and Pump Test (i-series) 1221 Wash Zone 1 Precision and Accuracy (i-series)
diagnostic description, 796 diagnostic description, 809
1111 Sample Pipettor Check and Calibration (i-series) 1222 Wash Zone 2 Precision and Accuracy (i-series)
diagnostic description, 796 diagnostic description, 809
1112 R1 Pipettor Check and Calibration (i-series) 1231 Wash Zone 1 Residual Volume (i-series)
diagnostic description, 797 diagnostic description, 810
1113 R2 Pipettor Check and Calibration (i-series) 1232 Wash Zone 2 Residual Volume (i-series)
diagnostic description, 797 diagnostic description, 811
1120 Sample Pipettor Syringe Precision and Accuracy
1241 Particle Capture Wash Zone 1 (i-series) (CSC
(i-series) Logon)
diagnostic description, 798 diagnostic description, 812
1121 R1 Pipettor Syringe Precision and Accuracy (i- 1242 Particle Capture Wash Zone 2 (i-series) (CSC
series) Logon)
diagnostic description, 799 diagnostic description, 812
1122 R2 Pipettor Syringe Precision and Accuracy (i- 1250 Vacuum Diagnostics (i-series) (FSE Logon)
series) diagnostic description, 813
diagnostic description, 800 1261 Wash Zone 1 Wash Monitoring (i-series)
1130 Sample Pipettor Pump Precision and Accuracy diagnostic description, 813
(i-series) 1262 Wash Zone 2 Wash Monitoring (i-series)
diagnostic description, 800 diagnostic description, 814
1131 R1 Pipettor Pump Precision and Accuracy (i- 1270 Bulk Solutions Motors and Sensors Test (i-
series) series)
diagnostic description, 801 diagnostic description, 815
1132 R2 Pipettor Pump Precision and Accuracy (i- 1300 Temperature Status (i-series)
series) diagnostic description, 816
diagnostic description, 802 1400 RV Loader and Sensors Test (i-series)
1160 Liquid Level Sense Test (i-series) diagnostic description, 816
description of, 803 1505 Diverter Test (i-series)
1200 Flush and Prime Fluidics (i-series) diagnostic description, 817
diagnostic description, 804 1510 Vortexer Test (i-series)
1202 Wash Cup Valves Test (i-series) diagnostic description, 818
diagnostic description, 805 1515 Process Path Motors Test (i-series)
1203 Long-Term Shutdown (i-series) (FSE Logon) diagnostic description, 818
diagnostic description, 805 1520 RV Load and Unload Test (i-series)
diagnostic description, 819
1600 RSM Transport Calibration 4003 Optics Total Test and ICT Data (c-series) (CSC
diagnostic description, 823 Logon)
1610 Reagent and Sample Manager Test diagnostic description, 777
diagnostic description, 824 4004 Beam Height Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon)
1620 RSM Bar Code Reader Test diagnostic description, 777
diagnostic description, 824 4101 Crash Sensor Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon)
1630 Sample Positioner Test (i-series) description of, 778
diagnostic description, 819 4102 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c-series)
1631 Sample Positioner Test (c-series) description of, 779
diagnostic description, 785 4103 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c-series)
1635 RSM Transport Test description of, 779
diagnostic description, 825 4104 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c-series)
1690 Reagent and Sample Manager Initialization description of, 779
diagnostic description, 825 4105 Sample Probe and Rack Alignment Test (c-
1703 Reagent Supply Center Test (i-series) series) (CSC Logon)
diagnostic description, 820 diagnostic description, 780
1715 Reagent Carousel and Reagent Transport 4106 Component Move (c-series)
Calibration (i-series) diagnostic description, 780
diagnostic description, 820 4202 Wash Cup Test (c-series) (FSE Logon)
1830 Buffer Run (i-series) diagnostic description, 781
diagnostic description, 821 4205 Flush Water Lines (c-series)
1890 Processing Module Initialization (i-series) diagnostic description, 782
diagnostic description, 822 4206 Flush Bulk Solutions (c-series)
1910 Gravimetric Calculations (i-series) (CSC Logon) diagnostic description, 782
diagnostic description, 822 4207 Move Cuvette Washer (c-series)
1D reagent bar code labels (c-series) diagnostic description, 783
guidelines, 412 4208 Probe and Mixer Wash (c-series)
1D reagent bar code report diagnostic description, 783
printing, 555 4209 Internal Probe Wash Pump Test (c-series) (FSE
2-point adjustment (c-series) Logon)
description of, 689 diagnostic description, 783
2500 Daily Maintenance (i-series) 4301 Temperature Status (c-series)
maintenance description, 768 diagnostic description, 784
2620 Manual Pipettor Probe Cleaning (i-series) 4701 Reagent Carousel Home (c-series)
maintenance description, 769 diagnostic description, 786
2625 Manual Wash Zone Probe Cleaning (i-series) 4703 Reagent Supply Center Test (c-series)
maintenance description, 769 diagnostic description, 786
2630 Manual Wash Cup Cleaning (i-series) 4801 Module Initialization (c-series)
maintenance description, 770 diagnostic description, 787
2900 Internal Decontamination (i-series) (CSC Logon) 4802 Robotics Test Tool (c-series) (FSE Logon)
maintenance description, 770 diagnostic description, 787
2920 Manual RSM Transport Cleaning 4803 Voltage Test (c-series)
maintenance description, 772 diagnostic description, 788
2925 Manual RSM Loading Area and Positioner 4804 Save or Restore DAQ Data (c-series) (FSE
Cleaning (i-series) Logon)
maintenance description, 771 diagnostic description, 788
4001 Optics Trigger Sensor Check (c-series) 4PLC data reduction methods (i-series)
diagnostic description, 776 description of, 693
4002 Absorbance Reads (c-series) x residual minimization (x-weighted), 693
diagnostic description, 776 y residual minimization (y-weighted), 693
5001 Mixer Alignment (c-series) (FSE Logon)
diagnostic description, 789
status of a TSB that failed to install to a status of Configure screen, General tab
Pending Verification (FSE Logon), 342 description of, 154
status of an installed TSB to a status of Install Failed Configure screen, Maintenance & Diagnostics tab
(FSE Logon), 341 description of, 310
user PINs, 167 configuring
changing default Abbott Mail, 200
printer, 183 AbbottLink settings (CSC Logon), 224
check valves (c-series) Alinity PRO, 221
replacing the, 868 assay display order, 282
checking ASTM communication, 217
system operation after installation, 152 audio alert, 208
chemical hazards authentication, 205
general precautions, 725 automatic backup, 220
overview of, 725 calibration ordering settings, 288
Clear Control Failure flyout control ordering settings, 288
element descriptions, 653 date, 205
clearances distance alert settings, 225
external waste pump, 412 HL7 communication, 214
system, 403 host interface, 211
clearing ICT module (c-series module), 174
control failures, 656 language, 205
CLI Diagnostic screen (FSE Logon) liquid waste container, 174
description of, 347 message alert, 208
CMIA reaction sequence module name (c-series module), 174
description of, 375 module name (i-series), 175
CMIA technology name, 205
description of, 375 number format, 205
codes onboard calibrators and controls (c-series), 174
processing, 602 onboard calibrators and controls (i-series), 175
comment optics values, 175
adding to an order, 590 panels, 285
comments personal display theme, 167
adding to a system update, 338 print screen file output destination, 198
adding to notes, 461 printer, 180
adding to results or exceptions, 612 priority sections, 174
Comments flyout reagent and sample manager, 174
element descriptions, 332 reports, 197
comments, adding retest options, 174
to Levey-Jennings points, 647 retest rules, 241
component replacement sample bar code checksums, 185
c-series processing center, 827 sample bar code labels, 185
c-series supply and pump center, 864 sample bar code length, 185
description of, 827 sample bar code start/stop characters, 185
i-series processing center, 892 sample bar code type, 185
i-series supply and pump center, 904 screen time-out, 205
optional, 912 shortcut icons, 218
computer and interface SmartWash settings (c-series), 243
specifications, 409 speaker volume, 205
Configure screen, Assay tab STAT protocol, 175
description of, 227 system, 154
Configure screen, Computer tab time, 205
description of, 201 Westgard rules, 309
calibration settings of assay parameters (i-series), Cal/QC Inventory screen, Search flyout, 520
238 Cal/QC Ordering screen, 287
calibrator data (c-series, 264 Calibration Status Details screen, 704
calibrator data (i-series), 266 Calibration Status screen, 702
general settings of assay parameters (c-series Calibrator Set screen, 255
photometric), 230 Calibrator Set View/Edit screen, 256
general settings of assay parameters (c-series Clear Control Failure flyout, 653
potentiometric), 231 Comments flyout, 332
general settings of assay parameters (calculated), Control Create/Edit screen, 291
234 Control Summary Details screen, 650
general settings of assay parameters (i-series), 232 Copy Backup flyout, 325
notes, 460 Create New User screen, 159
panel definition, 285 Create Order screen, Calibration tab, 594
printer, 181 Create Order screen, Control tab, 593
quality controls, 298 Create Order screen, Specimen tab, 591
result settings of assay parameters, 239 Current Firmware screen, 346
SmartWash settings (c-series), 245 Details for Log flyout, 755
user-defined maintenance procedures, 319 Edit User screen, 161
users, 162 General Settings screen, 203
electrical hazarads HL7 Communication screen, 213
awareness of, 734 Home screen, 464
electrical safety Host Connection Status flyout, 473
requirements, 734 Host Setup screen, 209
electrical specifications Import Calibrators screen (c-series), 258
system control module (SCM), 404 Import screen, 294
electromotive force measurement data reduction (c- Import/Export Assays screen, Export Files tab (c-
series potentiometric) series), 275
calculation, 675 Import/Export Assays screen, Import Files tab (c-
description of, 675 series), 276
element descriptions Install/Uninstall Assays screen, Available Files tab,
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, All tab, 480 268
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Assay Files tab, 481 Install/Uninstall Assays screen, Installed Files tab,
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Assay Inserts tab, 482 270
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, Calibrator Data tab, 484 Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, Available Files
Abbott Mail Inbox screen, System Updates tab, 483 tab, 311
Abbott Mail screen, 199 Install/Uninstall Procedures screen, Installed Files
AbbottLink Connection Status flyout, 478 tab, 312
AbbottLink screen, 222 Levey-Jennings (Graph) screen, 641
Add Printer flyout/Edit Printer flyout, 178 Log On screen, 454
Alert Center flyout, 927 Manual File Request screen, Assay Files tab, 486
Alinity PRO Connection Status flyout, 477 Manual File Request screen, Calibrator Data tab (c-
Archive File Location window, 667 series), 487
Archive flyout, 666 Message Details For flyout, 939
Assay Display Order screen, 281 Modules screen (c-series), 170
Assay Parameters screen, 229 Modules screen (i-series), 172
ASTM Communication screen, 216 Modules screen, reagent and sample manager
Audio Settings screen, 207 (RSM), 168
Automatic Backup screen, 219 Order Details (Specimen, Control, and Calibrator)
Backup flyout, 325 screen, 588
Backup/Restore screen, 324 Orders screen, 584
Bar Codes screen, 184 Orders screen, Search flyout, 586
Cal/QC Inventory screen, 519 Panel Definition screen, 283
Perform Procedure screen, 745 User-Defined Maintenance screen, Export tab, 317
Point Details screen, 644 Users Import screen, Users Export screen, 157
Print flyout, 659 Users screen, 156
Printer Queue flyout, 180 Version Details for Procedure flyout, 743
Printer Status/Queue flyout, 475 Westgard screen, 308
Printer Verification flyout, 179 emergency shutdown
Printers screen, 177 performing, 449
Procedures Log screen, Diagnostics tab, 754 emptying
Procedures Log screen, Maintenance tab, 753 bulk solution reservoirs (c-series), 1293
Procedures screen, 741 bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), 1297
Quality Control screen, 290 diluted wash buffer reservoir (i-series), 1301
Quality Control Summary screen, 648 high-concentration waste bottle and updating
Reagent Cartridge Details screen, 541 inventory (c-series), 514
Reagents and Supplies screen, Reagents/Diluents enabling
tab, 187 reagent cartridge, 560
Reagents and Supplies screen, Supplies tab, 189 enabling or disabling
Reagents screen, Current tab, 534 ICT module (c-series), 1304
Reagents screen, Historical tab, 538 environmental specifications and requirements
Reagents screen, Search flyout, 539 Alinity ci-series, 408
Report File Location window, 661 evaluating
Reports screen, 196 precision data, 1330
Requested Categories flyout, 488 exceptions
Rerun Options flyout, control order, 628, 629 deleting, 635
Result Details (Specimen and Control) screen, 624 transmitting to the host, 635
Results screen, Control tab, 620 excluding
Results screen, Exception tab, 621 Levey-Jennings points, 646
Results screen, Search flyout, 622 exporting
Results screen, Specimen tab, 618 c-series assay files, 278
Results screen, Unreleased tab, 617 user-defined maintenance procedures, 321
Sample Details (Specimen, Control, and Calibrator) users, 164
screen, 608 exposure
Sample Status screen, 604 to hot objects, 738
Sample Status screen, Search flyout, 606 external waste pump
Select Items window (c-series), 277 clearances, 412
Shortcuts, 218 description of, 123
Status Change flyout (FSE Logon), 333 dimensions, 411
Supplies screen (c-series), 501 electrical specifications and requirements, 411
Supplies screen (i-series), 505 illustration of, 123
System Logs screen, Abbott Mail tab, 938 weight, 411
System Logs screen, All Messages tab, 930 external waste pump (i-series)
System Logs screen, Configuration tab, 936 replacing the, 912
System Logs screen, Host tab, 937
System Logs screen, Informational tab, 933 F
System Logs screen, Inventory tab, 934
System Logs screen, Notifications/Alerts tab, 932 factor data reduction method (c-series photometric)
System Logs screen, User Access tab, 935 description of, 681
System Update Import screen, 334 file update statuses
System Updates screen, 329 descriptions of, 271
Troubleshooting screen, 342 flags
User Profile screen, 166 quality control result, 632
User-Defined Maintenance screen, Create/Edit tab, specimen result, 630
315
H I
handling consumables i-series
requirements, 714 electrical specifications and requirements, 405
hard drive processing module capacities, 399
specifications, 409 processing module characteristics, 393
hardware troubleshooting processing module specifications, operational, 396
c-series, 919 ICT module
i-series, 921 configuring expiration, 195
hazards ICT module (c-series module)
hot objects, 738 configuring, 174
mechanical, 735
M method comparison
description of, 1351
mail statuses qualitative worksheet (c-series), 1359
descriptions of, 491 qualitative worksheet (i-series), 1362
maintenance qualitative, performing, 1358
overview of, 740 quantitative worksheet (c-series), 1353
maintenance and diagnostic procedure files quantitative worksheet (i-series), 1356
installing, 314 quantitative, performing, 1351
uninstalling, 314 minimum sample volume
maintenance solutions (c-series) requirements, 423
description of, 139 mixers (Alinity c)
illustration of, 139 description of, 78
managing illustration of, 78
user PINs, 165 mixers (c-series)
manual backup replacing the, 855
performing, 326 module name (c-series module)
Manual File Request screen configuring, 174
description of, 486 module name (i-series)
Manual File Request screen, Assay Files tab configuring, 175
element descriptions, 486 Modules screen
Manual File Request screen, Calibrator Data tab (c- c-series element descriptions, 170
series) description of, 168
element descriptions, 487 i-series element descriptions, 172
measuring interval Modules screen, reagent and sample manager (RSM)
description of, 1345 element descriptions, 168
mechanical hazards monitor
description of, 735 adjusting the position, 57
menu bar specifications, 409
description of, 130
illustration of, 130
message alert
N
configuring, 208 name
message codes configuring, 205
assay-specific (1000-1999), 941 navigation pane
computer hardware peripheral (8000-8999), 941 Help window description, 30
general (0001-0999), 941 Help window illustration, 30
level sense and fluidics (3000-3999), 941 network connectors
maintenance and diagnostic (2000-2999), 941 description of, 56
optics and bar code reader (4000-4999), 941 illustration of, 56
robotics and sensor (5000-5999), 941 new users
software (9000-9999), 941 creating, 160
support system (6000-6999), 941 Notepad flyout
temperature (7000-7999), 941 description of, 458
Message Details For flyout notes
element descriptions, 939 adding comments, 461
message probable cause and corrective action creating, 459
viewing, 928 deleting, 461
message types deleting all unpinned, 462
descriptions of, 940 display order of comments, 461
messages editing, 460
deleting, 929 maximum number of comments, 461
viewing associated messages, 928 pinning, 459
processing center Q
Alinity i description, 96
Alinity i illustration, 96 qualitative method comparison
processing codes c-series worksheet, 1359
descriptions of, 602 i-series worksheet, 1362
processing module performing, 1358
Alinity c description, 66 quality control (QC) summary data
Alinity i description, 93 viewing, 656
c-series observed problems, 1264 quality control analysis
general description, 66 description of, 637
general observed problems, 1263 quality control data
i-series observed problems, 1268 importing, 304
optional components, 123 quality control data, imported
pausing, 447 deleting, 305
processing module capacities quality control import statuses
c-series, 398 descriptions of, 307
i-series, 399 quality control inserts
processing module characteristics printing, 306
c-series, 392 viewing, 306
i-series, 393 quality control lot
processing module corrective action procedures manually creating, 295
emptying the bulk solution reservoirs (c-series), 1293 quality control lots
emptying the bulk solution reservoirs (i-series), 1297 deleting, 303
emptying the diluted wash buffer reservoir (i-series), quality control result flags
1301 descriptions of, 632
enabling or disabling the ICT module (c-series), Quality Control screen
1304 description of, 289
manually unloading a cartridge or rack from the element descriptions, 290
reagent carousel, 1290 Quality Control Summary screen
processing module interface specifications description of, 648
description of, 409 element descriptions, 648
processing module specifications, electrical quality controls
c-series, 404 deleting, 302
i-series, 405 editing, 298
processing module specifications, liquid waste output quantitative method comparison
c-series, 407 c-series worksheet, 1353
i-series, 408 i-series worksheet, 1356
processing module specifications, operational performing, 1351
c-series, 395 quiet zone
i-series, 396 1D reagent bar code labels (c-series), 412
processing module wash (c-series) sample bar code labels, 417
description of, 148
processing priorities R
reagent and sample manager (RSM), 565
proprietary statement racks
description of, 16 illustration of, 144
pump center (Alinity c) removing from the sample positioners, 1305
components, 86 unloading from the reagent carousel, 1290
description of, 86 racks and cartridges
illustration of, 86 loading into trays, 523
racks, vial
loading for immediate use, 572
System Logs screen, Abbott Mail tab tests or exceptions for a specimen or control
element descriptions, 938 rerunning, 612
System Logs screen, All Messages tab time
element descriptions, 930 configuring, 205
System Logs screen, Configuration tab toolbar
element descriptions, 936 Help window description, 30
System Logs screen, Host tab Help window illustration, 30
element descriptions, 937 topic pane
System Logs screen, Informational tab Help window description, 35
element descriptions, 933 Help window illustration, 35
System Logs screen, Inventory tab total allowable error method
element descriptions, 934 verifying an LoQ claim, 1319
System Logs screen, Notifications/Alerts tab transmission statuses
element descriptions, 932 descriptions of, 634
System Logs screen, User Access tab transmitting
element descriptions, 935 exceptions to the host, 635
system operation precautions and requirements results to the host, 635
impact of failure to comply, 713 trays
system prime (i-series) illustration of, 145
description of, 148 loading on reagent and sample manager (RSM), 524
system security tripping hazards
Alinity systems, 13 description of, 738
description of, 13 troubleshooting
responsibility for, 13 Alert Center flyout element descriptions, 927
system update approach to, 918
adding comments, 338 troubleshooting package
applying manually (FSE Logon), 340 retrieving, 345
declining, 337 troubleshooting packages
downloading software, 336 descriptions of, 343
importing, 339 troubleshooting reagent variables (c-series)
installing, 336 calibrators, 923
printing documentation, 335 controls, 923
setting a declined update as available for description of, 923
installation, 339 reagent kits, 923
setting an applied update as available for installation troubleshooting reagent variables (i-series)
(FSE Logon), 340 calibrators, 924
verifying manually, 338 controls, 924
viewing documentation, 335 description of, 924
System Update Import screen reagent cartridges, 924
element descriptions, 334 Troubleshooting screen
System Updates screen description of, 342
description of, 328 element descriptions, 342
element descriptions, 329 troubleshooting system variables (c-series)
consumables, 919
T description of, 919
fluidics subsystems, 919
temperature hardware, 919
c-series, 395 optical subsystem, 919
environmental requirements, 408 software, 919
i-series, 396 troubleshooting system variables (i-series)
test statuses consumables, 921
descriptions of, 601 description of, 921